Home

Genie 2000 Operations Manual

1. Exit Editor Help Delete substance Figure 170 Dirt Has been Added Next we have to add some water using the Chemical Formula Composer on the left side of the window 1 Click on the element H 2 Enter 2 in the n field indicating 2 atoms of hydrogen 227 Using the Geometry Composer 3 Click on the green A button above the list to copy the H element from the list to the Formula box 4 Click on the element O 5 Insure that n shows a value of 1 indicating 1 atom of Oxygen 6 Click on the green A button to complete the formula for water H20 will be seen in the Formula text box 7 Type 25 into the left Mass Percentage field then click on the Add As Component button P directly above it to add the water to the dirt To complete the definition of mud enter the density name and comments as we did for bronze on page 226 Now click on the Load into Library button P to add mud to the Material Library Alternatively you could have simply used the Water already defined in the materi als library for the remaining 25 Combining Existing Materials to Make a New One Since water and dirtl are already in the Material Library we could have made our mud1 by simply combining them This is done by 1 Selecting dirt1 entering 75 as its Mass Percentage and clicking on the right hand Add as Component button 2 Repeat that process for water using 25 as
2. FT Generate Report Cancel Help Execute Figure 102 The NID Setup NID Range The identification is limited to the specified NID Range only peaks within those lim its will be considered for identification Note that though the stop channel initially de faults to a large value the algorithm will only search to the spectrum s highest channel NID Library Type in the fully specified name of a library NLB file to be used in the identification or click on Select then choose a file from the file open dialog box Perform MDA Test The Perform MDA Test is most useful in cases where a nuclide has many peaks with small branching ratios that would result in peaks that are below the MDA level such as in most low activity samples Enabling this function will ignore small peaks when calculating the identification confidence so that expected peaks below the MDA will not penalize the confidence test results Inhibit Acquisition Time Decay Correction If this option is enabled decay correction will not be performed during the count time Decay correction will still be performed for wait time the time between sample time and the start of the count and for build up time the time the sample is building up on a filter if any Analyze Menu Tolerance Value You must set the tolerance value in either energy or FWHM units this value can also be specified as Eff amp Match Tolerance in Calibration Setup on page 60 NID Co
3. T Add to existing results Generate Report Cancel Help Execute Figure 90 The User Specified Peak Locate Setup 125 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 126 Add to Existing Results and Tolerance If the Add to existing results box is checked each found peak will be compared with peaks listed in the peak results table A found peak that is closer to an existing peak than the specified Tolerance value either fixed Energy or variable FWHM is as sumed to be the listed peak and will be discarded A found peak that is farther away from an existing peak than the specified tolerance is considered to be a separate peak and will be merged with the existing peak results table If the Add to existing results box is not checked the current peak results table will be replaced by this search Generate Report If the Generate Report box is checked a predefined report will be generated when this phase is executed and will be displayed in the application s report window The report is defined in the AEF file as the Report Template Name and Section Name asso ciated with this phase User Specified This method using the parameters in Figure 90 calculates the centroid for each peak displayed in the Search Region as described in the User Specified Peak Locate sec tion of the Algorithms chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual Use MCA View Select this button to perform the Peak Locate using the
4. 52 Status screenentry 282 Window controls 52 Zero centroid o ee 52 Stabilizer Settings 29 Standard Genie 2000 installation 243 Standby delay o 56 Start Stop external 48 Starting data acquisition 47 Status hardwate Loi we ee a es 58 HVPS control 2 paaano a vas 55 Status bar enabling 229 Status page Marker infos o 119 Status report Entries explained 282 Step contin u m scos e ss ee a 61 Stopping data acquisition 47 Store ROIS s acron Eo ss He Ana ww eS 112 Strip function 2 2 2 0020 169 Summary of MID definitions 35 Super fine gain s es seus en 53 Supplemental nuclide libraries 191 Sweep counts preset 49 System Assembly sequence 239 Minimum requirements for 239 Tail curve selectionof 61 Template name in analysis reports 156 Time preset ovio e Be ee 48 123 Tolerance values use of 60 Toolbar setup Preferences 117 Toolbar enabling 229 TRP preamp Reset pulse width setting 281 CUP so Mak eRe ee Hea ew a E EAR 54 ULD control ADC 50 Unidentified second difference peak locate 124 Units Acton level 186 EffluentiDAC 2 452466 4 8056 8 5 185 Unloading a database definitio
5. Figure 203 Simulating Discrepancies in Absorber Thickness LACE Analysis Figure 204 shows how the activity ratio changes when the sample absorber density is different from the calibration absorber density of 2 7 g cm3 A negative slope indicates that the measured sample absorber density is less than the calibration absorber density while a positive slope indicates that the measured sample absorber density is greater than the calibration absorber density Absorber Density Absorber Density gtm gt 2 5 Se f o og 1000 Energy kev Figure 204 Simulating Discrepancies in Absorber Density Figure 205 shows how the activity ratio changes when the sample matrix material type is different from the calibration matrix material type of aluminum Upward concavity indicates that the measured sample matrix material type has a lower atomic number than the calibration matrix material type while downward concavity indicates that the measured sample matrix material type has a higher atomic number than the calibration matrix material type 297 Line Activity Consistency Evaluator Matrix Z Matrix Material U Z 92 s Fe Z 26 4 K Z 19 Al Z 13 O Z 8 e Li Z 3 a 0 _ Activity Ratio 1000 Energy kev Figure 205 Simulating Discrepancies in Matrix Material Type Figure 206 shows how the activity ratio changes when the sample absorber material
6. Figure 188 Entering the IP Address 255 Software Installation Windows XP Setup This procedure supercedes the TCP IP configuration procedure for Windows XP in stallations that do not contain a network adapter Communication to the Virtual Data Manager VDM is performed using the TCP IP network protocol stack With Windows 2000 installations the configuration of this protocol differs somewhat from the Windows NT installations when network adapter is not resident in the computer Follow the steps outlined below to configure the TCP IP protocol stack 1 Connect the Genie hardware key to the local parallel port 2 Log in to a local Administrator account 3 Click on Start Settings then Network and right click on Network 4 This will launch the New Network Connection Wizard Click Next to continue 5 Select Setup and Advanced Network Connection as shown in Figure 189 Click on Next New Connection Wizard Network Connection Type What do you want to do Connect to the Internet Connect to the Internet so you can browse the Web and read email Connect to the network at my workplace Connect to a business network using dial up or YPN so you can work from home a field office or another location O Set up a home or small office network Connect to an existing home or small office network or set up a new one Set up an advanced connection Connect directly to another computer using your serial pa
7. 135 Crossover function 90 Current database viewing the 37 Data plotting 44 Database Viewing the current 37 Datasource Closing as s cum a a we 43 Ment os ee a es eee we Pee eee 174 Opening as cuba adas 41 SAVE dc he Bw a ee baw 43 Show all crisis 175 Using more thanone 41 Datasource overview Acquisition information 170 Analysis information 171 Calibration information 172 Datasources comparing ies eisene remena 158 Defining an MCA cos e606 nia rs A 26 Delay Acquisition e ec eed a 56 Standby 6 4 iG a a 56 Deleting A certificate file entry 198 ANROL 22 6 ba ee oso 112 Deleting a sequence step 163 201 Deleting an MCA 25 Detection limits MDA Currie and KTA 147 Device setup corsa a eS s 26 Display All plot chamels 159 Preferences oi a ee eae Ge a 113 Selecting the scale 110 Displaymenu 108 Display update rate 2 116 Drop peak function 72 DSA2000 MCA setup 27 Edit colors ooo ocios 64 644445 5 113 Editing A nuclide library 177 aremote VDM 17 An MCA Definition 36 An MID Definition 36 Sample information 160 The certificate file line data 197 the energy list osa sora ee ee ms 219 Editin
8. Figure 143 Extracting Nuclides From a Certificate Selected energy lines can be extracted simply by clicking on those lines in the list box or click on Select all to extract all lines Energy Units Though energies are stored in keV the Energy Units command can change how en ergy units are shown in the editor s dialog boxes and in reports The Dialog Box in Figure 144 allows you to select which energy units you want to display eV keV MeV or Other The proper Conversion Factor for other units is defined as the number of keV units equal to 1 other unit For example the conversion factor for MeV would be 1000 be cause there are 1000 keV units in 1 MeV Editing a Certificate File Energy Units C ev C keV C Mey Other key Conversion factor fi 0000 Cancel Help Figure 144 Selecting the Energy Units Editing a Certificate File The easiest way to see how the Certificate File Editor works is to edit an existing file so that s where we ll begin Opening a Certificate File Select the File Open command to load a Certificate File then select the NBSSTD CTF file The result will be the screen in Figure 145 Ni Certificate File Editor Nbsstd ctf File Options Help Title Canberra Spectrum 2 Certificate Quantity 1 unit s Assay date 9 1 1978 at 6 00 00 AM Original Certificate Browse r Line Nuclide CD 109 Half Life 463 9 f x 2 A Energy 88 097 key Uncertainty 01 Ag
9. For example DET DET1 or HOTLAB1 DET Ge2 158 Analyze Menu Note that since the vertical scale should be automatically determined for printed comparisons Auto must be selected in the VFS Max Counts box Full Channel Display The normal method of spectrum plotting compresses adjacent channels to simplify the graph Check the Full channel display box to display a data point for every channel in the range of channels being plotted This option is only effective for a range of more than 1024 channels Save Datasource This phase specifies the save location for an open datasource If the phase is invoked from the Analyze menu the save will occur immediately after you click the Execute button Note Although analysis sequences can be executed in a command line environ ment using REXX or ANALYZE EXE directly the Save Datasource step will only work in that environment if automatic file naming has been en abled in the Sequence Preferences dialog on page 165 In an Analysis Sequence File the phase can appear more than once as a step The Save Datasource window in Figure 113 will appear once for each step when the sequence begins execution Save in 1 CAMFILES ea eE Es 0000001 CNF La Test_spe cnt a Test_bkg cnf Nbsstd cnt Naidemo cnf La Cernipf cnf File name 0000002 Save as type cam Files CNF Cancel Help Description Figure 113 Save Datasource Dialog 159 Gam
10. Note When you open the MID editor on a remote VDM server while it s in use Genie 2000 will prevent certain operations with the VDM The InSpector 2000 Simulator Genie 2000 V2 1 and later includes InSpector 2000 Simulator software designed as a tutorial for or a demonstration of Genie 2000 without the need for an actual MCA a detector and associated front end electronics The Simulator mimics a fully function ing InSpector 2000 and works within Genie 2000 as though it were an actual MCA with working Adjust Controls and simulated data acquisition For more information on the Simulator please refer to Appendix E The InSpector 2000 Simulator The MID Wizard To use the MID Wizard open the Genie 2000 folder and select the MID Wizard icon to start the definition process Restrictions The Wizard does not support e Definition of multiplexer MXR inputs This includes devices such as the Al pha Analyst 17 MCA Input Definition e Configuration of remote VDMs For these situations you must use the MID Editor page 21 Using the Wizard To use the MID Wizard open the Genie 2000 folder and select the MID Wizard icon to see the Step 1 screen Note The screens shown here are examples the screens you see may vary de pending on the MCA type you specify Step 1 The first screen Figure 2 lets you select the MCA you re creating the definition for Click on the next to the Network MCAs board
11. Simplified Marinelli Beaker Figure 157 Displaying a Geometry Template The numbers in the drawing correspond to the row and column position of the element in the sample Dimensions table For example the value for the dimension labeled 2 1 the diameter of the detector well is entered into Row 2 Detector Well Column d 1 Auto and Fixed The two Picture Scale buttons in Figure 157 are used to resize the window for easier viewing Use the Close button to exit the viewer 214 Editing the Detector and Sample Dimensions Notes A Source to Detector distance of 0 mm is permitted for example when the source is resting directly on the detector end cap For geometries where it is physically appropriate additional Source to Detector data fields for parameters such as source orientation rel ative to the detector s axis will be found Refer to the descriptions of the various template descriptions in the Standard LabSOCS Template Drawings chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual for further details Save Data As User Version You can save a partial description as a custom template for future use For example if you will be using several different Marinelli Beakers for sample assay you may wish to save a partial definition now in order to reduce geometry definition time in the fu ture Click on the Save Data As User Version button in the upper left corner of the screen in Figure 154 page 211 to
12. Emission Rate 514 320 gps or aps per unit quantity Rate Uncertainty 410 x IV Use for Calib INIT Change Delete Clear Nuclide Energy keV Rate ZUncert Half Life CD 109 917 680 272 40 D 551 380 S 137 70 D 1738 500 46 62 D 391 688 1651 400 115 00 D 513 996 2751 600 64 85 D 661 638 1424 100 30 00 Y 898 021 10231 000 106 66 D 1173 208 3626 100 5 27 Y m Figure 145 Editing a Certificate File 195 Using the Certificate File Editor The Header Data At the top of the screen are the Title Quantity Assay Date and Original Certificate which are used as follows Title The title you enter here will be used when a report is printed Quantity This is the size volume or mass of the standard used in efficiency calculations If the activity of a standard source is known to be the total activity content of the standard enter 1 in the Quantity field For example if a 5 mL standard sample is known to con tain 1 uCi of Co the Quantity should be entered as 1 and the activity as 1 uCi or the equivalent emission rate in gammas or alphas per second If the activity of a standard source is known to be an activity concentration enter the real standard quantity in the Quantity field For example if a 5 mL standard sample is known to contain 0 2 wCi mL of Co the Quantity should be entered as 5 and the ac tivity as 0 2 wCi mL or the equivalent emission rate in gammas or alphas per second p
13. and Activity Corrections sections of the Algorithms chapter of the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual MDA Confidence Factor The MDA Confidence factor for NID with Interference Correction is the same that used for standard NID except that there is an added function This factor governs the allowed uncertainty of the activity results which must exceed its own uncertainty times a factor related to the MDA Confidence Factor The smaller the MDA Confi dence Factor the larger the multiplier Note that this factor is applied only if the 95 Critical Level test which is set in either the Sum Non Linear LSQ Fit Peak Area screen page 133 the VMS Standard Peak Search screen page 131 or the Standard Background Subtract screen page 139 is enabled 145 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 146 YY NID plus Interference Correction Setup DE range Start channel fi Stop channel 4096 NID library CAGENIE2K4CAMFILESYSTDLIB NLB Select J Perform MDA Test J Inhibit Acg Time Decay Correction Tolerance 1 00 keV NID Confidence 0 30 threshold Energy C FWHM MDA Confidence factor 300 Cascade correction Coincidence CA GENIE2K CAMFILEStcoi_lib clb library Geometry CS Composer file Select J Perform cascade correction J Generate Report Cancel Help Figure 103 The NID with Interference Correction Setup Cascade Correction Canberra s patented Cascade Corre
14. Mass number oos recess enansa 189 Nuclide energy 189 Nuclidename 188 Section name in analysis reports 156 Security key installing 240 Selecting abase template 209 a geometry template 209 Selecting an analysis algorithm 163 201 Sequence file Editing aoa ge bk ea ea a eee a 200 Opening a cere cereti wean ee as 200 Sequence preferences 164 202 Setup device o ce eae bee eee eae 26 Setting the assay date 2 2 2 66 82 the high voltage 55 The pole zero manually 278 The TRP reset pulse width 281 Up an analysis algorithm 163 202 Settings High voltage 31 Mputa seda dead 34 Stabilizer ca is eed Sou 29 Settings calibration 60 Setup calibration se osc 0 000 60 Shaping control amplifier 53 Show All datasQUICES o o o 175 Efficiency calibration 93 Energy coefficients 72 Simulator InSpector 2000 17 287 Smooth FUNCION oe eG eme e e aoe oe 169 How it works 170 Spectrum labels 116 Spectrum plottinga 44 Split command 229 Stabilizer Adjustmentof 0 0 51 Gain centroid o o 52 Mode controls 52 Overrange condition 52 Spacing controls
15. Reasonable settings usually result in convergence within 3 iterations so 5 might be a typical Iteration Limit setting Preset Live Time Select the live time in seconds that each iteration s data acquisition is to be performed This acquisition time should be long enough to provide adequate statistics for a suc cessful peak search analysis The acquisition time may typically range from 10 seconds to several minutes depend ing on the source intensity and desired Percent Gain Shift Tolerance A typical button source in the 37 Bq 1 Ci range placed at the detector will probably provide suffi cient counts depending on branching ratios after about 30 seconds Optimizing the Preset Live Time may initially require some experimentation Percent Gain Shift Tolerance The Percent Gain Shift Tolerance is the percent deviation that the average gain correc tion factor can deviate from unity after a successful gain adjustment Given sufficient acquisition time to adequately determine peak centroids a Percent Gain Shift Tolerance of 1 or less for high resolution HPGe detectors and perhaps up to several percent for low resolution Nal detectors is usually a good starting point Optimizing the Percent Gain Shift Tolerance in conjunction with the Preset Live Time may initially require some experimentation Adjust Zero Check the Adjust Zero box to cause the ADC zero to be adjusted after each iteration The checkbox is enabled only when the A
16. Requires purchase of 502 and optionally S501 503 S505 S506 or S509 for one computer at the location Genie 2000 Software 520 Genie 2000 Right to Copy Basic Including e Right to copy and execute S500 S501 S503 S505 and 510 on one additional networked computer e Requires purchase of S500 and optionally S501 S503 505 S506 or S510 for one computer at the location Application Options There are a large number of optional application software packages available for the Genie 2000 spectroscopy platform Several of these optional applications are de scribed below For easy reference the printed version of this manual includes the Models S505 QA S506 IPF and S509 Alpha Spectroscopy User s Manuals The PDF versions of these manuals are in separate files S503 PROcount PC Control Procedures e Complete procedures for routine sample counts e Calibrate procedures e Quality control procedures requires S505 e Background counting procedures e System maintenance e Procedure for complete gamma analysis requires S501 e Requires S500 or S502 S505 Genie 2000 Quality Assurance Software e Tracks and reports on the performance of your Genie 2000 spectroscopy system e Interactively establishes a database of key system performance parameters e Warns you if the parameters drift outside the allowable warning and error limits which you have set e Includes a comprehensive statistical analysis report
17. m Proxy server I Connect through a proxy server tus Figure 185 Connect to Internet Non Network VDM Configuration This section provides procedures for VDM configurationof an non network Windows 2000 or Windows XP system Windows 2000 Setup This procedure supercedes the TCP IP configuration procedure for Windows 2000 in stallations that do not contain a network adapter Communication to the Virtual Data Manager VDM is performed using the TCP IP network protocol stack With Windows 2000 installations the configuration of this protocol differs somewhat from the Windows NT installations when network adapter 253 Software Installation is not resident in the computer Follow the steps outlined below to configure the TCP IP protocol stack 1 Connect the Genie hardware key to the local parallel port 2 Log in to a local Administrator account 3 Click Start Setting Click on the Network and Dialup Connections 4 Double click on Make New Connection This will launch the Network Connection Wizard Click on Next to continue 5 Select Connect to a Private Network through the Internet as shown in Figure 254 186 Click on Next Network Connection Wizard Network Connection Type You can choose the type of network connection you want to create based on your network configuration and your networking needs Dial up to private network Connect using my phone line modem or ISDN C Dial up to the
18. nbsstd cnf File MCA Calibrate Display Analyze Edit Options Datasouce Help clara jel MES oa 48 Idle Channel 2895 1332 4 keV Acquire and Off Clear Counts 2271 Preset 0 4000 00 ROI Index Datasource pr EA i _ FS 4096 a ha iaa y A a e a A n s Left Marker 2859 1315 9 keV FWHM FWTM 2 482 4 631 keV Right Marker 2917 1342 4 keV Gaussian Ratio 1 024 Centroid 2893 1331 3 keV ROI Type Area 14029 1 08 Integral 17215 Figure 80 A Typical Expanded Display 109 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 110 Rescaling With the Rectangle Scale Changing the height of the rectangle will automatically rescale the expanded display to accommodate the data in the rectangle The normal unexpanded display s VFS will not change Pressing CTRL M on the keyboard will move the markers to the sides of the rectangle in the lower half and to either end of the expanded region in the upper half The Scale menu lets you select the method of setting the display s vertical full scale auto or manual and the scale type linear or log The scale type you choose can be saved as a permanent setting see Display Preferences Save on page 113 Manual Manual lets you adjust the display s vertical full scale either by using a mouse to change the scroll bar at the right side of the spectrum display or by pressing the key board s up arrow or down arrow key
19. 001 i Gran 00 2 58778E 001 1000 00 2 10211E 001 1400 00 1 70943E 001 2000 00 1 32062E 001 Cross over Mass fi 61383E 003 Grams Recalculate Comment PART_123 456 Description fISOCS UNITS ACT G PART_123 456 Eff Geom ID 6Lass_BEAKER_1 E aa Figure 68 Results of an Efficiency Mass Calibration 87 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis For a discussion on how the mass area and length of the various geometry definitions impact the analysis results refer to the LabSOCS ISOCS Technical Notes chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual Efficiency Results The list box shows the efficiency calculated for each of the energy points Show Select the Show button to view the calibration graphically as shown in Figure 69 Please refer to Efficiency Show on page 93 for a complete discussion of this func tion Efficiency Calibration Curves m Curve Low Energy Measured High Energy Dual C Linear C Empirical Interpolated r Scale Order of the polynomial x Energy ke Peak Drop PK Datasource C GENIE2K CAMFILES Nbsstd cnf InfE ff 1 045e 002 6 466e 001 n E 1 526e 001 n E 2 1 590e 000 In Ey 3 6 112e 002 In E 4 Cancel Help LisPks Eire Figure 69 Show ISOCS Efficiency Calibration Report Select the Report button in Figure 67 page 87 to display the complete calibration re port shown in Figure 70 Store To save the calibrat
20. Calibrate Menu e Ifthe average gain correction factor satisfies the specified Percent Gain Shift Tolerance adjustment is complete specifying double convergence requires this to occur twice successively e Ifthe average gain correction factor does not satisfy the specified Percent Gain Shift Tolerance the gain and possibly the zero is adjusted appro priately 4 Clears the spectrum 5 These steps are repeated until one of the following occurs e The routine completes successfully e The specified maximum number of iterations is reached e An acquisition is manually aborted Setting Up AGA The Auto Gain Adjust Setup screen is used to select the parameters to be used by the routine Figure 75 Auto Gain Adjust Setup and Saye D2K_8164 Certificate File j Convergence a1 81642 CTF y Select e Single Peak Search ASF C Double JAGA_PK_ONLY ASF y Select EEA Ko Preset Live Percent Gain Shift Time Tolerance 100 E V Adjust Zero DA Transfer MV Before J After BA File Cancel Save Help Figure 75 Auto Gain Adjust Dialog 99 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Certificate File Selects the Certificate File CTF to be used for the gain adjustment calculations The certificate file contains the energies and emission rates of the calibration source If the detector datasource is efficiency corrected by the specified Peak Search ASF the emission rate data will be used as an aid i
21. Energy interval is 45 0 7000 0 defined by DCG Manual editing Energy ke Error Remove m Files Load energy list Save energy list Use Default Energies Cancel Apply Help Figure 162 The Energy List Dialog Energy key Error Changing the Integration Settings Selecting the Integration tab in Figure 162 brings up the dialog box in Figure 163 which is used to change the integration settings for efficiency calculation For a dis cussion on how these parameters affect the efficiency calculation refer to the ISOCS Technical Notes chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual Convergence This parameter defines the maximum acceptable deviation in the results of the effi ciency calibration calculations The default value of 1 typically yields the best trade off between accuracy and computation time MDRPN The Use MDPRN option Maximum Detector Reference Point Number should al ways be checked default to enable a process that increases the accuracy of the LabSOCS ISOCS computations for close detector geometries A Value of 4 has been found to be the optimum for most applications Accordingly this value will be used in the calculations if the Use MDRPN defined for detector check box is enabled Show Progress Bar Select Yes to enable display of the Progress Bar during the Efficiency Calibration Cal culation 220 Checking the Geometry s Validity Paramet
22. For successful execution of AGA the selected sequence must include at least a peak locate step and a peak area step such as Peak_sho asf installed with Genie 2000 Ensure that the peak search parameters are optimized to locate those peaks that corre spond to the true energies in the specified certificate file while locating as few extrane ous peaks as possible If the specified ASF includes an efficiency correction which requires the detector to be efficiency calibrated to the source specified in the certificate file the emission rate information is used with measured count rate data to help match found peaks to certifi cate lines Otherwise only the energy information is used for matching Single Double Convergence Select either Single or Double convergence to determine whether the routine com pletes successfully after getting the average gain correction factor to satisfy the speci fied Percent Gain Shift Tolerance either once or twice successively Double 100 Calibrate Menu convergence may minimize any possible overshoot or undershoot bias but requires more iterations Iteration Limit Specify the maximum number of iterations that can be performed If convergence is not obtained before the specified limit is reached the algorithm will stop with an error The typical number of iterations required to reach convergence depends on the Preset Live Time as compared to the source intensity and the Percent Gain Shift Tolerance
23. IP addresses to host names Each entry should be kept on an individual line The IP address should be placed in first column followed by the corresponding host name The IP address and the host name should be separated by at least one space Additionally comments such as these may be inserted on individual lines or following the machine name denoted by a symbol For example 102 54 94 97 rhino acme com source server Se H H HHH HOH OH OH OH OH OH E E H H H H H 38 25 63 10 x acme com x client host 127 0 0 1 localhost 200 200 200 5 nodel Node 1 IP address Additional TCP IP Installation Tips Genie 2000 uses by default the port numbers 1200 1300 and 2000 when creating socket connections for client server communications These are in the range of user defined services as specified by the TCP IP standard It is possible that these may be defined by another application on your computer which will cause conflicts with Genie 2000 If problems persist in establishing client connections to the VDM this may be a possible cause of the problems To verify examine the file WINDOWS SERVICES Windows 98 Me or WINNT SYSTEM32 DRIVERS ETC SERVICES Windows NT 2000 XP as shown below 251 Software Installation Copyright c 1993 1995 Microsoft Corp i This file contains port numbers for well known services as defined by RFC 1060 Assigned Numbers i Format lt service name gt lt port numb
24. If the nuclide has a daughter defined in the nuclide library but the daughter was not found in the datasource an activity record is created for the daughter and its activity is calculated assuming 0 for the uncorrected activity and stored The mathematical expressions used for the corrected activities and their uncertainties are given in the Parent Daughter Correction section of the Algorithms chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual Generate Report If the Generate Report checkbox is checked a report will automatically be generated and displayed in the report window after the analysis has executed In this report if a nuclide s activity has been corrected by the Parent Daughter Correction algorithm it is flagged with a special symbol in the left hand margin The name of the report template file and the name of section to be used are defined in the Analysis Engine File entry for this algorithm Detection Limits S501 Gamma Option The Detection Limits step contains the algorithms to perform MDA or KTA MDA used for German regulatory compliance and LLD calculations If applied to a spectrum collected with a blank sample or in an empty shield the De tection Limits calculation is equivalent to an LLD calculation 147 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 148 The MDA algorithm Figure 104 calculates the MDA values for all the nuclides as described in the MDA Calculations section of the Algorithms chapter in
25. Previous Y radium 102 4 Hext 4 Energy keV thorium In R 0 691 0_096 0_021 ln E Ratio Y Scale X Scale View Weighted Mean 0 4243 a 56 145 I X Grid c i Y Auto Y Auto i Key Line 2315 32082 FT Y Grid Save Preferences Print Graph Help Figure 216 A File Opened for Viewing The graph shows the data points and curve for a single calculated equation The nu clide list to the right of the graph lists all nuclides in the datasource Clicking on a nuclide name will select the nuclide for display Clicking on Next or Previous buttons will select the next or previous nuclide name in the list The Weighted Mean or Key Line curve whichever button is selected will be displayed along with the data points defined by the Energy Ratio pairs where the Ratio is the Weighted Mean or Key Line ratio The error bars are the calculated ratio uncertainties The equation defining the displayed curve is shown just below the graph This equa tion corresponds to the selected Ratio type The screen controls are defined below Ratio Select Weighted Mean or Key Line curve for display The Weighted Mean button is disabled if NID w Interf Correction was not run on this datasource Y Scale Includes edit boxes for specifying the Y axis limits for viewing Clicking Auto allows LACE to calculate limits based on the data points for the displayed nuclide 307 Line Activity Consistenc
26. Select Extract then click on Open and double click on a nuclide library name in the Files list box The Extract Library Nuclides list box will be populated with the nuclides from the selected library as seen in Figure 130 Weg Extract Library Nuclides Extracting From Stdlib nlb Select all zl Deselect all Cancel Help Figure 130 The Extract List Has Been Populated Single nuclides can be extracted simply by clicking on the nuclide name in the list box or click on Select all to extract all lines 182 The Options Menu Energy Units Though energies are stored in keV the Energy Units command can change how en ergy units are shown in the editor s dialog boxes and in reports The dialog box in Fig ure 131 allows you to select which energy units you want to display eV keV MeV or Other C eV C keV C Mey Other kev Conversion factor fi 0000 Cancel Help Figure 131 Energy Units Dialog The proper Conversion Factor for other units is defined as the number of keV units equal to 1 other unit For example the conversion factor for MeV would be 1000 because there are 1000 keV units in 1 MeV MPC Units To set the MPC units click on MPC Units in the Option Menu You ll see the dialog box shown in Figure 132 where you can select the MPC Activity Units uCi or Bq for the library and the Volume Units cm3 m3 ml or 1 for each of the MPC limit vari ables in the library 183 Usi
27. The whole purpose behind building MCA Input Definitions is to let Genie 2000 know the number and types of MCAs you ll be using with your system You do this by load ing one or more MCA Definition Files into the MCA Runtime Configuration Data base This database is shared by all of the programs which make up the Genie 2000 software package and is used by those programs to gain access to the actual MCA hardware in your system In this section we ll take a look at the procedures used for setting up that database Viewing the Current Database To view the current contents of the database click on the Database menu s View command which will pop up the display shown in Figure 25 If you click on a line in 37 MCA Input Definition the list you can use the Device and Settings menus to look at details of that definition Click on OK to close the View window View Runtime Input Definition Database Figure 25 Viewing the Database Loading and Unloading Definitions The Load Unload functions will be disabled while any Acquisition and Analysis appli cations are running and have open datasources This prevents one user from altering the runtime database while another user is accessing it Before you can use a Definition whether created with the MID Wizard or with the MID Editor it must be loaded into the MCA Runtime Configuration Database de scribed on page 37 Wizard Definitions An MCA Definition created with the MID W
28. This is the Sum mary menu which is shown in Figure 23 The Summary menu has two commands By MCA and By Input which change the order in which the information in the Input Definition Table is displayed By MCA means that the first column of the table will display the MCA type that is being used for each entry If you choose By Input the MCA and Input columns will be reversed in the display and the Inputs will be sorted alphabetically You can choose either method but in the case of systems with a large number of in puts By Input is an easier display to understand than By MCA 35 MCA Input Definition SUMmMmary Y By MCA By Input Figure 23 The Summary Menu Editing an MCA Definition To edit an MCA Definition use the MID Editor s File Open command to select the file and open it in the editor Editing a File in the MCA Runtime Configuration Database If the Definition you want to edit has been loaded into the MCA Runtime Configura tion Database it must first be unloaded before it can be opened in the editor See Un loading the Definition on page 39 for instructions Viewing the File Details If you re not sure which file you want to edit select a file then click on the Info but ton to see further information about the file as shown in Figure 24 File Name DSA 2000 File Descriptor This text describes the file File Type MCA Input Definition Editor Version Figure 2
29. instance enter 37000 here Print Spectrum The Print Spectrum dialog Figure 112 lets you set the parameters that control the way a hard copy printout of the spectrum will appear 157 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis VFS Choose either Linear or Log for the vertical full scale of the graph Max Counts The maximum number of counts can either be determined automatically or chosen by the user from the drop down list This maximum must be determined automatically if a second spectrum is to be overlaid for comparison purposes BBY Print Spectrum VFS Linear Log Max Counts Auto T ROI max range 1024 Start Channel End Channel I Compare to other datasource Path F Full channel display no compression Cancel Help Execute Figure 112 The Print Spectrum Dialog ROI To print only a part of the spectrum check ROI then enter the region s starting and ending channel numbers The starting channel must be at least 1 The maximum num ber of ROI channels that can be printed is 1024 Compare to Other Datasource To overlay your current spectrum with that of a second datasource check Compare to other datasource and specify the datasource e Choose the datasource with the Select button e Type in the fully specified datasource path for any CNF CAM file For example C genie2k camfiles Nbsstd cnf e Type in any detector name prefixing it with DET
30. sor must be on the peak that is being used for calibration Select the Cursor button to add the window s cursor channel position to the Channel text box Now enter an energy value in the Energy text box and press Accept to add the data to the list box Show This function is available only when at least two energy channel pairs have been en tered either by you or by the system When you select the Show button the energy calibration curve will be displayed as a graph Please refer to Energy Show on page 72 for a complete discussion and an illustration of this function Delete To remove a line and its values from the list box highlight the line then select the De lete button Calibrate Menu Energy Coefficients Selecting Energy Coefficients displays a dialog box Figure 44 which allows you to edit or manually enter known energy calibration coefficients for the energy vs chan nel FWHM vs energy and tail vs energy curves wy Energy Calibration Coefficients Energy keV 4s5e7e001 Ch p h fo FWHM 9211e001 ke 3c67e002 E12 LoTail 8235 001 keV 33008004 E Cancel Show Help Figure 44 The Energy Coefficients Dialog If you edit an existing calibration curve any points previously used to generate that curve will be deleted and will not be available for further Populate operations on the current datasource Show Button Select the Show button to display the energy calibratio
31. type is different from the calibration absorber material type of aluminum Upward concavity indicates that the measured sample absorber material type has a lower atomic number than the calibration absorber material type while downward concavity indicates that the measured sample absorber material type has a higher atomic number than the calibration absorber material type Absorber Z O 7 Absorber Material Ph Z 82 s Fe Z 26 a K Z 19 Al Z 13 O Z 8 e Li Z 3 2 w m 2 o x 1000 Energy keV Figure 206 Simulating Discrepancies in Absorber Material Type 298 LACE Analysis Figure 207 shows how the activity ratio changes when the sample source detector dis tance is different from the calibration source detector distance of 10 cm A LACE analysis is not very sensitive to this discrepancy In general changes in geometry af fect all energies equally source Detector Distance ES Source Detector Distance cm 2 E oO jue ES o Ed 1000 Energy keV Figure 207 Simulating Discrepancies in Source Detector Distance In general a negative slope indicates that the material attenuation accounted for in the efficiency calibration is greater than that of the measured sample while a positive slope indicates that the material attenuation accounted for in the efficiency calibration is less than that of the measured sample Excessive concavi
32. 0 Bold 1 Underline 0 Strikeout 0 FixedWidth 1 Charset 0 Though this example shows all options only the options you want to change need to be specified in the INI file Values that are not being changed can be omitted Option Values The valid values for each of the customization options are listed below Point 6 7 8 9 Facename Courier New MS Sans Serif Italic 0 or 1 Bold 0 or 1 Underline 0 or 1 Strikeout 0 or 1 Fixedwidth 0 or 1 Charset 0 ANSI 1 Default 204 Russian 136 CHINESEBIG5 255 OEM Facename can be any valid font facename currently installed in the system Valid point sizes are determined based upon the font selected Most fonts support a range from 6 to 72 Sample Files A number of sample files are automatically installed with the Basic Spectroscopy soft ware e Spectral data files gamma and alpha CNF e Certificate file CTF e Nuclide library files NLB 275 Genie 2000 Configuration e Analysis sequence files ASF Report template files TPL Batch procedure files REX 276 Adjusting the PUR LTC C Technical Information This appendix contains instructions on adjusting the PUR LTC performing a manual pole zero for an amplifier adjusting a TRP preamp s reset pulse width and additional information on some of Status Screen s entries Adjusting the PUR LTC To achieve the highest performance of your amplifier s Live Time Corrector it may be nece
33. 0 041 4 0 030 In K Figure 213 LACE Result with Absorber Changed to Aluminum 108 Energy kev In R 1 046 0 152 0 030 ln E l Figure 214 LACE Result with Absorber Changed to Cadmium Launching the Viewer To enhance the range and power of a LACE analysis it is possible to combine differ ent nuclides if they are related and the relative abundances are known For instance radium thorium and 298U can be combined with respective progeny nuclides when they are in secular equilibrium In addition nuclides that are always found in the same ratio can be combined such as 5U and 238U in natural uranium Implementing these composite nuclides for LACE analysis requires that such composite nuclides be de fined via the Nuclide Library Editor in the library used for the NID processing with appropriately modified gamma abundances If a problem with a gamma analysis is found using LACE analysis fix the problem and then reanalyze Such fixes may include using Interactive Peak Fit to optimize peak areas correcting inaccurate energy and or FWHM calibrations and examining library files referenced for proper gamma abundances Finally change the measured sample and or the efficiency calibration so that they are more closely matched as directed by the LACE analysis While possible with standard source based efficiency calibra tions changing the efficiency calibration is most easily implemented using a sourceless IS
34. 0 182 In KE Ratio Y Scale X Scale View Weighted Mean En 0 7233 PR 121 98 FX Grid C Key Line v Auto EN Y Auto FT Y Grid 1 349 671 65 Save Preferences Print Graph Help Close Figure 107 LACE Screen Plot for the Display Results Output The equation defining the displayed curve is shown just below the graph This equa tion corresponds to the selected Ratio type The screen controls are defined below 151 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 152 Ratio The weighted mean ratios are ratios of each line activity to the weighted mean of the nuclide activity as calculated during NID with interference correction analysis Weighted mean ratios are only available if NID with interference correction was per formed on the datasource The key line ratios are ratios of each line activity to the ac tivity of the key line for the nuclide For key line ratios available nuclides are only those that had the activity determined for the key line specified in the library file used for the NID analysis Key line designation can be added or changed by editing the li brary file and reperforming the NID and LACE analyses Y Scale Includes edit boxes for specifying the Y axis limits for viewing Clicking Auto allows LACE to calculate limits based on the data points for the displayed nuclide X Scale Includes edit boxes for specifying the X axis limits for viewing Clicking Auto allows LACE to calculate limits based on the data points for the
35. Acq Delay The Acq Delay control enabled only in the Battery Save mode sets a delay time which holds off actual data acquisition until the high voltage has reached its preset value and the internal electronics are thermally stable A minimum delay of one min ute is provided to allow the high voltage to increase to its preset value and the internal electronics to warm up The internal electronics will stabilize to within 0 1 of their final settings in less than five minutes Standby Delay The Standby delay control sets the amount of time that the system can remain idle neither acquiring data nor communicating with the host computer before it automati cally changes to Standby In Standby all electronics except the Power Manager are shut down until the next command is received from the host A setting of 0 minutes will prevent the device from switching to Standby MCS The MCS Adjust Figure 39 allows you to set parameters such as Dwell time Mode and ROI limits for the MCS device The controls you see on your adjust screen may vary depending on which MCS you assign to this datasource hb x l C Stab C HVPS MCS C PwMgr Gain Filter Dwell time Disc Mode POI Start m BOlEnd e 1 ch oK 16384ch ox al gt 4 Tel Help 1 16384 1 16384 Pre Figure 39 MCS Adjust Dialog MCA Menu Dwell Range Choose seconds milliseconds or microseconds as the Range for the dwell time Dwell Val
36. B Publank cnf la Test_bkg cnf D Test_spc cnf a Th1000 cnf a Thblank cnf a U1000 cnt 2 Ublank cnf Name PON Source Detector File J Read Only Cancel Type CAM File y Help Info Figure 28 The Open Datasource Dialog 41 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 42 Datasource When the Detector button is selected the Node is dropdown will list all the avail able local and remote VDMs The list box will show all of the currently selected nodes defined input names If the datasource is a multiple memory group detector you can display any of the groups by typing its name into the edit box For example MULTIPLE 3 4 When the File button is selected the Look in dropdown will list all the available drives The list box will show all of the files and directories in the current directory The file name can be typed into the Name edit box or it can be selected from the list box Type When the File button is selected the Type dropdown will list the file format types you can open e When opened a file with a format other than other than a CAM will automati cally be converted to a CAM file of the same name with a CNF file exten sion Note For the file conversion routine to work properly the correct file type must be selected before opening the file e If any critical parameters are not available in the selected file appropriate de fault values will be provided duri
37. Ctrl C Copy the spectrum window to the clipboard Ctrl L Move the Left Marker to the cursor channel Ctrl R Move the Right Marker to the cursor channel Ctrl M Move both markers into the expand region Ctrl Right Arrow Move expand window to the right Ctrl Left Arrow Move expand window to the left Ctrl Up Arrow Move expand window up Ctrl Down Arrow Move expand window down Alt Right Arrow Increase the width of the expand window Alt Left Arrow Decrease the width of the expand window Alt Up Arrow Increase the height of the expand window 13 Introduction Alt Down Arrow Decrease the height of the expand window Shift Up Arrow Move the compare spectrum up Shift Down Arrow Move the compare spectrum down Help Keys F1 Get help Alt F4 Close the help window System Keys Alt Tab Switch to the next windowed program Ctrl Alt Del Switch to the Task List Window Keys F10 Go to from the action bar Arrow keys Move among choices Esc Cancel a pull down or the system menu PgUp Scroll the contents of the window up one page 14 Keyboard Access PgDn Scroll the contents of the window down one page Underlined letter Move among the choices on the action bar and pull downs Alt Go to from the action bar Alt F4 Close the window Ctrl PgDn Scroll the contents of the window right one page Ctrl PgUp Scroll the contents of the window left one page Alt Spacebar Go
38. DOW ai ese erie o nidos wy te es oe Geo ee es Gn ae Gee 92 Supported Curves e e fee ee RE EER ED ORE EER RR OH Eee 92 Bihiciency Shows sr o eevee Ode OM o OOH bows whee a a Geet Ox 93 Gain Byaltiators a sera a dee ls add aaa A ee ala ae a 94 Source of True Energies 2 2 ee 95 The Data Plot si ia eGo ER ew Bk yo bh oe Eh ye E 97 Data Text BOX os eo fsb GS ee ae Oe RRS See ed Oa dee bat eRe doe ES 97 Pix Pile Gain ste hob Boe Rae A ee ee RS ae hee oe a a 97 Save New CAL Pile 2 eii Sb A a eh ee ee A es 98 ReEvaluate 2 neo ne HESS ESE REED EER RE DESH EHS Ew EES 98 Auto Gam AGUS aus gi Bohs be Ew ese Sw BO EE ge ah ee i BO SO Ge we 98 Certiticate Files ias amp ace a ew Ge Sac a Se gua e aa 100 Peak Search ASB sia mate maemo BOR meh ee hoo gee ae ae ee ok ee mee i 100 Single Double Convergence o o 2 eee ee ee ee ee 100 Iteration Limita e ee ee Be ee a eRe oe wee EER ee E 101 Preset Live Timer aa BO eee A Basins a t 101 Percent Gain Shift Tolerance 2 0 o e 101 AQJUSEZLETO ebb a ee ER ERE HE DR ERE DEERE REE HEE SETS ERS 101 QA Transfer Before After eare EE EE E EY 102 PXECULC 4 ARA Os Catia Soe a a Pe Se hae Oe e bee os 102 DAV Casa cee as Rois a eae a Roe vane cae Seis GE Ae inca See me ene a pee a ae 102 Cancel o agris Hoa dk Hace Oe ee be Od we E Bee Ek we a A 102 Auto Gain Adjust Status i cee ctete ee kas 102 Cancel ADOL see a we a a wh A e hee oh Hee ae dow a ea
39. ERE EERE ERLE EERE wR HEHE EH ES 47 ACUE SUOP erat rarest a oe eis ate at ae Ge Bo ead ees Ae ee 47 Acquire SetuP e s das AAA AAA 47 MOE ee a a ine A A a a a ee Ss a 47 Time Preset ica o Bo Sl dhe bk aie oe oe A ee Re a oe ee 48 External Start Stop o c eoe e be eS SER ERR e EE Se we 48 TRpUt SIZE san hs a oe Ht Rw koe gh a et ee A 48 Computational Presets scos o cm sacda ea a aaa ee 48 MCS Pr set s ece cu se caem aiee a ye HERE a e a a 49 Cl u ico DS PO odes Bk we a e a SE a 49 AdJUSC sec wg ek aeu ia e Pe HEEL eg ERD LR a ROE RA Rw ES 49 ADC s erea a a A ew RA A a A 49 Stabwizer of ed ae AE Mads Aa OS Rd A AAA 51 Amplifier sico eee bE EOL a eee Re Ee RE we A 53 High Voltage s s sess Sos BYE Se we ee Be Ge YEA ee a ee eS 54 Power Manager s s s oos mpe a0 Saale aa ew eG wae a eo ws 55 MOS s s ea me es edd Gidea ee ee ke ae wo ee ee het whee we 56 SAS e eve ory we patna rida ot Gee ee at anys Guts were te ee Sew te eee es eign gr ae 58 Adya operarse RE EEE OEE Re ROR De OE RE He REE we ES 59 LOG tl ote Rte we eh Rais a e Shee oe ee 59 Calibrate Memi sa 4 6 amp er woe ala a Be aOR ahd GATE eS oO ad lal 59 Seturi 8 i eo OSL e EEE EH ESE RE REE RE PEERS HE SESE E REED 60 Energy Only Calibrations 4 4 5 2 4s a a ne BE OEE Se PES a ay S 61 Energy CoemcientS eo a aaea eb ed a OE ee De DEES EE SS 63 Enerey Full una a ale ey RG RA aa Ee ee Ae es ae 63 By Certificate Fil sy soeg eee te be Ge Bee Pe ee h E 64 By Nuclide List
40. ESC means that you should press the ALT key and hold it down while you press the ESC key Windows Commands Windows commands are shown in bold type Edit User Entries Text you are expected to type in is shown in Courier typewriter style type Titles Titles of books and of manual chapters are shown in italics titles of manual sections are enclosed in quotes Keyboard Access The Genie 2000 programs like any 32 bit Windows programs can be used with or without a mouse If you aren t using a mouse with your system the keyboard conven tions listed in this section will allow you to operate Genie 2000 programs from your computer s keyboard Accelerator Keys Right Arrow Move the channel cursor to the right 11 Introduction Left Arrow Move the channel cursor to the left Up Arrow Increment the display VFS Down Arrow Decrement the display VFS Ctrl Ins Create a ROI at the cursor Ins Create a ROI between the markers Del Delete the ROI between the markers Index markers right to the next ROI Index marker left to the previous ROI PgUp Display the previous Info page PgDn Display the next Info page F4 Toggle Acquire on and off F5 Toggle Autoscale on and off F6 Select the next Datasource Shift F6 Select the previous Datasource 12 Keyboard Access F7 Select the next Memory Group Shift F7 Select the previous Memory Group F8 Toggle Expand on and off
41. FWHM Fixed Tail and Fit Singlets check boxes are selected 135 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis ROI Limits Determination The Sum Non Linear LSQ peak area calculations rely on these three parameters in de termining whether multiplets are to be included in an ROI Peaks that are no farther apart than the Maximum Number of FWHMs Between Peaks are seen as part of a multiplet and will be included in the ROI The calculation of the left and right ROI boundaries is influenced by the Maximum Number of FHWMs for Left Right Limit values The ROI will not be extended be yond these limits even if the data has not leveled out Generate Report If the Generate Report box is checked a predefined report will be generated when this phase is executed and will be displayed in the application s report window The report is defined in the AEF file as the Report Template Name and Section Name asso ciated with this phase Library Gamma M The Gamma M Library Peak Area algorithms include steps for defining the back ground continuum using the erosion technique as well as calculating the peak areas and their uncertainties The Gamma M Library Peak Area setup screen is shown in Figure 96 J Gamma M Library Peak Area Setup x m Peak Area Region Start Channel fi Stop Channel 4096 Y Gain Shift Correction I Display ROIs FT Generate Report Cancel More Help Execute Figure 96 The Gamma M Library Peak Area Setup
42. Ge and Nal Gain Correction The Gain Shift Correction check box on the Gamma M Library Peak Area Setup screen must be checked for these parameters to be used in the calculations Maximum Number of Gain Passes specifies the maximum number of iterations allowed for the fits with the automatic gain correction Default 10 for both Ge and Nal Reject Gain Factor specifies the convergence criterion When consecutive iterations produce a change in the chi square less than this value a convergence has been achieved Default 0 0001 for Ge 0 005 for Nal Reject MDA Sigma specifies the multiplier of the MDA equation used to accept or reject a peak area in the spectrum Default 2 5 for both Ge and Nal Constant specifies the constant term of the MDA equation used to accept or reject a peak area in the spectrum Default 3 for both Ge and Nal Area Correction S501 Gamma Option The area correction phase contains algorithms to correct the net peak areas before further calculations are made You can choose either Standard Back ground Subtract or Reference Peak Correction with or without Background Subtract 138 Analyze Menu Standard Background Subtract S501 Gamma Option The Standard Background Subtract algorithm Figure 98 al lows you to subtract background peak areas from matching peak areas in the current datasource as described in the Subtraction of Peak Environmental Background sec tion of the Algorithms chapter in th
43. Keyboard access s oo o e o oo 11 L Labels 318 A de han oo ates ee 4 114 SPECHUM o e o We a ee 116 Library area More parameters 137 SOUP di ras ey Bee 136 Library locate More parameters 128 Library peak locate Gamma M sa gce aoe ark gh RO Awe 127 Simple i ace 46 64 606 4086 4 129 Line Activity Consistency Evaluator 149 293 Line data Certificate fle ocioso ee ee eo 196 Nuclide library 180 Linear Continuum 00 61 VFScommand 110 LED control ADC 50 Load Calibration e se ace ead o a a 161 Command s se si pea ee E oe e EO 59 Multiple definitions 39 ROIS o eaat oa ei e a 112 Log VFScommand 110 Low tail Curve values 2 2 68 Selection OL sek ca BR 61 M Manual Pole zero Setting 278 VFS command cc 110 Marker info status page 119 Mass number search for 189 Master nuclide libraries 191 Materials library editor 222 MCA Databases si a ck oe Gow ae se a eS N 37 Defining inthe MID 26 Editing a definition 36 Mel sean cosas 47 Runtime configuration database 37 Using an MID definition 22 MCA input definition MID Wizald 18 MCA input definition MID wizard 17 MCA only Menus o 117 MCS Presets gt og fob da
44. New button This will prompt you to input a name for the toolbar The new toolbar will initially be empty e To rename a toolbar highlight it in the list and edit the name in the edit box below the list e To delete a toolbar highlight it in the list and select the Delete button You may also enable disable the Tooltips and Cool Look features of the toolbar The Commands pane allows you to customize the command buttons that will appear on your toolbars The list on the left contains a variety of categories of commands or ganized in a similar fashion as the main menu Selecting a category will change the command buttons that appear in the Button area of the pane Selecting a command button will show that button s description in the Description field To modify the toolbars e To add a command button to a tool bar select the button you want to add from the Buttons area of the pane Then hold the left mouse button down drag the command button to the exact place on your toolbar you wish to place 1t Then release the left mouse button e To remove a command button from a toolbar select the button from the toolbar and drag it off the toolbar Then release the left mouse button e To add a separator between command buttons on your toolbar select the com mand button you wish to have on the right of the separator and drag it slightly to the right The Customize Button pane allows you to associate certain command buttons with Analysis Seq
45. Peak Area Region The analysis will include the energies included within the Peak Area Region or that are equal to either limit The current peak locate table will be used to determine whether a peak falls within the specified Region 136 Analyze Menu Gain Shift Correction Gain Shift Correction is a technique for moving the peaks so that their centroids are correctly placed It is normally enabled checked because Nal peaks in particular tend to shift from their original calibrated positions as a function of temperature Display ROIs If the Display ROIs check box is checked the ROIs resulting from the analysis will be copied to the Display ROIs block in the datasource The ROI color conventions are Color 1 Non interfered library peaks Color 2 Non interfered unknown peaks Color 3 Interfered library peaks Color 4 Interfered unknown peaks More Peak Area Parameters Selecting the More button brings up the screen in Figure 97 which lets you set several other parameters affecting Library Peak Area The description of each parameter lists the default value for both Ge and Nal detectors More Gamma M Peak Area Setup xi m Window Settings Reject Factors Area 3 Variance 0 Interference Background 0 2 Dverlap 0 3 Nbr Bkgnd Terms Gain Correction m Reject MDA Max Nbr Gain Passes 10 Sigma 25 Reject Gain Factor 0 0001 Constant 3 Cancel Help Figure 97 The Peak Area M
46. Preferences Dialog Save You can Save these preferences so that your display will always be set the way you want it to be In addition to the settings shown on this screen selecting Save will save the display s Scale Type page 110 the chosen Status Pages page 119 and the Re port Window s size page 173 OK Selecting OK will use the settings only during the current session they will not be saved for future use Default The Default button resets all parameters to the factory default state Edit Colors You can change the displayed colors for the e Spectrum background e Reference Spectrum 113 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis e Compare Spectra e ROI type e Peak Labels ROI Type Selecting an ROI type by number allows you to select both the color of each type and the type itself For instance selecting type 3 means that all of the ROIs you enter from now on will be known as type 3 You may use any combination of the four types and colors for ROIs which you add to the spectrum Note that the Peak Area Analysis algorithm sets regions around the peaks when it is run If you selected Show ROIs in MCA View in the algorithm s dialog box these ROIs will replace the currently displayed ROIs The type and color of each of these ROIs depends on the Peak Area Analysis algorithm used Peak Area on page 133 discusses the Peak Area routines and denscribes how they use ROI colors Peak Labeling You can add
47. ROIs displayed in the spectral display Use ROI File Select this button to use an ROI file for Peak Locate Enter the name of the file in the Use ROI File text box or click on Select and choose a file from the file open dialog box Add to Existing Results and Tolerance If the Add to existing results box is checked each found peak will be compared with peaks listed in the peak results table A found peak that is closer to an existing peak than the specified Tolerance value either fixed Energy or variable FWHM is as sumed to be the listed peak and will be discarded A found peak that is farther away from an existing peak than the specified tolerance is considered to be a separate peak and will be merged with the existing peak results table If the Add to existing results box is not checked the current peak results table will be replaced by this search Generate Report If the Generate Report box is checked a predefined report will be generated when this phase is executed and will be displayed in the application s report window The report is defined in the AEF file as the Report Template Name and Section Name as sociated with this phase Analyze Menu Library Locate Gamma M The Gamma M Library Peak Locate setup screen is shown in Figure 91 The analysis will include the library energies included within the Search Region or that are equal to either region limit The current energy calibration will be used to determine whet
48. Support Reference Manual Clear The Clear button clears the list box so that new values can be entered without having to delete the box s contents first Updating the Line Once you ve made any needed changes click on the Change button to transfer the new parameters into the List Entry for the line 197 Using the Certificate File Editor Adding a New Line To add a new line to the list first use the above editing procedure to alter an existing entry to look like the new one you want to add When you re finished with the edits click on the Add button instead of the Change button Since the list is sorted by as cending energy the new entry will automatically appear in its correct location in the list Deleting an Entry To remove an entry from the list click on it to select it then click on the Delete but ton The File Menu 198 The file menu lets you Open Save or Save as a file print the file as a Report start a New file or Exit the editor Saving the Certificate File Once you ve edited the file you have to save it with either the Save or Save as com mand before it can be used Printing the Certificate File Use the File Report command to print a disk file and a hard copy report of the current Certificate File Click on Yes to send the report to a disk file and print the report or No to send the report to the disk file only Creating a New Certificate File The File menu s New command e
49. Thorium 74 9 7 46E 006 32 015 1 864 32 266 0 77 0 108 77 1 4 51E 006 28 593 1 127 28 873 0 026 129 1 6 54E 006 17 861 1 634 18 306 238 6 4 80E 006 5 054 1 198 6 454 270 2 4 51E 006 10 992 1 126 11 702 277 4 4 70E 006 20 131 1 174 20 527 300 1 4 58E 006 14 530 1 143 15 074 328 0 5 11E 006 11 137 1 277 11 838 338 3 4 82E 006 5 859 1 204 7 102 409 5 3 40E 006 17 548 850 18 001 463 0 4 50E 006 8 364 1 122 9 277 583 2 4 81E 006 3 848 1 202 5 560 727 2 2 66E 006 6 340 664 7 504 794 9 4 85E 006 6 788 1 210 7 886 860 5 4 57E 006 10 129 1 142 10 895 911 1 4 01E 006 4 013 1 000 5 676 964 8 4 38E 006 6 815 1 093 7 909 969 0 4 04E 006 4 388 1 008 5 947 1587 9 3 51E 006 9 023 0 877 9 875 1620 6 2 28E 006 16 919 0 569 17 388 2614 5 4 15E 006 3 895 L037 5593 K 40 1460 8 1 76E 005 2812 313 Index A Acquire Setupcommand 47 Startcommand 47 Stopcommand 47 Acquisition Delay control 56 Parameters defining 47 Phas aa hee be Poe ewe de 123 Acquisition data overview 170 Activity units Cerificate cesos dae eR asi 193 Library DAClimit 185 Library MPC acs sepad Ree ee 183 IREPOM edocs 4 e bY eels Berd Ss 157 Activity units choosing 66 82 ADC Adjustmentof 0 49 Conversion gain 50 WOES iaa ee ae eg fo ae Bed 50 WLDis 54 3 554 85 62446444344 50 LO E Ba
50. Visual Basic are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe Acrobat and Reader are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems in the United States and or other countries Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 2 ee ee ee ee ee 1 Overview of Genie 2000 s a soru atai ia ee ew a 1 Genie 2000 Support Services o s die saa aa e e eug Aiea a y a eua y iE o a e aaa 3 TAMOS s eoe e be ba ER aae e a REE OHS AA OS 3 Maintenance Contracts se saae or Soe a A ee Oe Shwe ee he 4 About this Manual srs 0244 rd A 4 OPETatONS o s x s o a a i he ad Bw A a A ee a a i 4 Customization Tools gt s a s cias e or OS Be er ERS ei in S 5 Genie 2000 Software ose ae d ut ee a RH a Ee e e Eee a e G 5 Typographic CONVEN I NS 00000 wR e we ee a is 11 Keyboard ACCESS aans ak ap baw as epe aa a a E oR eR eR a a 11 Accelerator KEYS scm rete mera epe a a EE ERE OLE HEY 11 HED KEYS 0 aci dao ta ee aa 14 System Keys eaa daa ae E dene Op AA AAA A 14 Window KEYS iaki e a ra e a a ene a ae ae he eee 14 Pop Up Window KEYS oos soe ice A ee es E aeh E Ea 15 Editing Keys ere tear V4 be eed CR OR a e 15 2 MCA Input Definition 0 002 eee ee ee ee 17 The InSpector 2000 Simulator sus o Dae a e e ee 17 The MID Wizard s mii vogi pa a a A ee Ae O eee 17 Usi
51. X Axis Gridline creates X Axis gridlines on the spectrum display Y Axis Ticks Labels Selecting Y Axis Ticks Labels creates Y Axis labels on the spectrum display 116 Display Menu Y Axis Gridline Selecting Y Axis Gridline creates Y Axis gridlines on the spectrum display X Axis as Energy Selecting X Axis as Energy displays X Axis labels in terms of energy If this is not selected the X Axis will be displayed in terms of channel MCA View The MCA View selections let you modify the apperance of the application s interface and select the data it displays MCA Only Menus Select the MCA only menus checkbox to remove the Analyze menu from the applica tion s menu bar and the Efficiency items from the Calibrate menu Control Panel Shown Removing the check from the Control Panel checkbox will remove the Control Panel from the display leaving more room for the spectrum Toolbar Setup The Toolbar Setup dialog screen Figure 84 allows you to tailor the display of the Ac quisition and Analysis toolbars The dialog is divided into three panes Toolbars Commands and Customize Buttons Toolbar Setup xi Toolbars Commands Customize Buttons Toolbars w M Show Tooltips New Cool Look 20 Reset colar name Defaut Figure 84 Toolbar Setup Dialog 117 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 118 The Toolbars pane allows you to create rename and delete toolbars e To create a new toolbar select the
52. a a a e A E 185 Action Level Derived Units ee 186 Action Level Derived Values o e e 187 The Search Ment as bra rr a A OES 188 Find Name s es cee aoe eh eee OE a e ae Hb we i 188 Pind Energy 2 44 54 248 be otek MEA SSA ESS wh ae amp Sa ee a 189 Find Mass Number 424 ce deed eee daw eke EE eRe ESR ORO 189 Whe File MEMO ss go ese eek e ot Boe we ee AL ae may ete he ea Ae Siok pei we Go des 190 Creating a New Library 24 c eae 4 du dad edwew bed eb aa 190 Saving the Library eo aan cba we wean oe ee e eee bbew eee ed ee beens 190 Printing the Library 2133 44 yet e ds ee wD She we a ae 191 Exiting the Edit r s sora a Ba Bee eS aw we A ai 191 The Master Libraries 00m a ood a beeen deh aot aE os a Goa e eee a acd 191 Using the Certificate File Editor 192 Getting Started sis es Bian ea we ee ee A Se ee ee ae Bs 192 The Options Menu xas s ma doh a a ee ee ee eee Ge ee oe SE eS 193 Library BXtract e os ee koe lg ea ee me De hes A he oe em a kg aE 193 Certificate Extract 2 4 jaded eed ee ed oe oe Boo Be Gre eG ee ea ek 194 Energy Units o ces eb ee bee ee eR DR Ye Re EEE ee ee Eee eS 194 Editing a Certificate Pile cocos is Se awe we be ee a ee a 195 Opening a Certificate File us ee ae ee Aw ea hk ee RR ee 195 The Header Data 2 i sreca cea ti edade eee eeee deed ee eee be as 196 The ine Data osc eyed e eae EE at oe oe igh ae ey oe eee een 196 The Ele Men s a me ise ie AA ot es a
53. a template to a sample User defined templates containing all static information about a sample may be saved and easily be recalled Ability to vary assumed sample characteristics e g density container wall thickness etc makes it ideal for What 1f analyses Resulting calibrations may be stored recalled and used just like those generated by traditional calibration techniques Multi Efficiency program allows creation of compound efficiencies for multiple detectors multiple locations or multiple sources Introduction 10 Includes library of common materials and tools to create new materials Works with cylindrical collimators with conical holes and rectangular collimators with trapezoidal holes Includes predefined collimator entries for ISOCS Shield 574 Genie 2000 LabSOCS Laboratory Calibration Software No radioactive sources needed for accurate efficiency calibrations Works over a wide range of geometries Calibrations valid from zero distance out to 500 meters Calibrations valid from 50 keV to 7000 keV Calibrations accurate to within a few percent Calibrations accurate at any angle from detector not just on centerline Eliminates the cost of purchasing radioactive standards creating custom distributions and radioactive waste disposal Results are available within a few seconds Operates with any size or type of germanium detector which has been characterized by Canberra Optimized for la
54. and Analysis The tolerance value can also be specified from within Calibration Setup page 60 as Peak Match Tolerance Generate Report If the Generate Report box is checked a predefined report will be generated when this phase is executed and will be displayed in the application s report window The report is defined in the AFF file as the Report Template Name and Section Name asso ciated with this phase Reference Peak Correction S501 Gamma Option The Reference Peak Correction algorithm Figure 99 uses a reference peak of a known count rate to normalize the areas of all other peaks in the spectrum The reference source can be either an electronic pulser or an external sta tionary source w Setup for Ref Peak Correction Bkg Subtract m Reference Peak Ref Rate fo cps Ref Energy fo keV Uncertainty fo cps m Pk Match Tolerance Reference Source Stationary Pulser Tolerance f 1 00 keV Ref Date b alii DINARS Energy C FWHM r Background Subtract J Yes Bka File Select FP Generate Report Cancel Help Execute Figure 99 The Reference Peak Correction Setup If both a reference peak correction and an environmental background subtract are to be applied the reference peak correction must always be applied first Therefore this al gorithm provides both of these corrections in the proper order as described in the Ref erence Peak Correction section of the Algori
55. and all found energies all matched energies and all found energies and a sum mary of the analysis results Current NID Analysis Results Select the Current NID Analysis Results button to specify the Nuclide ID analysis results of the current spectrum as the source of true energies Certificate File Select the Certificate File button to specify a certificate CTF file as the source of true energies Nuclide Library Select the Nuclide Library button to specify a nuclide NLB library as the source of true energies Reporting The reporting phase contains standard routines to output analysis results and other in formation contained in the datasource as well as a routine for printing spectra Standard The functions of the Standard reporting dialog are explained in the following para graphs The Genie 2000 Report System including how to create your own templates is covered in detail in the Report Module and Template Files chapter of the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual Template Name and Section Name To output the analysis results choose both a Template Name and a Section Name within that file as shown in Figure 111 note that a section named lt all gt is available if you want to use the entire template file Error Multiplier Though uncertainty values are always calculated and stored at 1 sigma errors can be reported at a different sigma level by entering a specific Error Multiplier here For in stance if you
56. another computers VDM is required from this computer perform the following steps I The Genie 2000 Network Configuration File as pointed to by the environment variable CINETCFG must be edited as follows Edit additional lines after the first three lines into the file as follows this example assumes a remote computer name of NODE1 Original 1 local 1B pipe datasrce 1C pipe configur Edited 1 1B pipe datasrce 1C pipe configur 1M nodel1 pipe datasrce 1c nodel pipe configur Add additional lines as required to define subsequent remote computers 250 Installing TCP IP Network Components 2 Assuming your network does not use DNS WINS or dynamic IP addressing then one additional Windows NT 2000 XP TCP IP file requires editing in order for this computer to resolve the remote computer name to an IP address This file is named HOSTS and must be located in the WINNT SYSTEM32 DRIVERS ETC directory A sample file named HOSTS is installed located in the aforementioned directory and can be used as the template for creating this file Computer name IP address entries must be made to this file so the remote computer running the VDM can be accessed by this computer An example file is shown below with edits for the remote computer name NODE1 Copyright c 1993 1995 Microsoft Corp This is a sample HOSTS file used by Microsoft TCP IP for Windows NT This file contains the mappings of
57. at the top of the Chemical Formula Composer and one in the New Substance Composition These al Help Load into library o r Material library Double click for Info low you to delete the current contents of these fields and enter new values The Materials Library Editor Basing a New Material on an Existing Definition To illustrate how this is done we will take the definition of a material called dirt1 add some water to it and save it as mud1 Assuming a three parts dirt1 to one part water the process is as follows 1 Click on dirt1 in the Material Library 2 Enter 75 into the right hand Mass Percentage field 3 Click on the green Add as Component button directly above that field The result can be seen in the New Substance Composition window of Figure 170 which indicates that 75 of our new material is composed of the elements which make up dirt1 ii Editor of mu library c genie2k isocs data parameters mu04_8Ib txt y Chemical Formula Composer gg as New Substance Composition r Material library Component Balance Allowable Addition 25 0000 _Tleet Double click for Info Fanaa Clear 75 00 0H 2 20 0 57 50 AL 8 50 51 26 20 FE 5 80 dt1 30455 acrylic Pp aluminum 7 bronze Me cellulos concrete teel Element X n 13 csteel Final Material Composition Density g cm3 8 8 Name of the new substance untitled Comment Statue_Material
58. been saved the Simulator can be opened in the Acquisition and Analysis application Note A maximum of 48 Simulators may be defined but only 32 can be opened concurrently in the Acquisition and Analysis application Each Simulator must have a unique Serial Number defined Acquisition and Analysis Within the Acquisition and Analysis application the Simulator will closely approximate an actual InSpector 2000 device All of the adjust controls are included their values will be correctly reported in the Status window and will be saved to and reloaded from the device definition file Many of the adjust control settings will affect the simulated spectrum For example modifying the Coarse or Fine Gain will cause a shift in the spectrum as would be true for a real device The method for generating the simulated spectrum is discussed in Spectrum Simulation on page 288 287 The InSpector 2000 Simulator Spectrum Simulation The basis for all of the Simulator s functionality is the Template file a CAM file containing an actual spectrum Any CAM file can be used and the behavior of the Simulator especially the simulated spectrum will match that of the template file As a result any real spectrum can be simulated Each of the following sections further de scribes how the template file contributes to the simulation The Simulator will always reproduce the spectrum of its template file Genie 2000 in stallation provides an Na
59. can easily be used with any ActiveX compliant programming envi ronment like Microsoft Visual Basic and others Genie 2000 Software Using the Programming Library assumes a basic knowledge of C or Microsoft Visual Basic programming and an understanding of the basic operation of 32 bit Windows environments and Genie 2000 s data struc tures and architecture 561 Genie 2000 Batch Programming Support Provides REXX script language environment for advanced automated procedure development Requires S500 or S502 S573 Genie 2000 ISOCS Jn Situ Calibration Software Mathematical efficiency calibration software No radioactive sources needed Eliminates the cost of purchasing radioactive standards creating custom distributions and radioactive waste disposal Results are available within a few seconds Calibrations valid from zero distance out to 500 meters Calibrations valid from 45 to 7000 keV Calibrations accurate to within a few percent Calibrations accurate at any angle from detector not just on detector axis line Operates with any size or type of Germanium detector which has been characterized by Canberra Ideal for In Situ or Waste Assay applications where large and various sample types are often encountered Includes predefined geometry templates for twenty common container shapes and sample distributions Only a few physical sample parameters e g size distance from detector etc are needed to tailor
60. chs 64 chs 1 000 4 M E El a E Er E 16376 0 01 100 00 Gain rate div Correction rng Figure 16 The Stabilizer Setting Select the 30 Gain Centroid in channels of the reference peak at the high end of the spec trum for gain stabilization Gain Window width in channels of the upper and lower sampling windows on either side of the gain reference peak Gain Spacing in channels between the upper and lower sampling windows Gain Ratio value the ratio to maintain between the two gain windows Zero Centroid in channels of the reference peak at the low end of the spec trum Zero Window in channels of the upper and lower sampling windows on ei ther side of the zero reference peak Zero Spacing in channels between the upper and lower sampling windows Zero Ratio the ratio to maintain between the two zero windows Gain Rate Divisor the count rate dividers at the input to the Gain correction register Zero Rate Divisor the count rate dividers at the input to the Zero intercept correction register Correction Range the Gain Correction range to correct for drift Defining an MCA High Voltage Settings The High Voltage command shown in Figure 17 adjusts the High Voltage Power Supply HVPS High Voltage Supply for input DSA 2000 C 5000v 1300 04 1300v l C 5000v 1300 0 0v ok st 2 0 130
61. configuring 0 230 Geometry definition CIO oi Bee ee See ed 209 Geometry information entering 212 Geometry template 317 SClECHNS s does Ke ee Eee 209 Geometry validity checking 221 Geometry file types 221 Group NEXE sucia sos a da a a 174 PIOVIOUS coca er sd Pe 175 H Hardware status asterisk ID ocio So 58 clearing an error 58 TEDO rr aa oe B Gee a S 58 updating i es eae ee ee ew 58 Header data certificate file 196 High voltage Automaticturnon 55 Clear latcheS 55 ICB latch reset lt oo o cms 55 Inspector reset o o 55 Settings ss des a ees eh GE Sw 31 Status 446 d Seon eee eae Pew es 55 Voltage control 55 HVPS See High voltage l Input definition Loading multiple 39 USINE 206 ds a cd e ia 37 Input definition printing 37 Input settings s o o 34 Inserting a sequence Step 201 InSpector 2000 simulator 287 Inspector power manager adjustments 282 Installing Genie 2000 software 241 Software options 243 Standard Genie 2000 installation 243 WindOWS sica e eG aca si 240 Integral preset o 48 Integral preset o 124 Integration settings changing 220 Interactive NID option 167 K Key parameters 161 264 265 267
62. considers groups of four channels at a time and displays the channel in each group which has the highest number of counts Note that for spectra with more than 1024 channels selecting Full will slow down the display update rate e Full shows a data point for every channel in the spectrum being viewed e Envelope shows the normal plot with the data points connected e Fill shows the envelope plot with a color fill of the data Update Information The Update Rate can be set for the number of seconds between screen updates of spectral data during data acquisition The range is 0 as quickly as possible to 60 sec onds with the actual rate affected by how busy the processor is at the end of any given update interval A value of 3 to 5 is usually best allowing an operator s key presses or mouse movements to be serviced promptly Real Time Expand Update If the Real Time Expand Update checkbox is selected the expand window will re fresh as the expand rectangle is moved in the main spectral display If the box is not checked the expand window does not update until the mouse movement is complete Spectrum Labels These selections let you add x and y axis gridlines to the spectral display and tickmarks to the x and y axes of the display X Axis Ticks Labels Selecting X Axis Ticks Labels creates X Axis labels on the spectrum display These may be displayed in terms of Channel or Energy See X Axis as Energy X Axis Gridline Selecting
63. ctf nbsstd2 cnf NI19B CNF P_rnlb Ptcal nlb Pu1000 cnf EAEAN EA Naidemo_CE CNF EA A EA AAA EA A EA EA EA EA O O O E Pu242 ctf Publank cnf puoxide cnf puoxidece cnf rf_tst1 lb rf_tst2a nib rf_tst2b nib rf_tst3a nlb RFP2062 CNF s_s nib s_tnlb SRS FArea nlb Stdlib nlb t_t nib Th1000 cnf Th228 ctf Thblank cnf u_z nlb 11000 cnf U232 ctF 1 Ublank cn vssver Scc Figure 177 Previewing Nbsstd cnf Copying a File In the Preview Mode Unchecking the Enable DataSource Preview checkbox will allow you to safely copy the currently selected file CAUTION Attempting to copy a file with Enable DataSource Preview checked can cause unexpected results Scale Click the Linear Scale checkbox to toggle the preview s vertical full scale between linear and log Cursor Counts You can use the standard Genie 2000 controls to move the cursor and the region mark ers through the spectrum The Cursor and Counts fields above the spectrum will be up dated to reflect the cursor s current position 238 A Software Installation Because of the flexibility of the Genie 2000 system there are many aspects to system installation and setup The applicability of these various aspects is a function of the in dividual installation its desired capability its hardware and so forth This chapter serves as a guide to the installation process directing you to the related information in this manual as requi
64. data in the specified certificate file When you click OK the routine will start and the Auto Gain Adjust Status win dow page 102 will open Note The routine can usually determine which ampifier you re using If it can t you ll be asked to specify the amplifier type Save After executing the AGA routine click the Save button to save the current parameters both current setup parameters and any adjusted hardware settings to the current detec tor s MID file Any adjustment already made will be retained only after saving Canceling or closing the dialog without saving will cause hardware settings to revert to their original values Cancel If the current parameters have not yet been Saved clicking the Cancel button will re set all parameters to their initial values and close the dialog Auto Gain Adjust Status The Auto Gain Adjust Status window Figure 76 shows you a live time update of the gain adjustment while it s in progress Analysis results from each iteration acquisition are listed in order in the Data Text Box in the lower half of the window If you would 102 Calibrate Menu like a record of the contents of the Data Text Box described on page 104 click the Print Report Now button Status Completed successfully Z Gain Shift 0 0 10 0 Gain Zero Initiated 02 03 2004 2 23 57 PM Initial 64 600 Initia 0 000e 000 Acquisition 5 of 5 seconds Current 64 600 Current 0 000e 000 Iteration 1 2
65. displayed Datasource Overview Acquisition Analysis Sequence m Analysis Files Calibration iption NID Analysis w Report Peak Locate Nuclide Identification CAGENIE2K CAMFILES STDLIB NLB CAGENIE2K CAMFILES STDLIB NLB m Analysis Steps Acquisition Peak Locate Peak Area Efficiency Correction Nuclide Identification 7264993 12 56 39 PM Unidentified 2nd Diff Sum Non Linear LS Fit Standard NID ww Interf Corr Figure 123 Analysis Overview 171 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Analysis Sequence Description Analysis Sequence Description data names the analysis sequence file ASF used to analyze the spectrum If no sequence file was executed the Description will be blank Analysis Files Any additional files used to perform analysis steps such as NLB and CNF files will be listed here Note An entry in the Analysis Files section does not necessarily mean that the step has been performed on the datasource Analysis Steps The Analysis Steps section lists the analysis steps performed on the datasource The list of steps is derived from an Analysis Sequence File ASF selections from the An alyze menu or both A grayed out algorithm name indicates that analysis step has not been executed Calibration Data The Calibration Data view Figure 124 displays the current energy and efficiency calibration data for the foregound datasource Datasource Overview Acquisition
66. displayed nuclide View When checked LACE displays X and or Y grid lines on the graph Save Preferences Saves the default ratio and coordinate scaling parameters to those currently selected Print Graph Prints a hard copy of the graph Interpretation of the displayed data includes finding outliers and whether the trend of the lines is reflected in the slope of the fit or exhibits any concavity as well as the magnitude and direction of the slope Action Level Calculations S501 Gamma Option The Post Processing algorithm will perform Action Level cal culations on identified and unidentified nuclides as described in the Post NID Pro cessing Algorithms section of the Algorithms chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual Analyze Menu In addition it will total the number of identified nuclides and unidentified peaks The Post NID Processing setup parameters are shown in Figure 108 UN Action Level Calculation Setup m Sum Action Level 1 Sum Action Level 2 Alarm Level 1 fo Alarm Level 1 Alarm Level 2 fo Alarm Level 2 I Use MDA values Use upper level values TT Generate Report Cancel Help Execute Figure 108 The Action Level Calculation Setup Sum Action Level 1 Specifies Alarm Limits 1 and 2 for the sum of Action Level 1 values for all nuclides Sum Action Level 2 Specifies Alarm Limits 1 and 2 for the sum of Action Level 2 values for all nuclides Use MDA Values
67. do is replace the database s contents with a new file Starting the MCA Input Definition MID Editor Start the MID Editor by double clicking on its icon in the Genie 2000 Program Group The result will be the application window shown in Figure 7 W4 MCA Input Definition Editor local Untitled Eile Database Edit Device Settings Summary Help MCA Input Size ADC MXR Stab Amp Figure 7 The MID Editor Window 22 Building an MCA Definition Note that the phrase local Untitled in the title bar means that the MID Editor is con nected to the local VDM and that no file is currently open this is the default condition in a non networked environment Building an MCA Definition In creating an MCA Input Definition you ll use the MID Editor s e Devices Menu to select the MCA and its front end components amplifier ADC HVPS and so forth e Settings Menu to define the operating characteristics and modes for each MCA and its front end components In this section we ll explain how to add and delete the MID editor s MCA entries and will explain what the definition entry consists of The next section Defining an MCA on page 26 explains how to create an Input Definition for a DSA 2000 MCA The remainder of this chapter discusses how the definition is saved to a disk file how a definition can be edited and how to use a definition by loading the file into the MCA Runtime Configuration Database Adding an M
68. eS 50 Adding A line to a certificate file 198 ASUCHdS 00 sd ra 180 AS A A eo ate a 112 Addingan MCA 23 Adjust ADCO be oh o84 errar 49 Amplifier sa 2c a he SO 33 Programmable controls 49 Stabilizers posea k ouda a boo be wees 51 The amplifier s PUR LTC 277 Advance sample changer 59 ABP TES peoe Asd aa 2 ae Se a 268 Amplifier Adjustment 0 33 Coarse PAM se he FH ee 53 Fine gal sori yaa e ob E 53 Pole zer0 e e poe dei a 54 PUR control 53 Shaping control 33 Super fine gain 33 Analysis data overview 171 Analysis engine files 268 Analysis sequence Defining a o oros eH ea eee ey 161 Deletingastep 163 Deleting a step 201 EXECU aa ae a Sve Bag a 122 167 Insertingastep 163 201 Loading 264 3 oe oo wb beaten ed 166 Select an algorithm 201 Select an algorithm 163 Setting up an algorithm in 163 202 STONDE s cesar 167 Analysis Sequence File editor 199 Area correction Critical level test s 139 Standard background subtract 139 Area preset 48 124 Assay date setting 66 82 Assembling a system 239 Asterisk In the hardware status report 58 Auto function Efficiency calibration 91 Energy
69. ede S84 AAA OSG ERE A So 287 Acquisition and Analysis e e eoa u a ena e e a E e a e E O E e 287 Spectrum Simulation se s cs ae i oe Be ee wR Rw ee e ed 288 PHA Mode tae e Mout ed wae ale Bee OE bee SE eS 289 MERO 289 Percent Dead Times ss ica a ee oe Ge St Ge ees ee ee ew A 289 Amp Gail 22 css 2 bee Se wee ee be SEES OR EE RE Ew PEE ee RR Os 289 LED a os a ete atts eG Panes ita Mees Sis A A 290 Voltage vik dB a Ce oles Seah a Ae 2 290 Digital Stabilizers c pesa RR REED ERE EE OE REE RHE GS 290 Filter Digital Oscilloscope and Pole Zero o o o 291 Other MID and Adjust Controls o e 291 F Line Activity Consistency Evaluator 293 LACE Analysis es bss rca a e RS 294 Launching the Viewer siii ii a a a ee ee ea 305 LACE Report a Ga eS OS wea AAA A AAA SE 309 INGEX gt Bh ES ESLER SE PEED ESSE HE RS wD 315 xii 1 Introduction Welcome to Genie 2000 Spectroscopy Software Canberra is pleased that you have chosen to join the ranks of Genie 2000 users We feel that Genie 2000 represents the true state of the art in spectroscopy software plat forms It offers the exceptional ease of use that gets you up and running quickly combined with the extensive flexibility that lets you operate your system your way No matter what your application you will find Genie 2000 to offer the power and flexibility you need Whether you are using the software for simple spectral data col lection and
70. energy file there may be common energy points in the two files If the Append to Existing Calibration checkbox is selected the system will ask if you want to append to the existing calibration If you answer yes it will tell you each time it finds a duplicate entry Editing the List When you select OK you ll see the Energy Calibration Full screen which allows you to examine and if necessary edit the data in any of the lines Please refer to En ergy Calibration Full on page 69 for an illustration and explanation of this screen Open Certificate File Look in fa Camfiles y Ex E El 2 U232 ctf File name E A Files oftype Al Cerificate Fles ECT E Help I Append to Existing Calibration Info Figure 45 Calibrate by Certificate File Calibrate Menu By Nuclide List Calibrating By Nuclide List lets you choose a nuclide list Figure 46 as a source of nuclide lines You can accept all nuclides in the list by choosing OK to move to the Energy Calibration Full screen which allows you to examine and if necessary edit the data in any of the lines Please refer to Energy Calibration Full on page 69 for an illustration and explanation of this screen W Calibrate by Nuclide List x Library Stdib nlb y Nuclides Save as Certificate H IV Append to Existing Calibration OK Cancel Help Figure 46 Calibrate by Nuclide List Save a
71. for each font you want to customize e Sections that are not being customized are not required in the INI file e The valid section names and their uses are listed below MVC Report Report window within the Gamma Alpha Acquisition and Analysis windows and the QA Editor window 273 Genie 2000 Configuration MVC Status Bar Status bars within the Gamma Alpha Acquisition and Analysis windows MVC Status Pages Status pages within the Gamma Alpha Acquisition and Analysis windows MVC Lists Owner drawn listboxes such as those within the various calibration screens QA edi tor screens etc GBT View Graphical Batch Tools reporting window GBT main screen and GBT_VIEW win dow Cfed List Certificate Editor listboxes Nuclib List Nuclide Library Editor listboxes Reporter Reports directed to a printer QA Edit Quality Assurance Editor data entry fields QA Lists Quality Assurance list boxes Peak Label Peak labels in the spectrum Large font sizes are not recommended for this section Peak Information Peak information in the spectrum Large font sizes are not recommended for this sec tion Example Section This MVC Report example illustrates all the available customization options Speci fying these values in the INI file will customize the MVC Report Window text as 9 point Bold Courier New MVC Report 274 Sample Files Point 9 Facename Courier New Ttalic
72. gamma sample counting whole body counting safeguards confirmatory measurements waste assay or a host of others applications packages built on the batch environment address the unique requirements of those applications very specifically Consult your local Canberra office for information and availability We expect that you will find Genie 2000 to provide you a comprehensive set of capa bilities for nuclear measurements We also value your feedback as this is the input that leads us to continuous improvement of our capabilities Feel free to contact us with your comments at any time Call and ask for the Genie 2000 Product Manager or visit our home page at http www canberra com We look forward to hearing from you Genie 2000 Support Services We view support services as a key ingredient to your overall success with a spectros copy system Support services are widely varied and can be tailored to meet your spe cific requirements A brief overview of available Genie 2000 support services appears below For more details see or Customer Services Catalog Training Our training department offers a wide array of training courses for the Genie 2000 user These range from basic and advanced operations courses to customization appli cations development courses and operations courses on dedicated application software There are also related courses in basic nuclear measurements and techniques gamma and alpha spectroscopy health phys
73. gt 11300 5000 Voltage limit E Step 7 Figure 5 Step 6 The Step 7 screen in Figure 6 displays a summary of the current MCA s configuration for review and lets you enter the name of the MID file that the configuration is to be saved to 20 The MCA Input Definition Editor MID Setup Wizard Step 7 Summary Mid FileName Mita E MCA Type DSA 2000 Address 01234 Acq Mode PHA Full Memory 32K ADC Configuation B Detector Settings Input Name DETO1 Type Ge Number of Channels 8192 Number of Memory Groups 1 Amplifier Settings N A ADC Settings N A HVPS Settings lt Back Cancel Help Figure 6 Step 7 Ending the Definition To complete your Input Definition select Finish The input that you just defined will be stored as an MID file using the name you specified in Step 7 The new MID file will automatically be loaded into the MCA Runtime Configuration Database de scribed on page 37 When you select Finish you will be asked if you would like to define another input Answering No will close the Wizard The Step 7 Input Name defaults to UNTITLED which you ll probably want to change to something more meaningful If the name you enter is the same as that of an existing MID file the system will ask if you want to overwrite the existing file The MCA Input Definition Editor In addition to using the MID Editor to create a new input definition MID File it s used
74. in stalled on your system S501 Gamma Analysis 574 LabSOCS or S573 ISOCS The Select Base Template list shows the definitions available in the chosen group Click on the description which most closely matches the geometry you want to define Simplified Marinelli Beaker for this example then click on OK The result will be the display shown in Figure 153 For a detailed description of the available templates refer to the Standard LabSOCS Template Drawings chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual 209 Using the Geometry Composer LabSOCS Template SIMPLIFIED_MARINELLI_BEAKER r Template Version default Save Data As User Version none y Detector and End Cap Comment Diam ce Length E Geometry Information Description none none r Set Sample via Dimensions C Volume ml C Weight g mm C cm C inch foot C m Dimensions Scale Geometry Elements Description 1 Container Wall O 2 Detector Well 0 3 Container Diameter fo 4 Source 0 5 Source Detector 0 Dimensions Show Template Density and Material lt Select from List prema Matenat CalMuEdior 2 0 none E a d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Figure 153 Editing the Sample and Detector Dimensions Editing the Detector and Sample Dimensions The next step is to modify the selected geometry template to match the specific detec tor container and sample that will make
75. in seconds minutes or hours Live time is mutually exclusive with real time but can be combined with any one computational preset Real time preset for the current hardware datasource in seconds minutes and hours Real time is mutually exclusive with live time but can be combined with any one computational preset External Start Stop These controls are enabled when a hardware datasource is opened that supports trig gering of collect via an external source When selected the chosen operation will be acted upon when the external source is triggered For example if external start is en abled and OK is selected collect will not start until the external collect trigger is re ceived Input Size The Input Size control lets you alter the displayed size of the input of the current de tector input and what is saved to a disk file It does not change the input size in the de tector input definition Computational Presets The Computational Presets are available only when the MCA is set to PHA mode or LFC mode None turns off computational presets Only the time preset will be used Integral is a computational preset for the integral of any one ROI The integral value and the ROI s Start and Stop channels must be specified The ROI channels will de fault to the current computational preset if there is one otherwise the default ROI channels will be 1 to the highest channel number You may replace the default by en tering Start an
76. isocs data parameters detector txt C GENIE2K isocs data ecc C AGENIE2K isocs data GEOMETRY S C A GENIE2K isocs data parameters templs_list txt C GENIE2K isocs data parameters m20 tat CAGENIE2K isocs data Energy_list default enr C GENIE2K isocs exefiles Cancel Apply Help Figure 173 The Current ISOCS Path Tab CAUTION An incorrectly set path can cause the system to stop functioning Default Parameters for New Geometries Select Options Default Parameters to establish default values for some of the pa rameters used when creating a new geometry This command is not available if a ge ometry definition is open in the Composer Preferences The Preferences tab Figure 174 is used to establish the defaults used for the sample container and environmental measurement units Note that the choices made here are simply setting the defaults that will be displayed when a new geometry definition is created The defaults may be changed as needed when a geometry is defined 231 Using the Geometry Composer Default parameters for new geometry xi Preferences Efficiency integration process Energy list m Dimensions mm C em C int foot Com m Environmental Conditions Temp C Fahrenheit C Kelvin m Pressure mmHg C Atm Default value 760 Relative Humidity Default value 30 Figure 174 Setting the Default Parameters Efficiency Integration Process T
77. issued by the preset that is reached first If you want to use a computa tional preset alone set the time preset to a very large value such as 9000 hours more than one year This insures that the computational preset will be reached first Each of the three computational presets are mutually exclusive but any one of them can be combined with eithet time preset e None turns off computational presets and uses only a time preset e Integral is a preset for the integral of any one ROI The integral s Value and the ROI s Start and Stop Channels must be specified e Area is a preset for the area of any one ROI The area s Value and the ROPT s Start and Stop Channels must be specified e Counts is a preset for the total counts Value in any one channel within the range specified by the Start Channel and Stop Channel MCS Preset Sweep Count selects the number of sweeps to be made during multichannel scaling data acquisition Both Time and MCS Presets can be set here but which is used de pends on the Mode Setup of the hardware input you acquire data from Clear Data Time Select Clear Data Time at Start of Acquisition to automatically clear both data and elapsed time at the start of acquisition Peak Locate The Peak Locate phase contains the algorithms which locate the peaks of interest in the spectrum In addition to the usual library locate parameters there are several occa sionally useful More Peak Locate Parame
78. made with an oscilloscope connected to the amplifier s output Trigger the scope on the leading edge of the Reset pulse and adjust its width so that it returns to its baseline after the amplifier s output returns to within 2 mV of the base line as shown in Figures 198 and 199 Amp Out we TRP Output Reset O PA Figure 198 Amp TRP and Reset Signals Compared 2 The Model LB 1502 Schottky Clamp Box is available from Canberra The Schottky clamp is built into the Model 1510 Intergrated Signal Processor and Models 2025 and 2026 Spectroscopy Amplifiers 281 Technical Information Amp Output 20 mV div 2 V div Horiz 2 us div Figure 199 Setting the TRP Inhibit Pulse Width Status Screen Entries Though the majority of the entries in the Status Report are direct reflections of the MCA Input Definition Editor settings or the Analysis and Acquisition application s Adjust settings a few of them are explained in greater detail here Stabilizer This section refers to adjustments for the InSpector MCA only The Zero and Gain correction values are the numbers representing the amount of correction made to the ADC The range of correction is 0 to 4095 with 2048 representing no correction If data drift causes either the Gain or the Zero correction to reach the limit of 0 or 4095 that stabilizer function will be changed to Hold and an overrange error flag will be
79. menu lets you select and execute or abort stop a single analysis phase such as Acquisition or a predefined sequence of analysis phases A phase includes all of the parameters the needed for its successful execution A sequence is a list of phases including the algorithms for a given phase processing parameters required for each algorithm and so forth needed to perform a given set of analyses and generate reports Execute Sequence Select Analyze Execute Sequence to see a menu of all currently defined analysis se quences on your system Figure 87 shows both the Model S500 502 504 Basic Spec troscopy Software sequences and those installed with the Model S501 Gamma Analysis Option If your system has other optional software installed you may see its sequences listed here as well MID Analysis wi Report Efficiency Calibration Report MEA Analysis wi Report Spectral Data Report Energy Calibration Report MID Analysis wii Report to a File Peak Analysis w Report Figure 87 The Analysis Sequences Analyze Menu Selecting one of the sequences will execute it For information on creating or editing a sequence refer to Analysis Sequence on page 161 Abort Sequence Selecting Abort Sequence allows you to abort execution of the current sequence Note that the sequence may not stop immediately it will continue until the analysis step already in progress has finished Analysis Phase Selection The Analyze menu lis
80. of the nuclide name and stopping when the last character in the search for name has been used If all of the characters up to that 188 The Search Menu point match a match is declared to have been found Because of this partial searches are very easy to make For example a search for CO will match any Cobalt entry or searching for S will find any nuclide name beginning with the that letter If you want to leave the last entry you found selected for editing click on OK Click on Cancel to restore the name selected before you brought up Find Find Energy The Find Energy command uses the dialog box in Figure 139 Once you ve entered the energy and changed the tolerance if you like click on the First button The library will be searched until either the energy is matched plus or minus the specified tolerance or the end is reached If the end is reached a message will tell you that there was no match When a matching entry is found the search will stop and the energy line will be selected for editing To search for the next entry that matches the search criterion click on the Next button If you want to leave the last entry you found selected for editing click on OK Click on Cancel to restore the name selected before you brought up Find Energy keV Search Tolerance 1 000 First EZ OK Cancel Help Figure 139 The Find Energy Dialog Find Mass Number T
81. on the Re move button Add an Energy Type the new energy value into the Energy keV field and its associated uncertainty into the Error field then click on the Add button The new line will be inserted into the list Refer to the ISOCS Validation Documentation for guidance as to the estimated accuracy of the ISOCS LabSOCS calibration methodology or use values determined locally Enter the estimated 1 sd value in 233 Using the Geometry Composer Deleting a Geometry Definition To delete a definition that is no longer needed 1 Select Open from the File menu 2 Locate the definition to be deleted 3 Right click on the name of the definition and select Delete from the list of commands that is displayed 4 Click on Yes in the confirmation dialog that is displayed 5 Click on Cancel to close the Open command dialog box 234 Enabling Datasource Preview 9 DataSource Preview DataSource Preview lets you preview Genie 2000 spectrum CNF files using Win dows Explorer without having to open the file in an MCA view Preview uses a direc tory configurable Javascript in conjunction with Genie 2000 components e You can configure any directory to use this function e When the function is enabled you can only preview the datasource The pre view can be disabled allowing you to move or copy files e When a datasource is opened for preview you cannot open it in an MCA view e This function is not supporte
82. ori be GOS ESE REESE ES RHEE eR OES 65 ByCalibratom Piles ork beck Ore ome e ave ot Saas We es oe ge Ges 67 By Bary os e dot ew a a amp AW Boe A oe Se eee 68 Energy Calibration Full s s soso sos a a a e ae ee 69 Energy Recalibravion es ak ne e k ak e RE we Bo aw R a wee A 71 Energy SHOW soe ereere eate ke eee ee ee ee EP Oe ew eee Be eS 72 Peak to Total Calibration ee 73 Guidelines for Improving Accuracy o 73 Setting up a Peak to Total Calibration o o o 74 Performing the Peak to Total Calibration o o e 76 Editing the Peak to Total Calibration Results o o 77 Establishing a Crossover Energy 2 o e e 77 Peale to Total SHOW ca ke aS BAS eR Re ER we eee we ee es 78 BIMCIENCY esos see be eee SDE DEERE PED ER DEH ERTS Ew ERG SHG 79 By Certificate Eiles ogs mr e A a a Hw i s 79 By Nuelide Lists eiii ria Aaa Sa ES 80 By Calibration Pile e sce e se oe ee DRE Re EE HR OE RS EE ES 83 BY ENUY oe ne ce oe cats ee ees es AO Ge aida ee ae bee A 84 By ISOCS LabSOCGS 24 42 568428568 28 SRE ROL RE RES REDE RE ES 85 Performing the Efficiency Calibration o o 89 Peak Edise sp a pde ma a AAA A A A 90 Cascade Correction see eee OP EK RA 90 Perform Cascade Correction s 2 ee 91 AulOls bes Ge dod a ee i a a Dee Ae See a oe a 91 Use TeSULES sed 0 0 Seog eastern gh Who we wad aad eh a Set ee he et aS oh e 92
83. press the Select Algorithm button For in stance if you had inserted and highlighted the Peak Locate phase step pressing the Select Algorithm button would bring up a window similar to Figure 116 which shows the Peak Locate phase s algorithms To associate one of the algorithms with the phase highlight the algorithm then press OK to save the association Ese Peak Locate Algorithms Unidentified nd Diff VMS Standard Peak Search User Specified Cancel Help Figure 116 Selecting an Algorithm Setup Algorithm After you have associated an algorithm with the phase press the Setup Algorithm button and verify or change the algorithm s parameters The setup screens and parame 163 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis ter choices for each of the analysis phases are described in detail in Analyze Menu starting on page 122 Analysis Sequence Preferences 1 Etc formation Efficiency Calibration j F Import calibration at execution T Prompt to select datasource Prompt Specify now J F Automatic file naming for Save Datasource steps Cascade Correction TF Enable Cascade Correction Prompt for Geometry C C Use Composer file Figure 117 Analysis Sequence Preferences Sequence Preferences After you have begun editing an analysis sequence press the Sequence Preferences button to set a group of preferences for that sequence Figure 117 Edit Sample Information If the Edit
84. ratios r Material library Double click for Info 4 Final Material Composition Density g cm3 9 Name of the new substance untitled Delete substance Figure 165 The Materials Library Editor The Nature of a Library Entry The uses of the library s editing tools can be better understood by examining the makeup of a Materials Library entry For example to view data for concrete double click on its name in the Material Library list on the right side of the window The re sult will look like Figure 166 Material INFO Material Name eoncrete Density g cm3 2 35 Comment fordinary_2 2 2 4 ref_2_ Chemical Composition H 0 56 C 15 42 0 35 75 MG 2 68 51 18 77 C4 26 82 _C 15 42 _0 35 75 __ Mass Attenuation Polynomial coefficients Energy range 0 040000 8 000000 MeV 2 74145352 0 48684145 0 04952316 0 01200454 0 02049514 0 00334308 0 00521889 0 00154947 0 00061476 0 00016620 Es Close Figure 166 The Library Entry for Concrete 223 Using the Geometry Composer 224 You ll see the name of the material and its density any comments the chemical com position of the material and the coefficients used to correct for the material s radiation attenuation These parameters cannot be modified from this display it is for informa tion purposes only The Chemical Composition of this compound shown in Figure 166 is interpreted as 15 42 C 35 75 O 18
85. ratios are listed to show how ac 78 Calibrate Menu curately the curve follows the measured points Note that the input P T ratios used have been corrected for the effect of side peaks WH List Peaks EI Calculated Measured Measured Deviation P T Ratio P T Ratio Error 0 71089 0 71089 0 70494 0 70401 0 43746 0 44568 Figure 59 The Peak to Total List Peaks Dialog You can leave the list on screen while working in the Peak to Total Show dialog box so that you can see the results of changing the graph s Scale Efficiency When you select Efficiency you be asked to choose a method for entering the ener gies for spectrum calibration e By Certificate File which allows you to select a certificate file containing the energies page 79 e By Nuclide List which allows you to select a list of nuclides and their ener gies from a specified library page 80 e By Calibration File which allows you to select a calibration file defining the list of energies page 83 e By Entry which lets you manually enter each energy and its Efficiency and Error values page 84 e By ISOCS LabSOCS which lets you use an efficiency file generated by the optional ISOCS or the LabSOCs software page 85 By Certificate File Calibrating By Certificate File lets you choose a certificate file Figure 60 as a source of calibration energies and their efficiencies When you have highlighted the 79 Gamma Acquisition and Analys
86. sample information box is checked you will be prompted to edit Sample Information page 160 when the sequence begins execution If the box is not checked there will be no prompt Note No prompt will be issued if the analysis sequence is executed in a command line environment using ANALYZE EXE directly or via REXX regardless of this preference setting Prompt to Select Datasource If you check the Prompt to select datasource box you ll be prompted to choose a datasource when the sequence begins execution If the box is not checked the analysis sequence will use the detector or file datasource that is open and active when the analysis sequence is run Note No prompt will be issued if the analysis sequence is executed in a command line environment using ANALYZE EXE directly or via REXX regardless of this preference setting 164 Edit Menu Automatic File Naming Check the Automatic file naming box to cause the system to automatically create a new file name each time the Save Datasource step is executed The files are saved in the standard CAMFILES subdirectory and are named sequentially If the box is not checked you will have to specify a file name when the sequence is run The first time this function is executed the file will be named 00000001 CNF and the counter will be incremented by one When the counter reaches 108 it will reset to 1 Note This preference must be enabled for any sequence th
87. section summarizes the differences between the various models Software Covered by This Manual 500 Genie 2000 Basic Spectroscopy Software Includes e Acquisition control for all Canberra acquisition devices e Gamma acquisition and analysis window e Batch procedure environment e Flexible reporting system e Second difference peak search e Library directed peak search Introduction Tentative Nuclide Identification User ROI peak definition Summation and non linear least squares fit Complete calibration functions Certificate file editor Nuclide library editor and comprehensive gamma libraries Ability to import efficiency calibration data generated by LabSOCS or ISOCS 501 Genie 2000 Gamma Analysis Software option Includes Peak area background subtract Efficiency correction Nuclide identification Automatic interference correction Weighted mean activity calculation Minimum detectable activity Post NID processing action levels Canberra s patented cascade summing correction Parent Daughter decay correction Workspace save restore Acquisition and Analysis Settings Requires S500 or S502 502 Genie 2000 Basic Spectroscopy Software Standalone Same as S500 except Supports one MCA Input only Does not support Multiplexers S511 Genie 2000 Right to Copy Standalone Right to copy and execute S501 502 S503 S505 S506 and S509 on one additional computer in the same location
88. selection specifies the file whose nuclide library information is to be searched for each of the peaks You can use the Select button to browse for nuclide libraries Tolerance This is used to specify what value is to be used to decide if an energy line in the given library matches the peak being searched for The tolerance can be a fixed energy in keV or variable If you choose variable FWHM the tolerance becomes the number entered multiplied by FWHM calculated at the energy of the peak Generate Report If checked a report will automatically be generated and displayed in the report win dow after the analysis has executed The name of the report template file and the name of section to be used are defined in the Analysis Engine File NID S501 Gamma Option If the current spectrum already includes peak area and effi ciency correction results the Nuclide Identification NID algorithm Figure 102 143 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 144 identifies the spectrum s nuclides as described in the Basic Calculations section of the Algorithms chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual UY Nuclide Identification NID Setup NID range Start channel fi Stop channel fa0g6 NID library Je geniepe camfiles STDLIB NLB Select I Perform MDA Test J Inhibit Acquisition Time Decay Correction NID Confidence threshold C Energy C FWHM MDA Confidence factor Tolerance 1 00 keV 5 00
89. shifts the current file s spectral data so that it matches the specified goal energy calibration instead of the current energy calibration File Gain Adjustment makes it easier to add strip or compare spectra File Gain Adjust C GENIE2K CAMFILES Nbsstd cnf Current Energy Calibration E 10 200438 0 456714 ch 0 000000 ch 2 Goal Calibration File C GENIE2K CALFILES Gc60 cal Goal Energy Calibration Post Adjustment Reanalyze after Adjustment ASF Cancel Help Execute Figure 77 The File Gain Adjust Dialog Current Energy Calibration This box displays the energy calibration equation of the current datasource Goal Calibration File Browse for the CNF file or CAL file containing the calibration equation which you want to match the current data source s equation to Goal Energy Calibration When the Goal Calibration File has been specified this box will display the file s en ergy calibration equation 106 Calibrate Menu Reanalyze After Adjustment Load Check this box to reanalyze the current datasource using the specified ASF file after the adjustment has changed the spectrum Reanalysis is recommended because the cur rent analysis results may not be accurate for the altered spectrum Specify the ASF file you want to use for the Reanalyze After Adjustment selection Selecting Load displays a dialog which lets you load a previously stored calibration file CA
90. spectra that will be used for the Peak to Total P T cali bration These spectra must each have been generated by a single line nuclide or a nu clide which does not give rise to coincidence summing effects and have these characteristics e The files must all be stored in the same subdirectory on your hard drive or network e The files must all be of the same size e g 4K channels 8K channels etc e The files must all be Energy Calibrated though they re not required to have the same energy calibration e All spectra used for the P T calibration including the optional background file must be acquired under similar conditions geometry background etc 74 Calibrate Menu To select the spectra click the File Folder button uppermost button on the right to navigate to the directory where the P T calibration files are stored Hold down the CTRL key and select as many files as you want to work on then select Open The list of selected files will be displayed in the P T Files box Figure 55 If you don t want to use one of the files it can be removed by selecting it then clicking on the Garbage Can button just below the File Folder button P T Calibration r Calibrating Files File Extension fent Directory C G2K_Save CAMFILES PTCalibrations P T Files 4m241 CNF Cd109 CNF Co57 CNF Cs137 CNF Mn54 CNF Sn113 CNF 2n65 CNF Background File C GENIE2K CAMFILES Bkad1 cnf m PTEG Parameters P T
91. the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual E Minimum Detectable Activity MDA Setup Aol width 72 FT Use variable MDA constants Add Constant 271 Multratter 465 Generate Report Cancel Help Execute Figure 104 Detection Limit Setup Note When a Cascade Correction is applied to the data before the MDA step the MDA algorithm will take the cascade corrected results into account Confidence Factor The MDA Setup screen lets you select the MDA Confidence Factor which can be set to any value between 0 1 high and 40 low for calculating detection limit val ues For instance to use the NRC 95 confidence factor you would enter 5 00 here Note that the MDA Confidence Factor is used both here and in the Nuclide Identifica tion algorithm page 145 If the Confidence Factor is changed here the Nuclide Iden tification calculations are affected too unless the factor is changed again in the Nuclide Identification Setup before performing its calculation In either case VMS Standard Peak Search page 131 will also be affected by any change in the Confi dence Factor if its Critical Level test is enabled Perform Variable ROI Width Selecting this checkbox extends the MDA ROI to the left and right of the expected lo cation of the energy line by the number of expected FWHM s entered in the ROI Width text box If not selected 4 0 FWHM will be used for Currie MDA calculations or 1 25 FWH
92. the energies of the simulated spectrum events to adjust the height of each pulse Therefore as the Amp Gain and Voltage are changed the average height of the pulses will change accordingly All the Oscilloscope controls Vertical Scale Smoothing Factor etc affect the displayed pulse appropriately When the voltage goes too low to generate a valid spectrum the message Count rate too low is flashed on the Oscilloscope Likewise an FDisc Setting of 0 0 will cause a Count rate too high message to be displayed The Filter and Pole Zero settings do not affect the spectrum as they would in a real device Other MID and Adjust Controls The MID and Adjust Control settings which have not been specifically mentioned gen erally fall into one of three categories and are summarized in the following table e Settings which can be written to the device and read back for display in Sta tus Screen only but have no corresponding simulation or effect on the spectrum Examples of these settings include LT Trim LTC Mode and Standby Delay in the Power Manager e Settings which are read only which would normally come from a real hard ware device These are for display only One such example is the Battery Voltage For these a reasonable value is assumed e Settings such as the various polarities which are MID settings only not con tained in the Adjust Windows in Gamma and are used only for verification purpo
93. the spectrum where the continuum is significantly higher on the left side of a peak region than on the right side This function automatically reduces to a flat line when the continuum is flat None is typically used only with Alpha spectra The value in the Channels text box establishes the continuum under the peak ROIs If you have two peaks that are close together reducing the number of continuum channels may give better results If you have poor peak statistics and there are no other peaks nearby increasing the number of continuum channels establishes the continuum more accurately but makes it more likely that close lying peaks will be considered as a multiplet instead of as a singlet FWHM or Channels Choose FWHM to let the continuum vary according to the shape calibration Choose Channels to keep the continuum fixed across the spectrum The specified number of FWHMs or the specified number of continuum channels will be used on both sides of the peak to establish the continuum under the peak ROIs If you plan to use either the Cursor or the Marker method and the calibration peaks are very close to other peaks you should set the continuum mode to Channels and set the value in the Channels text box to a small number The Cursor and Marker methods do not use the expected FWHM information even when it is available If you plan to use the Auto button you may set the continuum mode to FWHM If you plan to use a mixture of both modes both parame
94. those values are not defined then the ROIs will be loaded by channel value Note that only ROI files stored using Store ROIs will contain energy values Store Selecting Store displays a dialog which lets you select the name of a datasource which will be used to store the currently defined ROIs Note that ROI files created using Store ROIs will now store ROIs by energy and channel This allows you to load ROIs using the energy values if so desired Display Menu Display Preferences Select Preferences to reconfigure the display with your own settings Figure 82 f Display Preferences Edit Colors Plot Mode Update Information es d Normal e Bel ference Spectrum MM C Full Update Rate fo secs Compare Spectra CE C ROI type Di e nyelope IV Real Time Expand Update C Fill A il Peak Labels Spectrum Labels I X Axis Gridline I Y Axis Gridline Green I Axis Ticks Labels Y Axis Ticks Labels Blue J X Axis as Energy A Peak Labeling MCA View J Display Nuclide ID on Spectrum IT MCA only menus Toolbar Setup Ascending Descending M Control Panel Shown T Display Peak Information Show Activity Status Pages Status Page Shown Nuclide Identification Source Library Lines Analysis Results gt Operations Ask to Save on Clear L Energy Units C wv kev C Mev Other Interactive NID Cancel Default Save Help Figure 82 Display
95. two kinds of peak information to the spectral display e The Nuclide ID labels for identified ROIs are derived from the chosen Nuclide Identification Source page 115 e The Peak Information bubble which can be seen only when the spectrum cur sor is in an ROI Figure 83 shows Nuclide ID labels on the peaks and Peak Information data for the sec ond Co peak in the NBS Standard spectrum Nuclide IDs E Peak zii Nuclide CO 60 Energy 1332 5 ke Net Area 12912 7 a En a a Le a a D a o HG 203 SE 75 KR 85 SR 85 156 6 gt Activity 0 0971557200 2 CO 57 675 gt Z 09 134 BI 214 Figure 83 Nuclide IDs and Co Peak Information 114 Display Menu The color of the Nuclide ID s text label can be changed under Edit Colors but the color of the Peak Information bubble s text cannot Display Nuclide ID on Spectrum Check the Display Nuclide ID on Spectrum checkbox to add a Nuclide ID label above every identified peak Multiple labels will be attached to a peak if more than one nu clide can be associated with that peak Note When data acquisition is active the label will appear only at the peak cursor Ascending Choose Ascending to show Nuclide ID labels with their text oriented bottom to top Descending Choose Decending to show Nuclide ID labels with their text oriented top to bottom Display Peak Information When Display Peak Information is checked moving the mou
96. uses the channels specified between ROI Start and ROI End In TTL mode a spectrum is created with a few modest peaks to show a different effect but is not intended to de pict realistic results Percent Dead Time The elapsed real and live times are read from the template file and the percent live time is calculated which is then used to calculate live time as percentage of real time during acquire A small amount of randomness is added to give a more realistic ap pearance The percent dead time will fluctuate slightly during acquire as would be ex pected with an actual device Amp Gain Amp Gain is one of several settings that affect the generated spectrum When the tem plate file is read the composite amp gain the product of coarse gain fine gain and super fine gain is also read CAM parameter CAM_F_AMPGAIN This is used as the baseline amp gain The ratio of the current composite amp gain as defined by the current Amp Gain settings to the baseline is calculated and the spectrum is shifted up down according to this ratio This allows for the dynamic shift in spectrum in re sponse to change in gain which is the behavior expected in a real device If the current Amp Gain setting equals the baseline value then the ratio equals 1 0 and the spectrum will not be shifted at all thus the reason for the term baseline value 289 The InSpector 2000 Simulator 290 LLD The LLD value is used to clip the lower end o
97. value in milliseconds used by the VDM to con trol the cycle time of the advice handling checking thread SET ADVISE_HOLD 31 HDW_STATUS Timeout value in milliseconds used by the VDM to con trol the cycle time of the hardware status checking thread SET HDW_STATUS 5000 MVCPREFS Fully specified pathname of the preferences file used by the Acquisition and Analysis applications SET MVCPREFS C GENIE2K CTLFILES MVCPREFS INI GENIE2K_VERSION Version number of the currently installed Basic Spectros copy Software This environment variable must not be ed ited in any way since it is checked by the optional Genie 2000 software packages during their installation RPTFORMAT This setting which is not written to the registry during soft ware installation specifies how reports are to be sent to the printer device If your system needs this setting you must add it to the registry or add the environment definition to AUTOEXEC BAT WYSIWYG default value if setting is not defined speci fies that the report system is to send all data to the printer device through the printer drivers DRAFT specifies that the report system is to send all data to the printer device in draft mode if supported by the printer This means that all Windows printer driver set tings are overridden and that the local printer settings are used SET RPTFORMAT WYSIWYG AIMPROTO_RETRIES This setting which is not written to the registry during soft wa
98. viewing or for complete assay of complex samples Genie 2000 gives you the tools to get the job done This manual is a comprehensive reference on the capabilities and operation of Genie 2000 While others may consider the user manual to be an afterthought Canberra considers it to be an integral part of the product an essential tool for you to take full advantage of the capabilities of the system As such we are proud of the ef fort and consideration that went into the development of this user documentation The other chapters of this manual are dedicated to the details This chapter is intended to give you an overview of the system and its architecture Note This and other Genie 2000 manuals may also be available in computer read able format PDF in the lt G2K Install Path gt PDF DOCS folder on your hard disk lt G2K Install Path gt is the top level directory you have chosen for the installation of the Genie 2000 software C GENIE2K by default During the installation of Genie 2000 you may select whether the electronic manuals are copied and whether you want to install the application required to view these manuals Adobe Acrobat Reader Overview of Genie 2000 Genie 2000 is a comprehensive set of capabilities for acquiring and analyzing spectra from Multichannel Analyzers MCAs Its functions include MCA control spectral display and manipulation basic spectrum analysis and reporting Optional capabilities include comp
99. 0 Range Voltage limit Voltage inh signal Figure 17 The High Voltage Settings Note This window s initial focus is on the Cancel button pressing the keyboard s ENTER key after making changes in this dialog box will cancel the changes Be sure to click on the OK button to accept the changes Select the e Range must be set before the Voltage Limit or Voltage Control is adjusted It sets the HV Power Supply s absolute voltage limit e Voltage limit establishes the HVPS s maximum output voltage within the se lected range e Voltage sets the output of the HVPS between the Voltage Limit s minimum and maximum settings e Inh Signal sets the pull up voltage of the HV INH connector DSP Gain Settings The DSP Gain settings screen Figure 18 has three Gain controls The combination of Coarse and Fine Gain sets the overall system gain to match the requirements of the de tector and energy application overall gain is continuously variable from x2 0 to x1536 The Fine Gain factor is dependent on the Super Fine Gain SFG value With the SFG set to 0 0000e the Fine Gain covers a range of x0 4 to x1 6 The SFG value adds to the Fine Gain factor and covers a range of 0 0000e to 3 0000e 31 MCA Input Definition DSP Gain for input DSA 2000 Coarse gain p Fine gain r S fine gain Coinc mode 1 6000 0 015004 Anti al pl C Coinc 0 400 1 600 LLO 3 Conv gain 0104 8192 m El al a 16128 0 0
100. 0 100 00 3 13 b 256 16384 FDisc Mode FDisc Setting T Inp Polarity Inh 6 Auto 1 0 Positive e C Manual y C Negative C Negative x svon veo Figure 18 The DSP Gain Settings Select the Coinc Mode sets the devices gating mode COINCidence or ANTIcoinci dence Offset sets the devices digital offset in channels LLD sets the devices Lower Level Discriminator LLD as a percentage of the ADC s full scale Zero sets the device s zero intercept as a percentage of the device s full scale Conv Gain sets the device s conversion gain FDisc Mode sets the device s Fast Discriminator threshold mode AUTO al lows the threshold to be optimized automatically above the system noise level MANUAL allows the threshold to be manually adjusted FDisc Setting sets the device s Fast Discriminator threshold level Inp Polarity sets the device s Input signal polarity Inh Polarity sets the device s Inhibit signal polarity to either Positive or Neg ative DSP Filter Settings The DSP Filter settings screen Figure 19 for the DSA 2000 contains the following controls 32 Defining an MCA DSP Filter for input DSA 2000 Rise Time BLR mode Preamp type Flat Top Figure 19 The DSP Filter Settings OK Apply to All Select the e Rise Time sets the rise time and fall time of the digital filter time response e BLR Mode sets the baseline restor
101. 005 2 812 311 Line Activity Consistency Evaluator KKK KKK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEKE x T INE ACTIVITY CONSISTENCY EVALUATOR KKK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK EK EK Filename C GENIE2K CAMFILES AP3TOPDN CNF Equation used to calculate plot ln Ratio A B 1n Energy where Ratio Activity KL Activity Notes A Denotes Key Line energy All uncertainties quoted at 1 00 sigma Nuclide Energy Activity Activity Ratio Uncert A B kev uCi Unit Uncert uncert ANNIH 511 0 5 42E 007 4 895 radium 74 1 13E 005 31 849 5213132 108 1 81 0 281 WT 7 44E 006 28 537 3 417 28 826 0 033 186 4 89E 006 14 700 2 249 15 253 242 4 01E 006 7 732 1 841 8 738 295 3524 609 768 1120 1238 13 77 1764 2204 2 04E 006 6 310 0 940 7 509 l 97E 006 4 947 0 904 6 406 18E 006 4 070 1 000 5 756 L 90E 006 12 520 0 874 13 165 85E 006 5 874 0 852 7 146 2 22E 006 9 690 1 020 10 510 1 33E 006 16 633 0 609 17 124 91E 006 52331 0 876 6 708 L 29E 006 13 929 0 592 14 511 N UU JP GU BW ON DOF Ow gt N 312 LACE Report 7 17 02 2 04 55 LACE Key Line Results Page 2 Nuclide Energy Activity Activity Ratio Uncert A B keV uCi Unit Uncert uncert
102. 096 channel 4096 of the ADC would be shifted down to correspond to channel zero of the memory This offset would allow the upper half of the full scale conversions to be stored in the assigned MCA memory MCA Menu Stabilizer Click on the Stab button to see the Stabilizer Gain dialog box in Figure 34 which shows a typical stabilizer adjust screen The controls you see on your adjust screen may vary depending on which stabilizer you assigned to this datasource l Stab C HVPS C PwriMgr Gain Filter Nes Gain centroid Gain window Gain spacing Gain mode a 7680 ch OK 8 chs 64chs Off A 10 16376 1 128 2 Figure 34 Typical Stabilizer Adjust Dialog Figure 35 shows the relationship between several of the Stabilizer s functions After setting the Stabilizer s controls perform a File Save so that the next time this datasource is selected the proper setting will be loaded into the MCA Spacing Window Window Centroid Figure 35 Relationship Between Stabilizer Functions 51 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 52 Gain Centroid This control sets the reference channel at the high end of the spectrum for gain stabili zation since gain drift is more pronounced in the upper channels The centroid s chan nel number can also be typed in from the keyboard then accepted with the Ok button within the control To allow the stabilizer to correct for gain drift the cou
103. 14 700 4 01E 006 ds oP 2 04E 006 6 310 l 97E 006 4 947 988 5 355 5 3 737 28 610 0 030 2 2 1 0 18E 006 4 070 1 094 4 557 0 0 1 0 0 0 460 14 842 014 7 999 028 6 635 90E 006 12 520 956 12 687 85E 006 5 874 2 22E 006 9 690 33E 006 16 633 91E 006 5331 L 29E 006 13 929 932 1 65221 116 9 904 666 16 759 958 5 712 648 14 079 N 0 Pw pp 4 ONOOoOJGR w N LACE Report 7 17 02 2 04 55 LACE Weighted Mean Results Page 2 Nuclide Energy Activity Activity WM Activ Ratio Uncert A B Name keV uCi Unit Uncert Uncert uncert thorium 74 9 7 46E 006 32 015 4 03E 006 1 852 32 044 0 69 0 096 77 1 4 51E 006 28 593 1 351 120 28 625 0 021 129 1 6 54E 006 17 861 1 624 17 912 238 6 4 80E 006 5 054 191 5 232 270 2 4 51E 006 10 992 119 11 075 277 4 4 70E 006 20 131 166 20 176 300 1 4 58E 006 14 530 136 14 593 328 0 5 11E 006 11 137 1 269 11 219 338 3 4 82E 006 5 859 196 6 013 409 5 3 40E 006 17 548 0 844 17 600 463 0 4 50E 006 8 364 115 8 472 583 2 4 81E 006 3 848 194 4 078 727 2 2 66E 006 6 340 0 660 6 482 794 9 4 85E 006 6 788 1 202 6 921 860 5 4 57E 006 10 129 135 10 218 911 1 4 01E 006 4 013 0 994 4 235 964 8 4 38E 006 6 815 1 086 6 948 969 0 4 04E 006 4 388 1 002 4 592 1587 9 3 51E 006 9 023 0 871 9 123 1620 6 2 28E 006 16 919 0 566 16 972 2614 5 4 15E 006 3 895 1 030 4 123 K 40 1460 8 L 76E
104. 2 Deleting anentry 180 Edit corrida 177 Editing a Line ss s esce ee o 180 Editor options 182 Effluent DAC units 2 2 000 185 Effluent DAC values 185 Energy UMTS se soser eee eee as 183 Energy search for 189 Extracting energy lines 182 Lime datada 6 di a 180 Mass number find 189 Master libraries 191 MPC UNIS cer tordo a 183 MPC Valles e rss ess aa 184 Name searchfor 188 Optional limit data 178 Search commands 188 Nuclide Library editor 176 Opening A certificate file 195 A datasource ee e o 41 Opening a sequence file 200 Operating parameters 161 264 265 267 Operatorname 167 Optional Nuclide limit data 178 Software installing 243 Order of the polynomial full energy 13 Overrange clearing 52 Partial certificate file 65 81 Peak area Library method 136 Region se eee eee ee Ee He s 134 Sum non linear LSQ method 133 Peak labels 20 6 ade ee ee ae 114 Peak locate Gamma M method 127 Simple library method 129 Unidentified second difference method 124 User specified method 126 Peak to Total Background compensation 73 Calibration curve fitting
105. 3 44 Ei al 256 2048 0 0 Figure 33 Typical ADC Adjust Dialog Conv Gain Clicking either on the arrows at the ends of the Scroll Bar or in the area to either side of the Scroll Bar s Slider will change the gain by a factor of two over the control s range of 256 channels to the maximum number of channels supported by the MCA LLD Threshold The window between the ULD setting and the sum of the LLD and LLD Threshold settings limits the energy range considered by the ADC LLD The ADC s Lower Level Discriminator LLD can be set as a percentage of the ADC s full scale input ULD The ADC s Upper Level Discriminator ULD can be set as a percentage of the ADC s full scale input Zero The ADC s Zero is factory set for each conversion gain so that a Zero setting of 0 corresponds to zero intercept zero energy input stores in channel 3 the first channel used for spectral data storage for that conversion gain The Zero control can be used to change the zero intercept to another channel Offset The ADC s Digital Offset shifts the memory assignment of the ADC s conversions With no zero offset the ADC s channel numbers are the same as the memory assign ment s channel numbers For example if the Gain is programmed to 8192 and the memory assignment is only 4096 an Offset of zero will allow only the lower half of the full scale conversions to be stored But if the Offset were set to 4
106. 4 The File Info Display The key piece of information here is the File Descriptor which you added when the file was first saved This should help you decide if the file you selected is the one you want to edit 36 Using MCA Definition Tables Editing the Definition All of the menus and commands available for defining an MCA are also used for edit ing a definition Just select the entry you want to change and apply the commands as before then Save the Definition file The New Command If you want to create a totally new MCA Definition the File menu s New command clears the definition table so you can begin a new definition Because New is a destructive operation selecting it will cause the program to ask for a confirmation in one of two ways e Ifthe Definition currently being displayed has not been changed since it was last saved no asterisk in the Title Bar you will be asked if you want to erase the current Definition Click on OK to erase it or Cancel to return to the In put Definition Editor e Ifthe Definition currently being displayed has been changed but not saved you will be given a chance to save it The Input Definition Report The File menu s Report command always saves to a disk file but if you click on Yes in the dialog box that pops up you can send the report to a disk file and print the re port as well Click on No to save it to a disk file without printing the report Using MCA Definition Tables
107. 7 the first nuclide Be 7 is selected for editing Note that a scroll bar is provided for scrolling through the library list 177 Using the Nuclide Library Editor Wea Nuclide Library Editor Demolib nlb File Search Options Help Nuclide Name Type Natural y Uncertainty Energy Lines Energy Uncertainty TF Key Line T No Wt Mean Name SC 46 C0 57 c0 60 SE 75 Add Nuclide Add Line Change Delete More Abundance 99 9800 99 9900 85 5100 10 6000 100 0000 100 0000 Figure 127 A Library Opened for Editing The Nuclide Data For each radionuclide in the library there is both a basic set of data that must be pres ent plus optional sets of permissible limit data In addition there are editing buttons that are used to deal with nuclide entries as a whole as opposed to operating upon just one energy line of a nuclide The Basic Nuclide Data The first entry for each nuclide in the library is general information about the nuclide itself These fields include 1 Name This is an eight character field that is used for the name of the nuclide 2 Type This is a 16 character field that can be used to enter a type or classification for the nuclide if you like 3 Half Life Enter the nuclide s half life in this field then choose the time units Years Days Hours Minutes or Seconds 4 Uncertainty This is the uncertainty in the half life expresse
108. 73 Establishing a crossover energy 77 Guidelines 04 73 Performing the calibration 76 PTEG parameters 75 Selecting the background spectra 75 Perform cascade correction checkbox 91 Phase Acquisition 00 123 Area correction 4 138 Detection Limits 147 Efficiency correction 141 Gainevaluator 155 Nuclide identification 143 145 Peak area cerros ORD Re A 133 319 Peak locals 20 28 cage eee ee oe Post NID processing REPO lt i fi oe i Ge en A a a i Plotcommand Plotting allchannels Pole zero Automatic aee i aae i ee iai Setting manually Polynomial order Efficiency cal default Bnergy full circa ee a cs Populate energy recal box Post NID processing menu command Power manager Modes i 4 oe d Power Manager Acquisition delay Standby delay 02 Status screenentry Power manager adjustments Power mode control Preferences Calibration o o Display ooo oe ee ee ae a Preset ATCA amp 4 oS Sb HD Oe me eee Re 48 Computational 48 Couns aia Ee ee a 48 Integral o esse boa dae ACs aes s 48 MCS 2 2 eee eee bee ee we 49 Sweep counts 49 E ee Se 48 Previous Print
109. 73 208 3626 100 5 27 Y Figure 141 The Certificate File Editor Sizing the Window The Editor s window defaults to a minimum size but can easily be dragged to a larger size 192 The Options Menu The Options Menu The Options menu has three commands that can be used to further tailor the Certificate File Library Extract Certificate Extract and Energy Library Extract This command lets you extract energy lines and their associated information from one or more existing nuclide library files NLB You can extract energy lines from multi ple nuclide libraries at any point while editing the current certificate file Select Library Extract then double click on the name of a nuclide library in the Files list box All of the selected library s nuclides will be listed in the Extract Library Nu clides list box as seen in Figure 142 Specify your library s activity units from the list in the Activity Units drop down list box kj Extract Library Nuclides x Activity Units me y Conversion Factor 27000 Nuclide Activity Uncertainty Nuclide Uncertainty Name Activity in Activity Figure 142 Extracting Nuclides From a Library If your library uses activity units other than curies or becquerels you ll have to con vert its units to becquerels Choose lt gt from the Activity Units list box then type the appropriate conversion factor into the Conversion Factor text box The conver
110. 77 Si 26 82 Ca 0 56 H 2 68 Mg The total may not always be 100 because of rounding errors Defining New Materials There are three ways that new materials can be defined e By defining a completely new material e By basing the new material on an existing definition e By combining two or more existing materials into a new one The left side of the Material Editor window is used for the definition of a new material To illustrate how the process the definition of a new material called bronze will be entered Bronze is composed of 90 Copper and 10 Tin by weight The procedure is as follows 1 Select copper Cu from the list of elements at the left 2 Insure that the n field shows a value of 1 3 Click on the A button above the list to copy the Cu entry from the list to the Formula box the button is green indicating that it s enabled red buttons are disabled 4 Enter the value 90 in the left hand Mass Percentage field 5 Click on the Add As Component button P directly above that field The result will be a display like the one in Figure 167 The New Substance Composi tion indicates that we just entered a component that will make up 90 of the mass of our new material and that component consists of pure 100 copper Note the line directly above this field which tells us we still have 10 of the material s composi tion left to be defined The Materials Library Editor iif Editor of
111. A workspace file normally never needs to be edited but the following information is provided in case a workspace file needs to be created or ed ited outside Acquisition and Analysis Workspace files are ASCII files written in a INI file format These files control the datasource s opened and the display options selected by the Acquisition and Analysis windows when a workspace file is loaded These files have a GWS file extension for mvcg exe Gamma and a AWS file extension for mvca exe Alpha INI files or profile files as they are sometimes called have a standard format Each file is divided into sections Each section is marked by a name of the section in brack ets i e section name Within each section entries are formed of two parts separated by an equal sign The first part is the key name or entry name The second part is the string for the key value i e key name string key value The workspace file follows this format Datasource This section contains key information about the datasource sections to follow the show all display option and the datasource that was being displayed OpenNames DSn This key name value pair contains information about the names of the datasource sec tions to follow The value is a comma delimited list of strings used to uniquely iden tify the section names for datasource information Each string is made up of a DS string and a unique number i e OpenNames DS1 DS2 ShowAll 1 O
112. Acquisition and Analysis Y Interactive NID Eg Library D GENIE2K CAMFILES STDLIB NLB Sort by Nuclide C Energy T Show confirming lines Setup Figure 119 The Interactive NID Dialog As you may move the cursor in the spectrum window Interactive NID will attempt to find the closest matching line within tolerance in the nuclide library and select that line in the list box Alternatively you may select a line in the list box and this will au tomatically move the spectrum cursor if possible to that energy The nuclide information for the currently selected line will also be displayed in the Nuclide Info status page If the cursor is within an ROI an activity will be calculated using the current efficiency calibration and displayed in that page Sort By Nuclide or Energy The list can be sorted either by nuclide name or by line energy Use these radio but tons to toggle between the two modes Show Confirming Lines If the Confirming Lines box is checked the energies of any other lines for the selected nuclide will be marked in the spectrum window Setup The Setup button lets you change the Interactive NID preferences This includes nu clide library tolerance and activity units Geometry Composer This menu entry will be available if the S501 Gamma Analysis 573 ISOCS or 574 LabSOCS application option is installed Refer to Chapter 8 Using the Geometry Composer for details 168 Options Men
113. Analysis r Energy Energy 1 020e 001 ke 4 567e 001 Ch FWHM 9 211e 001 keV 3 867e 002 E 1 2 Low Tail 8 235e 001 keV 3 900e 00 FE r Efficiency Type Dual Order of Low Energy Poly 0 Order of the Polynomial 6 In Eff 3 390e 002 2 912e 002 In E 1 042e 002In E 2 1 9908 001In EJ 3 2 149e 000 n E 4 1 247e 001n E 5 3 042e 003 n E y Peak to Total Order of Low Energy Poly 2 Order of the Polynomial 2 InfEff 1 8518 000 5 834e 001 In E 7 6818 002n E 2 In Eff 8 260e 001 1 120 001 In E 2 7618 0021n E 2 Figure 124 Calibration Overview 172 Options Menu Energy The Energy data includes the energy FWHM and Low Tail equations Efficiency The Efficiency data includes the efficiency equation model type and the order of both the low energy peak and the polynomial Peak to Total The Peak to Total data includes the peak to total calibration equations the order of the low energy peak and order of the polynomial Report Window The Report Window menu item lets you work with the window s contents and con trol the window s size The window size you choose can be saved as a permanent set ting with the Display Preferences Save command page 113 You can create a PDF file of the Report Window s contents with the File Export Re port to PDF command page 45 Copy Highlighted to Clipboard This command copies the highlighted contents of the Rep
114. CA The Edit menu shown in Figure 8 is used to add an MCA to or delete an MCA from an MCA Input Definition Edit Add MECA Delete MEA Figure 8 The Edit Menu 23 MCA Input Definition To add an MCA select the Add MCA command in the Edit menu You ll see the Add MCAs to Definition Table Dialog Box Figure 9 EI ition Table x Available MCAs BH Network MCAs amp USB MCAs H F RS232 MCAs E Plugin Board MCAs ES IEEE 488 MCAs Figure 9 The Add MCA Dialog This typical Add MCA tree view shows the MCAs grouped by MCA type Clicking on the next to a MCA type lets you choose a specific MCA You can add as many MCAs to the definition as are necessary for your system by highlighting one or more MCAs and clicking the Add button to add them to the MCA Definition Table When you ve finished adding MCAs click on the Done button Please remember that this display as well as many others in this chapter are examples of what you might see your display will probably differ 24 Building an MCA Definition Interpreting the Definition Entry As you can see in Figure 10 adding MCAs puts more than just the name of the MCA in the definition table Note the letter following the unit number in some of the Defini tion Table items M for a manually controlled unit and P for a programmable unit i MCA Input Definition Editor local DSA 2000 File Database Edit Devices Settings Summary Help Input Size ADC MX
115. Calculated 64 580 Calculated 4 183e 002 Matching is Sufficient required matches 2 Output matches Output is reliable Current Gain 64 6 Recommended Gain 64 6 Tolerance Factor 0 10 Average Shift FWHM Fraction 0 10 Percent Gain Shift Tolerance 10 000 Percent Gain Shift 0 032 Datasource Energy Calibration E 2 13E 000 1 245E 001 Ch 0 000 000 Ch 2 Calculated Energy Calibration E 1 71E 000 1 255E 001 Ch 0 000E 000 Ch 2 Print Report Now Return to Setup Save Figure 76 Auto Gain Adjust Status Cancel Abort Clicking the Cancel Abort button enabled only if a gain adjustment is in progress stops the routine and returns to the setup dialog Any adjustment already performed will only be retained after saving Canceling or closing the setup dialog without saving will cause hardware settings to revert to their original values Print Report Now Only the data from the last iteration is saved to the datasource after leaving the AGA Status window data from previous iterations is not retained To create a record of all iterations click the Print Report Now button Return to Setup Save Click the Return to Setup Save button enabled only when a gain adjustment is not in progress to Return to the AGA setup screen where you can Save the current settings and parameters Adjustments are retained only when the Save button in the setup screen is clicked 103 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 104 Ge
116. DC allows computer controlled zero adjust ments A zero adjustment cannot be performed unless the lowest matched energy is less than 1 3 of the highest matched energy Note A shift in zero tends to be much less likely than a shift in gain Unless a zero shift is suspected it is recommended that Adjust Zero not be specified 101 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis QA Transfer Before After Check the Before box to transfer data from the first iteration to the specified QA File Check the After box to transfer data from the successfully completed iteration to the specified QA File You may check either box or both boxes Specifying the Before box allows tracking the amount of pre correction gain shift with the first iteration Specifying the After box allows tracking any residual post correc tion gain shift with the successfully completed iteration Specifying both allows track ing of the amount of correction actually applied QA File Enabled only if the Model S505 Quality Assurance Software is installed on your sys tem Use this field to Browse for the QA file to which the adjustment data is to be transferred This file determines which CAM parameters are extracted from the datasource for archiving For more information please refer to the Model S505 Quality Assurance Software User s Manual Execute When you click the Execute button you ll be told that executing this routine will overwrite your existing certificate file data with the
117. DHCP server If your network does not have a DHCP server ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below Adapter 1 MS Loopback Adapter Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server Specify an IP address IP Address y Subnet Mask l y A Default Gateway r E B Advanced Cancel Apply Figure 182 Microsoft TCP IP Properties 247 Software Installation 248 6 When all required files have been copied and the installation is complete you will be reminded to reboot your system to complete the installation process and will be given the option of restarting your computer immediately Additional Steps for Remote VDM Access If access to this computers VDM is required from another remote computer then this computer must identify itself via a unique computer name If after setting up your re mote VDM access you have persistent problems in establishing client connections to the VDM refer to Additional TCP IP Installation Tips on page 251 To set up remote VDM access perform the following steps 1 The name of this computer must be defined via the Network Settings applet To do this click on the Identification notebook tab which brings up a dialog box Click the Change button to enter a unique computer name maximum of 8 characters allowed by Genie 2000 no spaces allowed This dialog Figure 183 requires entry of a workgroup this is not used by the Ge
118. E 143 NID with Interference Correction 2 2 2 o 145 Parent Daughter Correction s s sors daa a e a a e ee 147 Detection Lamitsi ae ac cd Bee a E he a O da a 147 Post NID Processing lt c ie jee GR re e a k E p SED e E 149 LACE Line Activity Consistency Evaluator aoaaa 149 Action Level Calculations 152 Script ENgIME s s th woe ee a Ek A ee how he a 154 Gaim Evaluator ii ha Be Be ee ee ee he ee eR ee 155 Reporting ss ee he GRE RRS ORE RRR OLE ES ee Oe e DE Be es 156 Standardi A a SE Mera a ah ees Ahk Re ene Ses 156 Print SpectilMs oo alee A dee a ee Aw Se eee ae A 157 Save DataSource 2 Ga edb he be eee Re HEE ee EEE EEE RS HS 159 EQTCIVISOL oe eo eet are ek nay a ot Bp eo ee aH a Oe ae yee Peo eS oe he catch ae dee 160 Sample Inf gt s reg eo tae a dee SORE Sede Ee A AA 160 Analysis Sequence sos 2 a we a Da we oe ad 161 Insert Step ins ce a ee ek See ee LES ee ee S 163 Delete Steps a be be bee SED RHEE DS EERE RNS HERDER OS EES 163 Select Algoritmo eed ee we wee ee we Baw ae ee eo 163 Setup Alsonthm 4 068 oe 2h eee Dae ian a wae G 163 Sequence Preferences 220 424 fe FDO HEE RR OEE DREN OE OE ES 164 Load aie be GR a dod Ba RS ee ee ee ok we es 166 MOG om ka bee hee od BRET DE eS whe E ER EES HES 167 BXEC LS 3 60 eos hog me eb wy Gok A wR Goma SF ew wb we EOR 167 Options Men a mara tea e Ped Made oS aos SINE BRAM oa DO eS 167 Change OperatorName 2 stevig
119. EPFILES Pathname used by the standard report module when creat ing report RPT disk files SET REPFILES C GENIE2K REPFILES GAMMAAEF Fully specified pathname of the Analysis Module File used by the Gamma Acquisition and Analysis window SET GAMMAAEF C GENIE2K CTLFILES GAMMA32 AEF OS2FCTSFILE Fully specified pathname of the Genie 2000 Job Functions File used by REXXFCTS job command to register func tions with the REXX language environment SET OS2FCTSFILE C GENIE2K CTLFILES REXXFC32 DAT CAMDB Fully specified pathname of the CAM schema file SET CAMDB CAGENIE2KICTLFILESICAMDB DAT CALFILES Pathname which the Acquisition and Analysis windows use to manage calibration files for LOAD and STORE SET CALFILES C GENIE2K CALFILES CIJOBHELP Pathname which the various Genie 2000 job commands will search for HELP files SET CIJOBHELP C GENIE2K JOBHELP SAD_TIMEOUT Timeout value in tenths of a second used internally by ap plications during its handling of communications with the VDM This value may need to be increased based on the actual communications throughput of your system SET SAD_TIMEOUT 300 DS_LOGON Timeout value in tenths of a second used internally by the VDM during its handling of the create logon process SET DS_LOGON 50 266 Genie 2000 Environment Settings PSET_DELAY Timeout value in milliseconds used by the VDM to con trol the cycle time of the preset checking thread SET PSET_DELAY 31 ADVISE_HOLD Timeout
120. Genie 2000 Spectroscopy software Operations 9233652E V3 0 ISO 9001 SYSTEM CERTIFIED Body 9230846J Copyright 2004 Canberra Industries Inc All rights reserved The material in this document including all information pictures graphics and text is the property of Canberra Industries Inc and is protected by U S copyright laws and international copyright conventions Canberra expressly grants the purchaser of this product the right to copy any material in this document for the purchaser s own use including as part of a submission to regulatory or legal authorities pursuant to the purchaser s legitimate business needs No material in this document may be copied by any third party or used for any commercial purpose or for any use other than that granted to the purchaser without the written permission of Canberra Industries Inc Canberra Industries 800 Research Parkway Meriden CT 06450 Tel 203 238 2351 FAX 203 235 1347 http www canberra com The information in this document describes the product as accurately as possible but is subject to change without notice Printed in the United States of America Genie is a trademark of Canberra Industries Inc Canberra s True Coincidence Summing Correction for Radiation Detectors is covered by US Patent 6 225 634 Java and Javascript are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States and other countries Microsoft Windows NT and
121. Internet Connect to the Internet using my phone line modem or ISDN Connect to a private network through the Internet Create a Virtual Private Network VPN connection or tunnel through the Internet C Accept incoming connections Let other computers connect to mine by phone line the Internet or direct cable C Connect directly to another computer Connect using my serial parallel or infrared port lt Back Cancel Figure 186 Selecting the Network Connection Type Non Network VDM Configuration 6 Select Do Not Dial the Initial Connection as shown in Figure 187 Click Next Te 8 9 Network Connection Wizard Public Network Windows can make sure the public network is connected first Windows can automatically dial the initial connection to the Internet or other public network before establishing the virtual connection Do not dial the initial connection Automatically dial this initial connection lt Back Cancel Figure 187 Connecting to the Public Network Enter a Host IP of 100 0 0 1 as shown in Figure 188 Click on Next Select All Users When prompted to Connect select Cancel Network Connection Wizard Destination Address What is the name or address of the destination Type the host name or IP address of the computer or network to which you are connecting Host name or IP address such as microsoft com or 123 45 6 78 100 0 0 1 lt Back Cancel
122. L into the current datasource Figure 78 You can load any combination of the Energy Shape Efficiency or Peak to Total calibration data by checking the corre sponding checkboxes The Info button displays a dialog box which shows descriptive information for the currently selected file provided such information was entered when storing the cali Load Calibration File 2 xi Look in CALFILES e ex En fal 99 11 COI corrected BE2820 2 CAL ANPT1 CAL fal 99 11 COI corrected BE2820 CAL fail Tennelec Plastic Disc PT set CAL 99 11 COI corrected CAL Ball Cd2Te Default ECAL CAL PAINESSTD CAL gt File name 99 11 COI corrected CAL Files of type Calibration Files CAL y Cancel Help J Energy Shape WV Efficiency Peak to Total ia File Descriptor 99 11 COI corrected i CAM File Eff Geometry ID 99 11 COI corr Detector Eff Cal Time 2000 12 15 18 26 24 Figure 78 Load Calibration File Dialog 107 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Store Selecting Store displays a dialog screen which prompts you to save the current cali bration into a CAL file Figure 79 This file can later be retrieved through Cali brate Load An Efficiency Geometry ID is required and must be entered You can enter an optional Calibration Description to be saved with the file EE Save in CALFILES e ae E Save as type Calibration Files CAL Cancel Figure 79 Stor
123. LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Canberra Industries Inc Genie 2000 Environment The software installation scripts for Genie 2000 now perform just two modifications to the AUTOEXEC BAT file 1 Modifications as required to the PATH environment variable 2 On upgrades from V1 0 V1 1 systems all Genie 2000 environment definitions are removed A special batch file GENIE2K BAT containing all environment variables will be cre ated in the GENIE2K EXEFILES directory during Genie 2000 software installation This file can be executed to recreate the full set of Genie 2000 environment variable definitions if necessary Note that Genie 2000 environment settings can be altered in one of two ways after in stallation 1 Using the Windows registry editor REGEDIT you can select and modify the appropriate Genie 2000 setting 2 A registry setting can be overridden by defining the corresponding environment variable in AUTOEXEC BAT For instance if you would like to override the default report format setting of WYSIWYG you can add the following line to AUTOEXEC BAT SET RPTFORMAT DRAFT CAUTION Use extreme caution if you elect to modify settings using REGEDIT any erroneous edits deletions can result in prob lems when running your Windows environment 264 Genie 2000 Environment Settings The following is a list of the various environment settings that are defined in the registry Each of the setting descriptions is followed by its default val
124. M for KTA MDA calculations Analyze Menu ROI Width This parameter establishes the width of the ROI as plus and minus the specified num ber of FWHMs from the expected location of an unidentified peak The minimum set ting is 0 8 FWHM Use Variable MDA Constants Selecting this allows the user to specify the values for the Add Constant and the Multi plier used in the MDA calculations as described in the Currie MDA section or the KTA MDA section of the Algorithms chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual If the checkbox is not selected the normal equation of Lp k 2L is used At the typical 95 confidence level the normal equation is equivalent to specifying 2 71 for the Add Constant and 3 29 for the Multiplier Add Constant This parameter specifies the Add Constant used in the MDA calculation if the Use Variable MDA Constants option has been checked Multiplier This parameter specifies the Multiplier used in the MDA calculation if the Use Vari able MDA Constants option has been checked Generate Report If the Generate Report box is checked a predefined report will be generated when this phase is executed and will be displayed in the application s report window The report is defined in the AEF file as the Report Template Name and Section Name asso ciated with this phase Post NID Processing The Post NID Processing menu item allows you to run the Line Activity Con
125. OCS LabSOCS calibration LACE and ISOCS LabSOCS synergisti cally combine to become a powerful tool in determining the physical characteristics of a sample with uncertain parameters Launching the Viewer Genie 2000 includes an LACE viewer that allows you to view LACE analysis results for datasource files that already have been processed by the LACE algorithm To launch the viewer double click on the LACE application in the directory EXEFILES or type LACE at the command line When you press ENTER you ll see a window similar to the one in Figure 215 305 Line Activity Consistency Evaluator Line Activity Consistency Evaluator LACE y oj x File Options Help Line Activity Consistency Evaluator Previous f 10 20 30 40 sO 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Energy keV o ieee TE Dee LA re E Weighted Mean 0 58342 545 38 F XGrid VA C i Y Auto Vv Aut ee 3 0914 uto a E Save Preferences Print Graph Help Figure 215 The LACE Viewer The LACE viewer can only be used to view files that already have been processed by the LACE algorithm in Genie Once this is done you can also start the viewer with a file loaded by typing for instance lace c genie2k camfiles nbsstd cnf Or you can launch the editor then use the File Open command to open an existing LACE processed file for viewing Figure 216 shows the viewer with a file loaded 306 Launching the Viewer TES File Options Help 4
126. Pressing the F5 key will toggle between Manual and Auto Auto Selecting Auto lets the program automatically set the display s vertical full scale VFS As the spectrum grows the VFS is automatically reset to show all of the data Pressing the F5 key will toggle between Auto and Manual Note that if you use the scroll bar while Auto is enabled the program will change the scale mode to Manual Linear Linear defines the vertical scale of the display as a linear scale Log Log defines the vertical scale of the display as a logarithmic scale Compare On The Compare command lets you turn the compare function on or off and when on lets you position the compare spectrum by specifying its vertical full scale VFS Selecting On displays a dialog box Figure 81 which allows you to visually compare the current reference spectrum with spectral data from another open datasource This function is not available if only one datasource is open Note that Compare and Ex pand page 108 can be enabled simultaneously Display Menu The spectrum selected for compare will automatically be energy normalized to the ref erence spectrum That is the compare spectrum s energies will be aligned with the same energies in the reference spectrum Once the compare datasource is selected you Il see the compare spectrum displayed in the currently selected compare spectrum color Display Preferences on page 113 just above the refere
127. R Figure 10 An MCA Has Been Added to the Table MCA This is the type of MCA device being used for this particular entry in the table Input This is the name that will be used to refer to this specific hardware entry in the table The MID Editor automatically assigns these names sequentially as DET nn starting with nn 01 You can easily edit this assignment to an input name of your choice Size This shows the number of data channels assigned to this input Gain This column describes the DSP Gain device associated with the DSA 2000 Other Entries All of the other entries ADC MXR Stab Amp and HV tell you whether that kind of component is assigned to the MCA and if it s Manual or Programmable Deleting an MCA If you want to remove an MCA that you have added to the definition you can do it easily by 25 MCA Input Definition 1 Selecting the table entry you want to delete 2 Clicking on the Delete MCA command in the Edit menu to see the Dialog Box in Figure 11 Click on OK to remove the entry Delete MCA Delete the following MCA and its inputs Size ADC MXR Figure 11 The Delete MCA Dialog Defining an MCA This section discusses setting up a DSA 2000 MCA which has a fully programmable front end That is its DSP Gain DSP Filter Digital Stabilizer MCS and High Voltage Power Supply are all controlled from the host computer rather than manually with front panel knobs and switches To begin click on t
128. Script Component Enter the name and extension up to 64 characters of the script to be executed Do not include the path Setup Execute The Setup and Execute buttons must be included as functions in the script being exe cuted otherwise they do nothing Running the Example Script The example script Genie2k Scripts GenieScriptEngine wsc is a text file included with the Genie 2000 distribution and installed in the Genie2k Scripts folder To run the script e Open a spectrum file in the Gamma application e Select Analyze Post NID Processing Script Engine e Enter the script s name in the Name of Script Component text box Figure 109 e Press the Setup button enter sample quantity conversion factor for instance 24 e Press the Execute button to pass the conversion factor to the CAM parameter specified in the script 154 Analyze Menu To see the result open the Edit Sample Info screen Its Quantity field should contain 24 If you save the file the new value will be saved with the spectrum Gain Evaluator The Gain Evaluator can be used with both file datasources and detector datasources It does not perform any hardware adjustments Instead it allows you to analyze the qual ity of the current datasource energy calibration and gain settings assesses the impact on NID analysis and make corrective data adjustments including file gain adjustments and saving the calculated energy calibration Gain Evaluat
129. Select Input File Run Geometry Composer ISOCS LabSOCS Energy Efficiency File Name Cancel Help Figure 65 The ISOCS Efficiency Calibration Dialog Selecting the Input File Assuming that you are going to use an existing set of LabSOCS ISOCS data points the next step is to specify which set of efficiency data points the ECC file you want to use 85 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis e If the file has recently been used by the Geometry Composer or the calibration process it can be selected from the list in the File Name field e If itis not there click on the Select button to browse to the desired directory and file LabSOCS output files are usually stored in the following path Genie2K isocs data Geometry Laboratory Template_Name Where Template_Name is the subdirectory for the files associated with a given template When the file has been selected click on Next Run Geometry Composer If you need to create a new geometry definition ECC file Creating a Geometry Definition on page 209 or edit an existing one Editing a Geometry Definition on page 218 click on the Run Geometry Composer button to open the Composer Selecting an Efficiency Factor The dialog in Figure 66 lets you select the desired efficiency calibration type For tra ditional calibrations select Efficiency and the results will be calculated in Activity To convert to concentration the activity can be divided by the ma
130. Shortcut on Your Desktop 0 20 0 0000000002 262 Starting the Virtual Data Manager e 263 Uninstalling the Genie Software ee ee 263 Genie 2000 Configuration 264 Genie 2000 Environment Settings e 264 Elle Formats 5 4 264 5 4 0 4 2 de oe a a EMSS OE Se sa 268 Report Template Piles ss cee cres REDE arde 268 Analysis Engine Files aniya a ee 268 Genie 2000 Network Configuration File 2 0 0 2 00000020000 270 Workspace PUGS s eae Kae oce ta te moai y Oe Pew RES ES ERE EE Oe 271 Genie 2000 Font Customization soes ea saa ae ae aa a ee 273 sample Piles i e 4 bo ew dha aie ss abo g Gd ge aes BOOS Oe oe Sw Gow ow BT 275 Technical Information lt lt 082822222 277 Adjusting the PUR LTC ce 262 e ee eee ep ear RE eR HER HE HS 27 Manual Pole Zeto ida OR a he A we a Be Bel a 278 Adjusting the TRP Reset Pulse 2 ma e oaa aenea aaea De i a i a a 281 Status Screen ENIES seie punaman aeaa a we A a a a bat ed o e adoa in 282 POCA TAZ A ay er tet ade Goer ests a et a a Gee na a a ge e e a e E 282 xi Power Managers sor rocas ee a ge e Rae we a a aS 282 D Correcting for Cascade Summing 284 Why Efficiency Calibration Correction is Needed 2 a 284 Correcting the Calibration sms meni ee eB Re Re ea De we ea ee 284 E The InSpector 2000 Simulator 2 2 505 287 MID Detimttion cam nag ae Sa bd
131. The Error Adjust Factor is taken from the Show screen s List Peaks dialog box It is the larger of the largest Measured Error or the Deviation the maximum difference be tween the known and fitted values 187 Using the Nuclide Library Editor Action Level The two values required for the Action Level calculation are the levels that nuclide ac tivity or concentration can be tested against These values are typically applica tion specific such as MPBB or ALI values for Whole Body Counting or release levels for Q2 users The Search Menu To aid you in locating specific entries in a large library the Search menu contains the commands Find Name Find Energy and Find Mass Number Find Name Click on Find Name to see the dialog box in Figure 138 which is used to search the library for a specific nuclide name Type the name full or partial into the Name text input then click on the First button Find Nuclide Name Name Figure 138 The Find Name Dialog The library will be searched until either the name is matched or the end is reached If the end is reached a message will tell that there was no match When a matching entry is found the search will stop and the nuclide will be selected for editing To search for the next entry that matches the search criterion click on the Next button The searching is done by comparing the name you entered to each name in the library in turn starting with the first character
132. Values for NA 24 Derived Nuclide Action Levels Observed Nuclide pre y Level 1 fo uCi Adj Factor Offset Level 2 fo Bq kg Adj Factor Gain Adj Factor Quadratic _ Cancel Help Error Adj Factor Figure 137 The Action Level Values Dialog Derived Nuclide An observed nuclide which represents the nuclide from which activity data will be de rived must be specified The Observed Nuclide drop down list lets you choose a nu clide from the current library For the Derived Nuclide calculation four factors are required The first three factors Adj Factor Offset Adj Factor Gain and Adj Factor Quadratic are coefficients from an efficiency curve fitted through a set of data representing observed vs de rived activity pairs To find the values for the three Adjust Factors use your spectroscopy application s Ef ficiency Calibration window to enter each derived nuclide s Energy and Efficiency values from your own data table you don t need to enter the percent error value and you must not select a Crossover Energy When you have finished entering your data press the Show button to see the curve generated from your data the Dual button at the top of the Show screen should be se lected At the bottom of the Show screen you ll see the calibration equation The equation s first three terms left to right are the Offset Gain and Quadratic Adjust Factors
133. When this checkbox is selected the action level calculation will include MDA values for those nuclides that were not identified and therefore had no activity values calcu lated If not selected the action level calculations will not include those nuclides for which no activity was found Use Upper Level Values When this checkbox is selected the activity plus its error or the MDA value plus its error will be used as the upper bound value for the action level calculation If not se lected action level calculations will simply use activity or MDA values Generate Report If the Generate Report box is checked a predefined report will be generated when this phase is executed and will be displayed in the application s report window The report is defined in the AFF file as the Report Template Name and Section Name asso ciated with this phase 153 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Script Engine The Script Engine Setup Figure 109 lets you specify a Visual Basic or Java script to execute on the currently opened datasource This lets you perform custom opera tions within the Genie 2000 Acquisition and Analysis environment All scripts must be located in the Genie2k Scripts folder By default CAMDatasource methods and properties should be used within the script YN Script Engine Setup Name of script component GenieScriptEngine wse Setup Cancel Help Execute Figure 109 Script Engine Setup Name of
134. a Acquisition and Analysis 134 Peak Area Region TT 95 Critical level test Start channel fi I Use fixed FWHM Stop channel 4096 IV Use fixed tail parameter I Fit singlets Continuum jc Channels I Display ROIs Channels C FWHM I Reject zero area peaks Continuum function Step v m Residual Search J Perform Search Threshold po Minimum separation FWHM fio ROI Limits Determination Max Num FWHMs between peaks jo Max Num FWHMSs for left lirit oo Max Num Fw HMs for right limit Pano I Generate Report Cancel Help Figure 95 The Sum Non Linear LSQ Fit Setup Peak Area Region You can limit the region to be searched by specifying the Start and Stop channels Continuum Selecting the Channels button fixes the number of continuum channels added to each ROI throughout the spectrum at the value entered in the text box For most spectra es pecially those acquired with a sodium iodide detector it s usually better to select the FWHM button so that the continuum channels are added as a function of each peak s FWHM The channels FWHM parameter and its value can also be specified in Con tinuum in Calibrate Setup on page 60 If you have two peaks that are close to gether reducing the number of continuum channels may give better results If you have poor peak statistics and there are no other peaks nearby increasing the number of continuum channels establishes the con
135. a o o 49 124 MDA confidence factor 145 MID editor MID Wizard o a a e 18 MID editor addinganMCA 23 Basic concepts of 22 Creating a new definition 37 Defining an MCA 26 Definition summary 35 Deleting an MCA 25 Editing a definition 36 Entry defining 6 28648 644 23 MID wizard ke pe ee ke ss 17 New definition 0 37 Starting bes o 22 Summary view 35 Using an MCA definition 22 MID wizard 2 2 17 18 Modes power manager 535 More parameters Library area eou os ne ee aa 137 Library locate 128 Moving The compare spectrum 111 MPC UNIS coo cios gk BSS Hee ee 183 Valles oe BS BGR Ge ds 184 Multiple MCA configurations 22 Network configuration file 270 New certificate file creating 198 Next GIOUPS e oia rl EK a GS 174 Nuclide identification Interference correction method 145 MDA confidence factor 145 Standard method 143 Tentative method 142 Nuclide library Action level units 186 Action level values 187 Adding a lihe 182 Adding anuclide 180 Basicdata oea aoa 178 Changing anentry 180 Creatinganew 190 Deletingaline 18
136. a rough calcula tion for the region between the markers This means that this displayed data may not agree with the data you see in a report generated by your analysis application Marker Info The Marker Info status page includes data related to the current Region of Interest ROD left and right marker channel and energy centroid channel and energy area and percent error FWHM and FWTM Gaussian ratio ROI type and integral The calculated values centroid area percent error FWHM FWTM and Gaussian ra tio are computed only when the size of the current ROI meets the following criteria 119 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 120 V iapa See ot 256 lt 256 512 2048 lt 512 gt 2048 lt 1024 Time Info The Time Info status page includes acquire start time dead time percentage compu tational preset region elapsed and preset values for the live time real time and com putational presets Sample Info The Sample Info status page includes sample related information Title ID sample type quantity and units sample geometry geometry id and buildup type Calibration Info The Calibration Info status page includes energy and shape calibration information energy equation FWHM equation low tail equation and efficiency error at cursor po sition Display Info The Display Info status page includes data related to the current display window and the current ROI defined by the markers t
137. a spectroscopy analysis You can use one of eight sample templates or customize your own template to define sample geometries For each geometry that is defined you specify e The size and shape of the sample and its container e The materials from which they are made e The type of the detector that will be used for the analysis of this sample Starting the Composer Before you can run the Geometry Composer you ll have to open a datasource When the datasource has been opened select Options Geometry Composer This brings up the Geometry Composer screen in Figure 151 Many of the Composer s menu com mands are available as buttons in the toolbar at the top of the screen N Untitled GeomComposer File Edit EfficiencyCurve View Options Help Figure 151 The Geometry Composer 208 Creating a Geometry Definition Creating a Geometry Definition The next step is to create a new geometry definition This is done by selecting the File New command or the icon which pops up the dialog box in Figure 152 New Geometry Configuration x r Group of Geometry Templates C ISOCS Select base Template SIMPLIFIED_SPHERE SIMPLIFIED_MARINELLI_BEAKER SIMPLIFIED_BEAKER Figure 152 Selecting the Geometry Template Selecting the Geometry Template Select one of the Group of Geometry Templates buttons to enable the set of template definitions you 1l use Which buttons are enabled depends on the software options
138. ab The Efficiency Integration Process tab Figure 175 is used to set default parameters for the efficiency calculation The Use MDRPN box should be checked for accurate computations when the sample or absorber is close to the detector Default parameters for new geometry Preferences Efficiency integration process Energy ist Convergence MDRPN IV Use MDRPN defined for detector Restore recommended values Figure 175 The Integration Defaults 232 Option Menu The CRPN parameter shown below this check box is relevant only for collimator cali brations within ISOCS for LabSOCS the CRPN setup can be ignored For further information on these parameters refer to Changing the Integration Set tings on page 220 and to the LabSOCS ISOCS Technical Notes chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual The default values may be re established by click ing on the Restore Recommended Values button Energy List The Energy List tab Figure 176 is used to establish the default energies and uncer tainties that will be used for calibrating a new geometry definition Default parameters for new geometry xi Preferences Efficiency integration process Energy list Energy interval is 45 0 7000 0 fixed Manual editing Energy ke Error Energy ke Error Cancel pp Help Figure 176 The Energy List Tab Delete an Energy Select the energy line to be deleted then click
139. al Administrator must have network rights assigned Click on Next Add the network protocols to the network TCP IP must be added at this time if not already in the protocol list See Figure 192 Click on Next New Connection Wizard Networking Software Networking software allows this computer to accept connections from other kinds of computers Select the check box next to each type of networking software that should be enabled for incoming connections Networking software Y Internet Protocol TCP IP File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks El Client for Microsoft Networks v Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Cancel Figure 192 Selecting the Network Software 10 Configure a range of IP addresses allowed to access the system A minimum 258 range must be assigned as shown in Figure 193 Click OK Installing AIM Device Drivers New Connection Wizard A Incoming TCP IP Properties Network access Allow callers to access my local area network TCP IP address assignment O Assign TCP IP addresses automatically using DHCP Specify TCPAIP addresses From To Total 2 Allow calling computer to specify its own IP address Figure 193 Adding the Network Protocol 11 Click Next and restart your system When the system is restarted verify the VDM starts corre
140. al PC If you do not have a network interface in a Windows 2000 or Windows XP PC refer to the precedures in Non Network VDM Configuration on page 253 Windows NT 2000 XP TCP IP Setup The following steps should be performed to ensure proper setup of TCP IP for use by Genie 2000 under Windows NT 2000 XP If remote VDM access is required either by this computer or by another remote computer to this computer s VDM some addi tional steps may be required these are described in Additional Setup Steps for Re mote VDM Access on page 248 1 To determine if TCP IP is already installed on your computer right click on the Network Neighborhood icon select Properties then select the Configuration tab Installing TCP IP Network Components If you see TCP IP in the Configuration list Figure 179 it is installed and no further action is required Click on Cancel to exit the Network window without making any changes Network Identification Services Protocols Adapters Bindings Network Protocols Add Properties Description Figure 179 Network Protocol Screen Only two network components require installation for Genie 2000 First a network adapter must be added If your computer does not contain a network adapter card then an MS Loopback Adapter must be added Click on the Adapters notebook tab this brings up the Network Adapters selection page click on the Add button to bring up the dialog in Fig
141. alysis Engine Files The Analysis Engine File AEF is an ASCII file using as the delimiter which contains a table that defines analysis phases a list of descriptions for the engines sup ported by a phase and their operating system dependent command line and resource file name There is only one AEF per client node the file name is defined by the Ge nie 2000 environment variable GAMMAAEF this file will be updated automatically during installation of Genie 2000 analysis package options This file can also be edited to add user defined sections phases and engines The format of an AEF is as follows PHASE Max 24 chars The name of the analysis phase This list of phases is used to construct the Manual menu in the Gamma Analysis application Note that multiple engines can be defined for a given phase the phase name only appears once in the menu 268 File Formats PHASE TYPE Max 3 chars The analysis phase type is used by applications that need to determine what particular engine to execute for a given phase of analysis that is efficiency calibration in batch will automatically execute a peak locate and peak analysis engine during its opera tion Types 1 499 are reserved for internal Canberra use DESCRIPTION Max 24 chars The descriptive name of an analysis engine This name is used by the Gamma Analysis application when listing the various engines available for a given phase i e the con tents of the Algor
142. ame C 1GenieZkl isocs data GEOMETRY LabPoint1 geo Software Labsocs Template CYLINDER_DISK_AND_POINT Version point Detector Dia 45mm_Coaxial Environment Temperature 22 C Presshre 760 mmHg Rel Humidity Integration Convergence 1 00 MDRPN 2 4 CRPN 2 4 Dimengions mm Geometry Compon al a2 a3 de ds d6 Material D g cm3 Side Valls vater 00 Bottom Walls none Sample vater Absorber1 acrylic Absorber2 concrete Source Detector List of energies for efficiency curve geheration 150 0 200 0 300 0 500 0 70 0 1000 0 1400 0 2000 0 Figure 171 The Initial Split Window To return to a single pane display from a four pane display drag the gray lines to a corner of the display From a two pane display drag the single gray line to the side of the display 229 Using the Geometry Composer Option Menu The Options menu contains commands that are used to establish the default operating preferences and parameters used by the Geometry Composer Note The Geometry Composer s default configuration parameters are suitable for most uses and do not normally need to be altered Configuration Select Options Configuration to display the dialog box in Figure 172 The current Version Numbers and Dates of the program s software modules are displayed These will be helpful to Canberra s service personnel for troubleshooting purposes Click on the Update Configuration button to ensure that the mo
143. ample the conversion factor for MeV would be 1000 be cause there are 1000 keV units in 1 MeV Tolerance Units For the units to be used for entering tolerances chose either Energy a constant energy value across the spectrum or FWHM the energy varies according to the FWHM calibration Calibration Settings Tolerance Energy Calibration and Peak Match values can be set in terms of energy in the selected energy units or FWHM Energy Calibration Tolerance is used during energy calibration in matching spectrum peaks to the current populated list plus or minus the tolerance value 60 Calibrate Menu Efficiency Match Tolerance is used during efficiency calibration to match calculated peaks with the peaks in the specified certificate file plus or minus the tolerance value It is also used to match energies and peaks during later analysis Tail curves None or Low A germanium detector for instance tends to exhibit tail ing on the low energy side of its peaks so you d normally choose Low to take this into account during calibration None is usually appropriate for Nal spectra Continuum Linear Step None You can establish the continuum by selecting either a Linear function or a Step function The Linear function is adequate when the contin uum is relatively flat It is a simple straightforward equation that estimates the contin uum under the peaks as a trapezoid The Step function should be chosen if there are any regions in
144. and a maximum of 9 order polynomial are allowed Empirical Polynomial using In of scaling factor E coefficients A minimum of 2 order and a maximum of 5 order polynomial are allowed Interpolated using a straight line interpolation in the In In domain The default order of the polynomial n for both the high energy and low energy curves will be determined as follows n 5 for ten or more calibration points n 4 for eight or nine calibration points n 3 for six or seven calibration points n 2 for three to five calibration points Once an order has been determined by the program or has been adjusted in the Show screen that order will be used as the default for future calibrations 92 Calibrate Menu Efficiency Show Selecting the Efficiency Show menu item or the Show button on some screens will display the efficiency calibration as a graph Figure 72 w Efficiency Calibration Curves x Low Energy m Measured High Energy c C Linear Empirical Interpolated m Scale Linear Order of low energy poly Order of the polynomial Energy ke Peak E Drop Pk Datasource D GENIE2K CAMFILES nbsstd cnf In Eff 1 680e 002 1 127e 002 hn E 9 2 998e 001 In EJ 2 3 828e 000 In E 3 2 3358 001 In EJ 4 5 312e 003 In E 5 Cancel Help List Pks Print Figure 72 Show Efficiency Calibration You can choose which curve to display Dual Empirical Line
145. and navigate to the target directory e The target directory s system attribute must be set to true At the command prompt type attrib s directoryname Where directoryname is the name of the target directory Be sure to include the following the directoryname e Perform the configuration steps listed above for your operating system Working With the Preview When the datasource directory is opened datasource preview is enabled by default Select a datasource such as Nbsstd cnf to display it Figure 177 Note The preview function needs enough space to display the datasource s spec trum If the the Explorer is not maximized you may not see the spectrum stretch the Explorer horizontally until the spectrum is displayed 237 DataSource Preview CAMFILES IV Enable DataSource Preview IV Linear Scale Nbsstd cnf CAM File Canberra Industries PC Spectrum No 1 Title GEN ID NBS Std Type Point Source Quantity 1 unit Cursor 68 659 keV 128 Chan Counts 1005 00000018 CNF 00000019 CNF 00000a19 CNF Am1000 cnf Am243 ctf Amblank cnf AreaPreset CNF autotest CNF Bkgd1 cnf Cal cnF CasCorr CTF Cernipf cnf Coi_lib clb Ctbt02 nlb Demolib nlb example qaf filecnvt cnf Gamma_m nlb Gamma_m2 cnf Gamma_m2 ctf H_o nlb KALIB 94 NLB Naidemo cnf Naidemo nib JDE UL ATA BDE EOL AE BE Nbkgdp cnf Nbs_test cnf Nbsstd cnf Nbsstd
146. application s report window The report is defined in the AEF file as the Report Template Name and Section Name asso ciated with this phase Nuclide Identification The nuclide identification step contains the algorithms to perform the nuclide identifi cation and activity calculations Note that the MDA Confidence Factor is used both here and in the Detection Limits algorithm page 147 If the Confidence Factor is changed here the Detection Limit calculations are affected too unless the factor is changed again in the MDA Setup screens before performing its calculation In either case VMS Standard Peak Search page 131 will be affected by any change in the Confidence Factor if its Critical Level test is enabled Tentative NID The Tentative Nuclide Identification NID algorithm Figure 101 will generate a ten tative nuclide identification The algorithm looks at each of the peaks established by the Peak Area step of the analysis and attempts to find a match in the specified nu clide library It uses the specified tolerance to perform the search all nuclides that sat Analyze Menu isfy that tolerance are recorded for reporting The nearest match will be reported first followed by any more distant matches in order Tentative NID Analysis Setup Tolerance 1 00 keV E O FWHM NID Library Select Generate Report Cancel Help Execute Figure 101 The Tentative NID Analysis Setup NID Library This
147. ar or Interpolated in the Curve box and the scale of the graph Linear or Log Log in the Scale box The order of the polynomial settings can be changed up or down as required The Order of the low polynomial will be enabled for use only if Dual curve has been chosen and a low energy curve is present Note that when a crossover point is specified the low energy curve can only be ad justed up to a 5th order polynomial The high energy curve can be adjusted up to a 9th order polynomial Peak Text Box The Peak text box lets you eliminate outlying peaks one at a time Enter the number of the peak to be dropped then select Drop Pk The peak will be deleted from the list and both the curve and the equation will be regenerated You may repeat Drop Peak until satisfactory results are obtained but you can t reduce the number of data points to less than three or five if a crossover peak for Dual Polynomial was specified 93 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 94 List Peaks Button Select the List Pks button to display a list of the peaks used in the calibration as shown in Figure 73 The measured vs calculated efficiencies are listed to show how accurately the curve follows the measured points Calculated Measured keV Efficienc Efficienc 0 00480 0 00478 106 0 U6 1 006 006 3 165 85 0 00587 0 00578 4 279 19 0 00408 0 00409 Heb Figure 73 The List Peaks Dialog You can leave the list on screen while
148. ary Further editing may then be done within the current library as desired More nuclides may be added to the current library with additional extracts from the same master library or from another master library Be sure to Save the current library after completing the edits 191 Using the Certificate File Editor 5 Using the Certificate File Editor Certificate Files greatly simplify the calibration process Those files which are basi cally disk copies of the data sheets for your calibration sources are created and main tained by the Certificate File Editor program included with the Genie 2000 Basic Spectroscopy software Getting Started To start the Editor double click on its icon in the Genie 2000 folder When you do that you ll see the dialog box in Figure 141 Ni Certificate File Editor Nbsstd ctf File Options Help Title Canberra Spectrum 2 Certificate Quantity 1 unit s Assay date 9 1 1978 at 6 00 00 AM Original Certificate Browse m Line Nuclide CD 109 Halt Life ms z i 2 Energy 88 037 key Uncertainty M e s Emission Rate 514 320 gps or aps per unit quantity Rate Uncertainty 410 y I Use for Calib INIT Change Delete Clear Nuclide Energy keV Rate ZUncert Half Life D M 917 680 272 40 D 165 853 551 380 7 137 70 D 279 188 1738 500 46 62 D 391 688 1651 400 115 00 D 513 996 2751 600 64 85 D 661 638 1424 100 30 00 Y 898 021 10231 000 106 66 D 11
149. at includes a Save Datasource step and that will be executed in a command line environment using ANALYZE EXE or REXX directly Efficiency Calibration Check the Import calibration at execution box to indicate that an efficiency calibra tion should be imported at execution If the box is not checked the calibration in the datasource being analyzed will be used Notes No calibration selection prompt will be issued if the analysis sequence is ex ecuted in a command line environment using ANALYZE EXE directly or via REXX When an efficiency calibration that includes the specification of a GIS file is imported during an analysis sequence this specification will be overrid den if a GIS file is also specified in either the Sequence Preferences settings or the NID with Interference Correction algorithm settings Prompt If Prompt is selected you will be asked to specify the calibration when the analysis sequence starts to run Specify Now If Specify now is selected you ll choose the calibration file now instead of at execu tion time The drop down list shows the efficiency geometry identifier of each CAL calibration file found in the CALFILES directory If a calibration file does not specify an efficiency geometry identifier the list will dis play the file name truncated if necessary enclosed in parentheses Note that the effi ciency geometry identifier can be set via Calibrate Store menu selection Cascad
150. atasources which can be open at one time is 48 When one of the datasource file names is selected the spectral display area changes to show the selected datasource 1 nbsstd cri 2 4m1000 cnt 3 Amblank cnf 4 Bkogdl cnf 5 Cal crit 6 Cernipf crit Pul000 crf 8 Test_bkog cnf HERD aroun Fr Presario Shitty Show All Datasources Figure 125 The Datasource Menu Next Group Select Next Group to index to and display the next memory group This menu item is available only if the datasource is a multi memory group input 174 Datasource Menu For example if you open a Detector Input called MULTI 1 4 the spectral displays will display the first memory group Selecting Next Group will display memory group 2 and the Title Bar will show MULTI 2 4 and so on Previous Group The Prev Group menu item which is available only if the datasource is a multi memory group input indexes to and displays the previous memory group For example if you open a Detector Input called MULTI 1 4 the spectral displays will display the first memory group Selecting Prev Group will display memory group 4 and the Title Bar will show MULTI 4 4 and so on Show All Datasources Show All Datasources is available only if more than one datasource is open Selecting it will simultaneously display up to eight open datasources The name of each datasource will be shown in the top right corner of the datasource s display The ac quisition sta
151. ated Figure 100 o Efficiency Correction Setup Efficiency Calib Type a E Cancel Help Execute Figure 100 The Efficiency Correction Setup Dual Dual efficiency correction calculates the efficiency at each peak energy using the Dual efficiency curve as described in the Efficiency Correction Using the Dual Curve sec tion of the Algorithms chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual 141 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 142 Linear Linear efficiency correction calculates the efficiency at each peak energy using the Lin ear efficiency curve as described in the Efficiency Correction Using the Linear Curve section of the Algorithms chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual Empirical Empirical efficiency correction calculates the efficiency at each peak energy using the Empirical efficiency curve as described in the Efficiency Correction Using the Em pirical Curve section of the Algorithms chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual Interpolated Interpolated efficiency correction calculates the efficiency using a straight line inter polation in the In In domain between the two points on either side of the requested energy If the energy is outside the range of calibration points the nearest point is used Generate Report If the Generate Report box is checked a predefined report will be generated when this phase is executed and will be displayed in the
152. ating the process until the entire spectrum has been smoothed Datasource Overview The three Datasource Overviews display a brief summary of the Acquisition Analysis and Calibration parameters stored in the current datasource Acquisition Data The Acquisition Data view Figure 122 summarizing data about the datasource ac quisition shows the datasource s name and detailed input information Datasource Name File datasources will be listed as Path FileName MCA datasources will be listed as Detector lt MID input name gt Input Information This information describes the physical device used to acquire the datasource The in formation is also available on the Input Info Status Page page 120 If the data is not present the field will be blank 170 Datasource Overview Analysis Calibration Datasource C AGENIE2K CAMFILESWaidemo cnt Input Information Channels Acq Mode MCA Type AMP Type ADC Type HWPS Type Sample Title 1024 PHA AcSpi Nal AccuSpec Nal Mixed Standard Analysis Data Figure 122 Acquisition Overview Options Menu The Analysis Data view Figure 123 summarizes data about the analysis that has been applied to the datasource The algorithms used for that step will also be identified If an Analysis Sequence has been stored in the datasource the steps will be displayed A list of files that will be or have been used for an analysis step will also be
153. ation discusses many modifi able Windows parameters though most users won t need to customize their Windows setup the information in this section is useful for configuring Windows for specific situations Appendix C Technical Information covers hardware adjustments and the Genie 2000 Status Screen Appendix D Correcting Cascade Summing talks about why efficiency calibration correction is needed and how to do it Appendix E The InSpector 2000 Simulator discusses the InSpector 2000 Simulator software and its functions Appendix F Line Activity Consistency Evaluator gives detail descrip tion of how the Line Activity Consistency Evaluator works Customization Tools Volume 2 Customization Tools contains a great deal of specialized material for ad vanced users such as how to program a Report Template to your needs the meaning of all CAM parameters Genie 2000 algorithm descriptions and so on Batch Tool Support All of the material on batch tool commands including its error messages has been moved from the Customization Tools manual to the new Model S561 Batch Tool Sup port Reference Manual Genie 2000 Software Genie 2000 software is available in several variations and with several layered op tional packages most of which are covered in this manual In the interest of clarity this manual does not associate individual features of the Ge nie 2000 system with the model numbers purchased to implement those features This
154. ations are more than sufficient to insure convergence to within 0 1 Peak to Total Data in the Opened Datasource The Number of triplets energy efficiency error used will be displayed if the datasource is already P T calibrated and Add new data to existing ones will be en abled Select the checkbox to add the new data to be incorporated into the existing P T calibration Deselect it to replace the existing P T calibration Performing the Peak to Total Calibration After you ve entered all of the parameters click on OK to perform the calibration While the calibration is being performed an in progress message is displayed Fig ure 56 shows the calibration results P T Calibration Entries E Energy ke P T Enor Cross Peak Edits Energy 59 1786 key Delete P T Value 0 420959 New Record Error 021 482 _New Record Cross over Cancel Figure 56 The P T Calibration Results Calibrate Menu Editing the Peak to Total Calibration Results Figure 56 shows how the results of the P T calibration can be reviewed and edited as needed At this stage of the process the effect of the side peaks on the P T ratios for 57Co 13Sn and Zn has not yet been corrected The displayed P T ratios shown are therefore still uncorrected values Click on either the Show or OK button to correct for the effect of the side peaks using the selected number of Iterations Editing an Entry To edit an entry highl
155. ault 0 3 for both Ge and Nal Reject Factors Variance specifies the peak height variance rejection factor Only peaks whose height is larger than this factor times the uncertainty of the height at 1 sigma will be accepted as valid peaks Default 0 for Ge 1 for Nal Background specifies the peak rejection factor based on the height of the background Only peaks whose square of the height is larger than this factor times the height of the background will be accepted as valid peaks Default 0 for Ge for Nal Analyze Menu Number of Background Terms defines whether the fits are to be made with an added constant or linear continuum 0 means that no additional continuum term will be used 1 means that only a constant continuum will be used and 2 means that a linear continuum will be used Default 2 for both Ge and Nal Gain Correction The Gain Shift Correction check box on the Gamma M Library Peak Locate Setup screen must be checked for these parameters to be used in the calculations Maximum Number of Gain Passes is used to specify the maximum number of iterations allowed for peak fitting with automatic gain correction Default 10 for both Reject Gain Factor specifies the convergence criterion When consecutive iterations produce a change in the chi square less than this value convergence has been achieved Default 0 0001 for Ge 0 005 for Nal Reject MDA Sigma specifies the multiplier of the MDA equation used to accept o
156. be included in any EBAR calculations that are made 179 Using the Nuclide Library Editor 8 No MDA If this check box is selected the No MDA flag will be set and this nuclide will not be included in any Minimum Detectable Activity calculations that are performed 9 The Parent Daughter Decay Ratio and the Error on Parent Daughter Decay Ratio specify the parent nuclide s fractional decay probability and its error uncertainty specified in the Decay Chain Parent field of this dialog to decay into the current nuclide Note that this is an absolute fraction not a percentage For all of these fields that require a text entry click in the field then enter the values you want to use Clear The Clear button clears the edit boxes so that new values can be entered without hav ing to delete the box s contents first Adding a Nuclide To add a new nuclide to the library edit the nuclide data as above then click on the Add Nuclide button This will position the nuclide in the library so that the library re mains sorted by mass number and nuclide name Changing the Nuclide Entry Once you ve made all your edits to an existing nuclide entry clicking on the Change button will update the entry in the list with the values from the edit fields Deleting a Nuclide To delete a nuclide from the library select it by clicking on it then click on the Delete button This pops up a query box to confirm the deletion Th
157. been caused by abuse misuse accident neglect or unusual physical or electrical stress as determined by our Service Personnel We are under no obligation to provide warranty service if adjustment or repair is required because of damage caused by other than ordinary use or if the equipment is serviced or repaired or if an attempt is made to service or repair the equipment by other than our Service Personnel without our prior approval Our warranty does not cover detector damage due to neutrons or heavy charged particles Failure of beryllium carbon composite or polymer windows or of windowless detectors caused by physical or chemical damage from the environment is not covered by warranty We are not responsible for damage sustained in transit You should examine shipments upon receipt for evidence of damage caused in transit If damage is found notify us and the carrier immediately Keep all packages materials and documents including the freight bill invoice and packing list Software License When purchasing our software you have purchased a license to use the software not the software itself Because title to the software remains with us you may not sell distribute or otherwise transfer the software This license allows you to use the software on only one computer at a time You must get our written permission for any exception to this limited license BACKUP COPIES Our software is protected by United States Copyright Law and by In
158. boratory applications where complex shaped containers are used repetitively Includes predefined geometry templates for common laboratory container shapes Includes library of common commercially available containers and tools for the user to create new containers Includes library of common matrix absorber materials and tools to create new materials Custom templates can be provided to meet special application needs Sample size can be point like or up to 500 meters in size Easy to use fill in the blank operator interface Ability to vary assumed sample characteristics e g density container wall thickness etc makes it ideal for What if analyses Resulting calibrations may be stored recalled and used just like those generated by traditional calibration Typographic Conventions Typographic Conventions The following typographic conventions are used throughout this manual Key Names This manual shows the names of the keyboard keys as they usually appear on a key board and are seen in small capital letters for example ESC ENTER CTRL Key Sequences If a comma separates the names of the keys this means they must be pressed in se quence For example Press ALT SPACEBAR means that you should press ALT and release it then press and release the SPACEBAR Key Combinations A plus sign between two key names means that these keys must be pressed at the same time For example Press ALT
159. cate File editor 192 Changing energy units 205 Changing the integration settings 220 Checking geometry validity 221 Clear Data time automatically 124 VPS latches ocio rece ios a ae are 55 Closing a datasource 43 Coarse gain amplifier 53 Coefficients energy 63 Compare command se ee mi roed i 110 Moving the spectrum 111 Off c mmand s scce see ewes ean 111 VFScommand 112 Compare another datasource 158 Computational preset 48 124 Computer system requirements 239 Configuration database runtime 37 Configuration file network 270 Configuring the geometry composer 230 Continuum Function peak area 134 Peak arc ou eee eee a 134 Selecting type O 61 Control panel Expand Off ecg a ey ae es Rear gies ene 109 Expand on button 109 Control panel mode 117 Conventions typographic 11 Conversion factor BqtoCi 193 Conversion gain ADC 50 316 Correcting for cascade summing explanation of o 284 Counts preset 48 124 Creating A new certificate file 198 A new nuclide library 190 Creating a geometry definition 209 Critical level test area correction 139 Critical level test peak area
160. cified the list will display the file name trun cated if necessary enclosed in parentheses Note that the efficiency geometry identi fier can be set via the Store option in the Calibrate menu Cascade Correction To enable cascade correction mark the checkbox The currently specified GIS Geom etry Composer file is displayed Note When an efficiency calibration that includes the specification of a GIS file is imported during an analysis sequence this specification will be overrid den if a GIS file is also specified in either the Sequence Preferences settings or the NID with Interference Correction algorithm settings Prompt for Geometry Composer File If Prompt for Geometry Composer File is selected you will be asked to specify the calibration when the analysis sequence starts to run Note No file selection prompt will be issued if the analysis sequence is executed in a command line environment using ANALYZE EXE directly or via REXX Use If Use is selected you ll choose the indicated file now instead of at execution time Note This setting will overwrite any existing GIS file specification in interfer ence corrected nuclide identification steps Similarly specifying a GIS file in such a step after choosing one in the Analysis Sequence Preferences window will overwrite the preference setting Both methods control the same prop erty Options Menu Options Menu Though energies are stored in keV
161. cription GIS file to be used for this calibration If a file does not exist select the Geometry Composer button This will start the Geometry Composer application where you can create and save a geometry description file The newly created file must then be selected If your HPGe detector is not characterized for LabSOCS ISOCS you should select the closest generic detector characterization while editing the Geometry Composer parameters For more information refer to the Selecting a Generic LabSOCS Detector Characterization appendix in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual 5 The Generate Reports checkbox determines if the analysis algorithms will output their standard reports 6 Select the Detector Characterized for LabSOCS checkbox if Canberra has characterized the detector being calibrated This will add a 5 systematic 285 Correcting for Cascade Summing 286 error to the certificate file uncertainty Error triplet of all affected nuclides If the detector has not been characterized a 10 systematic error will be added if the nuclide is Co or YY and a 15 systematic error will be added to any other affected nuclide s uncertainty The Auto button will now perform all the steps necessary to correct the calibration for Cascade Summing The status bar at the bottom of the Gamma Acquisition and Analysis GAA window will show the stages being executed a First a peak locate with area analysis will be done using the s
162. ction feature lets you correct nuclide activities for losses or gains due to the cascade summing effect of gamma rays The Cascade Cor rection can be enabled disabled in the NID with Interference Correction dialog For information on setting up and using Cascade Correction please refer Chapter 7 Using Cascade Correction on page 206 For cascade correction to work the gamma ray spectrum must include a valid peak to total calibration and a valid efficiency calibration that is free from cascade summing effects Refer to Appendix D Correcting an Efficiency Calibration for Cas cade Summing on page 284 for details on correcting an empirical efficiency calibra tion Other components that are necessary for running the cascade correction are the Coin cidence library and a Geometry file that contains the source detector geometry infor mation for the given measurement Generate Report If the Generate Report box is checked a predefined report will be generated when this phase is executed and will be displayed in the application s report window The report is defined in the AEF file as the Report Template Name and Section Name as sociated with this phase Analyze Menu Parent Daughter Correction S501 Gamma Option The Parent Daughter Correction algorithm loops through the identified nuclides in the datasource searching for nuclides in parent daughter pairs It performs corrections to the activities of the daughter nuclides where appr
163. ctly by simply opening a hardware or software datasource Installing AIM Device Drivers In order to communicate with an AIM acquisition device under Genie 2000 a special protocol stack must be installed e The Windows NT AIM setup is described on page 260 e The Windows 2000 XP AIM setup is described on page 260 For CD ROM distributions the following table shows the CD ROM location of the AIM drivers for each operating system aie 9 Directory Windows NT NT Windows 2000 2000_XP Windows XP 2000_XP 259 Software Installation 260 Windows NT Setup The following steps should be followed to ensure proper setup of the AIM protocol stack under Windows NT 1 Launch the Network applet via the Control Panel Click on the Protocols notebook tab and then press the Add pushbutton Click on the Have Disk pushbutton Make sure the CD is still loaded in the CD ROM drive Select the directory Bin G2KVx x NT having the required Windows NT AIM driver where is your CD ROM drive and x x is the version of Genie being installed Click OK A dialog box will appear having the following entry Canberra 802 3 SNAP Protocol driver V1 0 click OK to accept this protocol Make sure that the Canberra 802 3 SNAP Protocol is bound to the correct Ethernet adapter this is not an issue if you have only one Ethernet adapter in your computer If multiple adapters are present the adapter binding can be determined from the B
164. ctor in the third column e The fourth column lists the ratio of the energy shift calculated from the evalu ated energy calibration versus the current energy calibration to the local FWHM Calibrate Menu Gain Adjustment Data Input is considered sufficient if the number of supplied true lines is at least half the number of found peaks This makes it likely that the true pattern will be dominant reducing the chances of false matches Matching is considered sufficient when the number of peak line matches is considered statistically significant Statistical significance is determined when the number of successful matches compared to the number of possible matches true energies supplied exceeds that expected for a normal distribution within the determined number of standard deviations The determined number of standard deviations is provided by the listed Tolerance Factor The required threshold for statistical significance has a maximum of 0 75 to allow for up to 25 spurious input true energy lines Output is considered reliable when both the Input and Matching are sufficient Reliability must be established before Auto Gain Adjust performs any hardware adjustments in a given iteration Tolerance Factor is the minimum number of standard deviations of the energy uncertainties required to obtain the maximum number of unambiguous peak line matches The higher the tolerance factor the greater the number of standard deviations required fo
165. cy curve for the defined geometry This process creates an ECC file in a subdirectory defined by the geometry template chosen GeomComposer Efficiency data points have been generated c genie2k isocs data geometry laboratory simplified_marinelli_beaker glass beaker ecc Figure 164 The Data Points Have Been Generated A progress report is displayed during this process and the message in Figure 164 is displayed when it is complete Note that the full path to ECC file that was generated is shown To use the completed calibration see By LabSOCS ISOCS on page 85 and select the ecc file you have just created Refer to Calibration by LabSOCS ISOCS page 85 for the rest of the process Closing the Geometry Composer returns you to the screen shown in Figure 65 page 85 The Materials Library Editor 222 The Edit Materials Library command is used to edit the library containing the ma terial choices and characteristics used to specify the composition of the sample and its container Selecting it opens the library editing window shown in Figure 165 The Materials Library Editor iff Editor of mu library c genie2k isocs data parameters mu04_8 b txt y Chemical Formula Composer p New Substance Composition Add As Component Component Balance Allowable Addition 100 000 Clear Cle Formula Cea B acrylic fe aluminum cellulos al Mase concrete Element X n 1 atom
166. d Stop channel values or by using the ROI Index buttons to scroll through currently defined ROIs The integral preset is mutually exclusive with all other computational presets but can be combined with either a live time or real time preset Area is a computational preset for the area of any one ROI The area value and the ROT s Start and Stop channels must be specified The ROI channels will default to the current computational preset if there is one otherwise the default ROI channels will be 1 to the highest channel number You may replace the default by entering Start and Stop channel values manually or by using the ROI Index buttons to scroll through cur rently defined ROIs The area preset is mutually exclusive with all other computa tional presets but can be combined with either a live time or real time preset Counts is a computational preset for total counts in a single channel within the chan nel range specified by the Start and Stop channels The Value which must be speci fied indicates the number of counts which will stop acquisition The counts preset is MCA Menu mutually exclusive with all other computational presets but can be combined with ei ther a live time or real time preset MCS Preset Clear Adjust The MCS Preset is available only when the MCA is set to MCS mode Sweep counts selects the number of sweeps to be performed during MCS data acquisition Dwell time is set on the hardware MCS unit for the 100 it
167. d in the same time units as the half life The Optional Nuclide Data Clicking on the More button pops up the Dialog Box shown in Figure 128 which is 178 Editing a Nuclide Library used to add nuclide information related to decay chain information Parent Daughter information Health Physics analyses and more Additional Nuclide Parameters for CO 60 Abundance Limit 0 00 Mass Factor o g uli Average Gamma 2 506 Mev Equiv Factor 0 000 Average Beta 0 096 MeV T NoMDA F NoEBAR MDA to be met fo uCi unit r Decay Chain Parent Parent Daughter Decay Ratio Daughter Error on Decay Ratio Cancel Help Figure 128 The Optional Data Dialog 1 Decay Chain These fields specify the parent and daughter nuclides if any of the current nuclide They are used by Genie 2000 s Parent Daughter function 2 Abundance Limit This field is reserved for future use 3 Average Gamma This is the average gamma energy that is emitted by this nuclide 4 Average Beta This is the average beta energy that is emitted for this nuclide 5 MDA to be met The value entered here is used by the MDAPRESET Job Function which is described in section with that title in the Batch Procedure Reference chapter of the Model S561 Batch Tools Support Reference Manual 6 Equiv Factor This field is used for I or Cs equivalency calculations 7 No EBAR If this check box is selected this nuclide will not
168. d like errors to be reported at 3 sigma type in 3 as the Error Multiplier Start On You should check one of the boxes in the Start on section 156 Analyze Menu e Page One means that the first page of the next report section will be numbered as one YY Standard Report Setup TengiteNane AT Directory CAGENIE2KACTLFILESA Section Name Header y Error multiplier fi 000000 Start on Output to Page One T New Page IV Screen IV New File I Printer Activity Units uCi Multiplier fi Cancel Help Figure 111 The Standard Report Setup e New page means that the new results will be appended to existing results and start on a new page e New file means that any previous report file spectrum file name with an extension of RPT will be overwritten if this box is not checked the data will be appended to the existing file Output To To create both a text file and a printout of the report click on File Report then click on Yes If you click on No only the text file will be created and saved The default save path is C GENIE2K REPFILES name RPT where name is the name of the datasource being reported on Activity Units and Multiplier Activity Units is normally Ci if you want to use another unit for reporting nuclide activities enter that unit here Since the activities are stored in microcuries you ll have to enter a factor to convert microcuries to your units if you want to use Bq for
169. d under Windows NT Requirements The Datasource Preview function requires that three conditions be met e Your operating system must be Windows 2000 SP2 or later or Windows XP SP1 or later e After installing Genie 2000 you must reboot for Datasource Preview to work e Screen Resolution must be 1024 by 768 pixels minimum Enabling Datasource Preview If the following settings are not enabled after you ve installed Genie 2000 and rebooted they must be configured manually The Active Desktop First you ll have to enable the Active Desktop feature of Windows Explorer Windows 2000 In Windows 2000 select Tools Folder Options Web View Enable Web content in folders Windows XP In Windows XP select Tools Folder Options Tasks Show common tasks in folders 235 DataSource Preview Customizing the Datasource Folder Next you ll have to customize the folder where the datasource files are stored If you performed a Standard Genie 2000 Installation the files are in C GENIE2K CAMFILES Windows 2000 For Windows 2000 e Find and select the directory containing the datasource files e Click View Customize This Folder This opens the Customize This Folder Wizard e Click Next e In the next dialog box select Customize Choose or Edit an HTML template for this folder then click Next e In the next dialog box select Current then click Next e At this point the Folder htt file will be
170. data in the opened datasource Extrapol Chan rad Number cf elite Tan a m umber of triplets Iterations 2 J Add new data to existing ones Cancel Help Figure 55 The Selected Spectra Selecting the Background Spectrum It is recommended that a background spectrum be selected for subtraction during the P T calibration process Click the File Folder button to the right of Background File field to select this file Note The background file must be the same size number of channels as the cali bration files and must be energy calibrated PTEG Parameters The defaults for the three PTEG parameters are best for most situations but may be changed if necessary T Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 76 Extrapol Chan This parameter defines a lower limit LLD channel for the P T calibration spectra Spectral data below the extrapolation channel are replaced by a computed predicted value Use this lower limit adjustment to discard unwanted low energy content i e noise etc Avg Window The average window width to be used during peak analysis This parameter sets the number of channels to the left and right of the extrapolation channel and is used to de termine the average count to be placed in all channels from zero to the Extrapolation Channel Iterations This parameter displays the maximum number of iterations being used to correct for side peaks on the P T ratio during calibration Ten iter
171. de will be changed to hold Set that mode to off to clear the overrange flag then correct the cause of the excessive drift before returning the mode to on On enables stabilization for the specified mode allowing the Stabilizer to compare the incoming data to the Mode s Centroid and Window settings then compensate for data below or above the Centroid Off disables stabilization for the specified mode and sets the correction adjustment to zero and clears the overrange flag if it was set Hold disables stabilization for the specified mode but maintains the current correction adjustment at the Stabilizer s output MCA Menu Amplifier Click on the Amp button to see the dialog box in Figure 36 which shows a typical ad just screen for a programmable amplifier The controls you see on your adjust screen may vary depending on which amplifier you assigned to this datasource Click on the Next button to see the PUR and Pole Zero controls Coarse gain Fine gain x140 X 0 313x Ea al 0 13 Figure 36 Typical Amplifier Adjust Dialog Coarse Gain The Amplifier s Coarse gain setting is selected from the drop down list For most con figurations it s best to choose the highest Coarse Gain which combined with the Fine and S Fine Gains will produce the total desired gain Fine Gain and S fine Gain The Fine Gain and Super Fine Gain controls are set with their Scroll Bars Shaping Mode This control sets th
172. designed to function both within a single computer and over a network Thus an MCA hardware device connected to one computer s VDM can be accessed for control display and analysis over a network from another computer The next layers are the compute modules These are small modular programs that per form basic functions start stop of acquisition transfer of spectrum from MCA to disk peak search etc This modular nature makes possible the extensive flexibility in Genie 2000 individual modules can be operated together in a sequence to meet spe cific application requirements Tying the compute modules together are two completely separate user interface envi ronments the interactive environment and the batch procedure environment These distinct environments were developed for very different needs in recognition of the fact that there can be very different uses of a single system The interactive environment embodied in the Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Window and optionally in the Alpha Acquisition and Analysis Window is intended for direct hands on operation of all aspects of the system From an integrated window featuring pull down menus a tool bar status pages a report window and spectral dis play the user can do essentially anything with the system Acquisition control analy sis spectrum manipulation are all very interactive and are all available to the user all the time This makes the environment very pow
173. ditional flexibility in that they determine the source of required input parameters based on how they are invoked Specifically a Type 2 3 entry that is invoked from the Manual menu will be called with the step number parameter being zero 0 This instructs the entry to read its required input parameters from the appropriate common CAM parameters section If a Type 2 3 entry is invoked as part of an analysis sequence through the Analyze menu then its step number parameter will be 269 Genie 2000 Configuration non zero and indicate the record number from within the Analysis Control Block from which it will read its required input parameters RESOURCE Max 64 chars This is the engine setup screen location The portion of the line preceding the is the name of the DLL Windows which contains the setup screen dialog procedure and re source it is system dependent The name of the entry point for the setup screen func tion follows the l A typical record in the AEF would look like this Peak Analysis 2 Simple PSSIMP 1 C DLL PSSIMP DLL PSSIMP C DLL PSSRES DLL PSSPROC ANALYSIS TPL PeakAnalysis TEMPLATE NAME Max 12 chars This is the name of the default report template used by the engine when generate re port is selected SECTION NAME Max 8 chars This is the name of the default report section used by the engine when generate re port is selected Genie 2000 Network Configuration File A Netw
174. ditional information on how to dis able this feature Update Procedure Before performing a software installation or upgrade it s highly recommended that you make a complete backup of all of your Genie 2000 directories If this is not practi cal you should at least copy any ASF TPL or NLB files that you modified but that still use the default file names to a disk or to a temporary directory to be sure that the software installation procedure does not overwrite them with default files After the installation is complete these files can be restored to their original directories Release Notes During installation of each software option a Release Notes file containing informa tion on the current version of the software is copied to the GENIE2K directory on your hard disk It is worthwhile to read this text ASCID file which has a general file name of G2K TXT directly from the installation CD before installing the software to see if there is any variation in the installation procedure To install the Genie 2000 software 1 Ifyou are installing this software as an upgrade from a previous version make sure that no Genie 2000 software programs such as the VDM are running 2 Insert the CD into the CD ROM drive 241 Software Installation 3 Click Start Run and type setup where is your CD drive then click OK 4 The setup screen Figure 178 offers several Genie 2000 options In addition to installing t
175. dow The ROI color conventions are Color 1 Singlet peaks Color 2 Multiplet peaks Color 3 Not used Color 4 Not used Any previously displayed ROIs are cleared before generating the new ROI list Critical Level Test If this checkbox is enabled any corrected peak that has a net area less than k times the uncertainty of the background will be discarded where k is the Confidence Factor set in either the Nuclide Identification setup page 145 or the Detection Limits setup page 147 Use Fixed FWHM If the Use Fixed FWHM checkbox is enabled the FWHM of peaks in a region will be held fixed to their calibration value Otherwise they will be allowed to freely vary dur 132 Analyze Menu ing the fitting process Note that this parameter only applies to singlets if the Fit Singlets checkbox is enabled or when analyzing multiplets Generate Report When this checkbox is enabled a predefined report is generated in the Report Window upon successful completion of the analysis phase execution The report is defined in the analysis engine AEF file as the Report Template Name and Section name associ ated with this phase By default the report template used is ANALYSIS TPL distrib uted in the standard Genie 2000 packages The section of the template used is NDPeaks The report format is that generated by the Peak Search function on the VMS platform Peak Area The peak area phase contains the algorithms to calculate the net pea
176. during sample measure ment These parameters include the dimensions densities and materials used for both the source matrix and absorbers between the source and detector as well as the dis tance between the source and detector While it is possible that multiple parameters may have discrepancies confounding the analysis it is likely that the scope of analysis can be limited by understanding which parameters might not be well known There fore it is worthwhile isolating and investigating the effect of individual parameter dis crepancies Figures 201 through 207 each address a different parameter showing the effects of a range of discrepancies for analyzing a simulated measurement Each figure addresses changes to only one parameter of the measured sample keeping all of the other param eters at nominal values These nominal values are e Source matrix thickness 5 cm e Source matrix material aluminum e Source matrix density 2 7 g cm e Absorber thickness 1 cm e Absorber material aluminum Absorber density 2 7 g cm e Source detector distance 10 cm Each figure includes the reference nominal case with variations above and below to show the resulting trends The energy range is 45 7000 keV and the activity ratios reference the weighted mean activity Figure 201 shows how the activity ratio changes when the sample matrix thickness is different from the calibration matrix thickness of 5 cm A negative slope indicates that the meas
177. e Activity In Activity Nuclide Activity 0 000 Uncertainty 0 00 OK Cancel Help Figure 47 Additional Nuclide Information General Information These text boxes let you enter or change assay date and time and the activity units The Assay Date is the date and time when the source was measured you must enter both Though Activity Units defaults to wCi you can choose another unit for reporting nuclide activities The Conversion Factor defaults to the proper value for converting Bq to uCi If you choose the last item in the Activity Unit list lt gt you can type in the name of any other unit then enter the Conversion Factor that will convert your units to Ci Nuclides Highlight a nuclide in the list box to enter or edit its Activity and Percent Uncertainty data When you ve finished editing that nuclide select Change This will copy the data to the list file and move the highlight to the next nuclide When you ve finished select OK to save this as a full CTF certificate file and re turn to the Calibrate by Nuclide List screen You ll see that all nuclides which have Additional Nuclide Information added are marked by a double asterisk If you are satisfied that all data in the Calibrate by Nuclide List screen is correct you can select this screen s OK to load the file into the energy line editor 66 Calibrate Menu Editing the List When you select OK you ll see the Ener
178. e Calibration Dialog Display Menu The Display menu contains several functions for the data display Expand Scale Compare ROIs and Preferences Expand The expanded display shown in Figure 80 is a split screen display with the whole spectrum in the lower half of the display and the expanded portion in the upper half The upper and lower half of the window can be resized by moving the splitter bar be tween the upper and lower halves Note that Expand and Compare page 110 can be enabled simultaneously 108 Display Menu Expand On The Expand mode can easily be turned on by clicking on the Control Panel s Expand On button or by pressing the F8 key Expand Off The Expand mode can easily be turned off by clicking on the Control Panel s Expand Off button or by pressing the F8 key The Expanded Spectrum The expanded half of the display is the data inside the rectangle in the lower half of the display The focus of the expanded display the rectangle can be moved through the spectrum by putting the mouse pointer inside the rectangle then clicking and dragging it to a new location The data shown in the expanded half of the display will track the mov ing rectangle Resizing the Rectangle The rectangle can be resized by moving the mouse pointer to any side of the rectangle so that the pointer changes to a two headed arrow Click the mouse button and drag the rectangle s side to a new height or width gd Gamma
179. e Correction To enable cascade correction mark the checkbox The currently specified GIS Geom etry Composer file is displayed 165 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Note When an efficiency calibration that includes the specification of a GIS file is imported during an analysis sequence this specification will be overrid den if a GIS file is also specified in either the Sequence Preferences settings or the NID with Interference Correction algorithm settings Prompt for Geometry Composer File If Prompt for Geometry Composer File is selected you will be asked to specify the calibration when the analysis sequence starts to run Note No file selection prompt will be issued if the analysis sequence is executed in a command line environment using ANALYZE EXE directly or via REXX Use If Use is selected you ll choose the indicated file now instead of at execution time Note This setting will overwrite any existing GIS file specification in interfer ence corrected nuclide identification steps Similarly specifying a GIS file in such a step after choosing one in the Analysis Sequence Preferences window will overwrite the preference setting Both methods control the same prop erty Load Load Figure 118 lets you load a defined sequence populating the Current Steps list box with the sequence s steps and loading their associated setup parameters g Load Analysis Sequence File name Peak_sho ASF Director
180. e Energy Line Data In addition to the general nuclide data each library entry also contains one or more Energy Line entries There will be one such entry for each Energy Line that you want to have associated with that nuclide Editing an Energy Line Entry To edit an existing Energy Line entry click on it in the library list to select it When 180 Editing a Nuclide Library you do that its parameters will be copied into the Energy Line edit area as shown in Figure 129 The parameters for each line are l Nuclide Library Editor Stdlib nlb File Search Options Help r Nuclide Name k 40 Half Life fi 277e 003 2 y Type fatwa Uncertainty 8e 006 cs I NoWtMean Uncertainty 0 000000 keV Uncertainty Jon Abs Clear Type Half Life Energy keV natural 1 277E 009Y Energy Lines Energy 1460 810 ke Abundance 0 67 x M KeyLine activation 1293 64 99 1600 741 600 1524 66 17 9000 hal Add Nuclide Add Line Change Delete Moe Figure 129 Editing Energy Line Data 1 Energy This is the energy of the line In this case the energy is displayed in keV 2 Uncertainty This is the uncertainty in the energy expressed in the same units as the energy 3 Abundance This is the percentage of the total events emitted by the nuclide at this particular energy Abundance is also called branching ratio or yield in the literature 4 Uncertainty This is the uncertainty in the abundance expre
181. e Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual UN Setup for Standard Bkg Subtract x Bka File Select P 95 Critical level test Tolerance 1 00 ke Energy C FWHM Cancel Help Execute Figure 98 The Standard Background Subtract Setup l Generate Report Background File Type in the fully specified name of a background CNF file to be used in the subtrac tion or click on Select then choose a file from the file open dialog box Note Do not enter a file name when using one of Canberra s automatic applica tions such as PROcount They use a specific background file See the appli cation s user s manual for more specific information 95 Critical Level Test The 95 Critical Level test may be enabled or disabled for this phase of the calcula tions If the test is enabled the net peak area of a singlet after the background subtract must exceed the 95 Critical Level value as described in the Critical Level Testing section of the Algorithms chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual If the Critical Level test is not enabled all peaks are retained even if their areas are zero or negative after the background subtract Tolerance Enter a tolerance value either fixed Energy or variable FWHM to define how large a difference can be allowed between a peak in the current datasource and a peak in the background datasource and still be considered the same peak 139 Gamma Acquisition
182. e amplifier s shaping time constant for use with different detectors PUR This control turns the amplifier s Pileup Rejector PUR On or Off When PUR is on a Live Time correction is performed for pulses that are piled up A procedure for ad justing the Pileup Rejector for optimum performance is described in Adjusting the PUR LTC on page 277 BLR Mode The BLR baseline restorer control s Asymmetrical mode normally offers superior high count rate performance for high resolution Ge spectroscopy The Symmetrical mode is used on Ge systems with high noise levels scintillation and proportional de tectors and Si systems The Symmetrical mode should always be used for detector systems which exhibit baseline discontinuities resulting from excessive noise and or high voltage effects preamp reset pulses and preamp secondary time constants Secondary preamp fall time constants result in unipolar output undershoots making it difficult to optimize the am plifier preamp matching 53 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 54 Pole Zero The amplifier s pole zero which must be changed whenever the Amplifier s Shaping is changed or a different detector is used can be adjusted automatically or manually Auto P Z Click on Start to start the amplifier s automatic pole zero optimization pro cess which is required before acquiring spectra with RC type preamps For auto pole zero to function properly the incoming counts should b
183. e between 25 and 100 of full scale For a 0 2 MeV setup this generally means that at 500 keV or higher the incoming count rate in this window should be greater than 100 cps The maximum count rate over the full ADC range should be lt 2 kcps If the pole zero fails to converge check for the proper count rate The pole zero adjustment will be more accurate if the spectrum contains a significant count rate above 70 of full scale After adjusting the pole zero you can see the current pole zero setting by selecting a different Adjust screen such as ADC then reselecting Amp This will update the num ber above the slider control If after performing an Auto P Z and refreshing the screen the setting has changed significantly try to do another Auto P Z cycle the P Z circuits may need more time to find the optimum setting Manual P Z In some situations the auto pole zero may fail to converge to an optimal value so a slider control is provided which allows you to manually adjust the pole zero setting The adjustment procedure is described in detail in the Manual Pole Zero on page 278 TRP Preamps When a Transistor Reset Preamp TRP is used the pole zero is fixed at 0 but you may have to make an adjustment on the TRP preamp so that the amplifier and ADC are gated off during the preamp s reset time This procedure is described in the Ad justing the TRP Reset Pulse on page 281 High Voltage Click on the HVPS button
184. e to the Viewer window so that they are always visible Disabling Auto Size will cause the graph and other controls to maintain their current size and position Color The colors of the various graph elements background label data points and curve can be changed LACE Report Below is a sample report generated by the LACE using Lace tpl Note that all identified nuclides are listed in the report Nuclides which are rejected because of single line or no key line will appear anyway the rejection criteria is evi dent from the report 309 Line Activity Consistency Evaluator 310 7 17 02 2 04 55 LAC q v1 0 Page 1 KKK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KK KKK KK KK KARA KKK KK KKK KKK KA KKK KKK KKK KEKE x T INE ACTIVITY CONSISTENCY EVALUATOR KKK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEKE Filename C GENIE2K CAMFILES AP3TOPDN CNF Equation used to calculate plot ln Ratio A B 1n Energy where Ratio Activity WM Activity Notes All uncertainties quoted at 1 00 sigma Nuclide Energy Activity Activity WM Activ Ratio Uncert A B Name keV uCi Unit Uncert Uncert uncert ANNIH 511 0 5 42E 007 4 895 radium 74 1 13E 005 31 849 1 99E 006 702 31 915 172 0 254 Vio 186 242 295 352 609 768 1120 1238 LEI 1764 2204 7 44E 006 28 537 2 049 4 89E 006
185. eckbox if the detector being calibrated was characterized by Canberra Geometry Composer If there is no geometry GIS file for the geometry used to acquire this data select the Geometry Composer to launch the Geometry Composer application described in Chapter 8 Perform Cascade Correction Selecting this checkbox enables the Cascade Correction group box and performs ad ditional processing when the Auto button is selected This produces an efficiency cali bration that is free from cascade summing effects This is necessary to get valid results from the Cascade Correction feature of the NID with Interference Correction algo rithm For information on performing the correction refer to Appendix D Correcting for Cascade Summing Auto If population was done from a certificate file the Auto button will perform a peak lo cate with area analysis for each peak in the current datasource The list box is then populated with the peak areas in the datasource that match those in the certificate file If the Perform Cascade Correction checkbox has been selected additional process ing will take place and the list box will be populated with the corrected results For in formation refer to Appendix D Correcting for Cascade Summing Note that the peak locate and peak area analysis algorithms are determined by the Analysis Sequence Description selected in the Calibration Setup Dialog page 61 If NONE was selected the algorithm
186. ectory Bin G2KVx x CIPCI PIxX WNT_2000 where is your CD ROM drive and x x is the version of Genie being installed Note however that Windows XP uses the same driver as the Window NT and 2000 operating system During the installation of the PCI driver on a Window XP system the operating system will inform the user that the Canberra MCA is not a certified Window device Select Continue to complete the installation of the PCI driver Windows NT does not require any additional operation The PCI driver will be in stalled during installation of Genie 2000 regardless whether the PCI device is present or not Installing the Security Key Install the security key in a parallel port The Models S500 and S502 Genie 2000 soft ware will not operate without this key Creating a Shortcut on Your Desktop After software installation you can use this method to create a shortcut to any Genie 2000 program on Windows 2000 or Windows XP 1 Click on Start Menu 2 Click on Programs 3 Click on Genie 2000 4 Using the secondary usually the right mouse button click on the desired program such as Gamma Acquistion amp Analysis 5 Using the primary left mouse button click on Send To 6 Click on Desktop create shortcut 3 Windows NT uses a different method refer to Windows NT Help for details 262 Starting the Virtual Data Manager The newly created shortcut will appear on your Windows desktop You can move this sh
187. ed efficiency calibration as required MID Definition E The InSpector 2000 Simulator Genie 2000 V2 1 and later includes the InSpector 2000 Simulator software which ap proximates many of the functions of a real InSpector 2000 It is designed to be used as a tutorial for and demonstration of Genie 2000 without the need for an actual MCA a detector and associated front end electronics This appendix describes the InSpector 2000 functions which are available in the Simulator MID Definition The Simulator is definable as a standard MCA therefore an MID file definition must be created for it It is listed as one of the MCAs in the MID Editor s MCA list The MID Editor s screens are the same as those for an InSpector 2000 USB device There are a few points to remember when creating the MID definition for the InSpector 2000 Simu lator e The Simulator s serial number can be any positive decimal number The serial number for a real InSpector 2000 is a hexadecimal number e The MID Editor s input definition screen contains the selection for Detector Type This selection will determine the type of spectrum Germanium Nal or Alpha displayed during acquisition This is explained in more detail in Spec trum Simulation on page 288 e The Simulator s High Voltage Range High Voltage settings screen must be set Unlike the real InSpector 2000 the Simulator does not support negative voltages When the MID definition has
188. ed for storing LACE results specified in the CAM Files chapter of the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual LACE can also be launched as an executable separate from the Genie MCA for the purpose of opening Analyze Menu and viewing results from datasources that have already been processed by the LACE analysis algorithm Refer to Launching the Viewer on page 305 for more details When setting up an analysis sequence containing the LACE analysis the algorithm setup has the option of displaying the results as a plot on a screen window If a report printout is desired a separate report step can be inserted with the option of a LACE template When a datasource is processed by the LACE algorithm with the display results option selected the window shown in Figure 107 appears The graph shows the data points and curve for a single calculated equation The nuclide list to the right of the graph lists all nuclides in the datasource Clicking on a nuclide name will select the nuclide for display Clicking on Next or Previous buttons will select the next or previous nu clide name in the list The Weighted Mean or Key Line curve whichever button is selected will be displayed along with the data points defined by the Energy Ratio pairs where the Ratio is the Weighted Mean or Key Line ratio The error bars are the calculated ratio uncertainties 5 LACE Cernipf cnf E lo x Previous f 2102 BA 140 In R 0 433 0 074
189. elp Delete substance Figure 168 The Tin Component Has Been Added 225 Using the Geometry Composer 226 Saving the Definition There are two or three more data entries to make before the definition is complete see Figure 169 Density of the material in g cm The Name of the New Substance 8 characters maximum e An optional Comment 32 characters maximum Once you ve done this the new material can be added to the Material Library by simply clicking on the Load into Library button gt A message will be displayed to let you know the entry was successful Click on OK to acknowledge it and bronze will be found in its correct alphabetical position in the Material List CAUTION Load the definition into the Library before exiting the editor or the definition will be lost iif Editor of mu library c genie2k isocs data parameters mu04_8Ib txt r Chemical Formula Composer Formula Clear la Element X n 13 atom ratios Figure 169 The Completed Definition m New Substance Composition 90 00 CU 100 00 _ Cu 10 00 SN 100 00 LSn Final Material Composition Component Balance Allowable Addition 0 0000 x _ Clear CU 30 00 5N 10 00 _Cu 90 00 _Sn 10 00 Density g cm3 8 8 Name of the new substance bronze Exit Editor Correcting Data Entry Errors In the Material Editor s window yov ll notice two Clear buttons one
190. en as read only and 0 means Off open as read write Display This section contains the available Acquisition and Analysis datasource display options Each key name corresponds to a display option that affects how the datasource data is viewed All the key values except for CompareDS are On Off values 1 for On and 0 for Off ScaleIsAuto 1 On 0 Off Set ScalelsAuto 1 to change the display s vertical full scale VFS automatically Set ScaleIsAuto 0 to require that the VFS be set manually page 110 ScaleisLinear 1 On 0 Off Set ScaleIsLinear 1 to define the display s scale as Linear Set ScaleIsLinear 0 to define the display s scale as Log page 110 Expand 1 On 0 Off Set Expand 1 to change the display mode to expanded Set Expand 0 to restore the display mode to normal page 108 Compare 1 On 0 Off Set Compare 1 to turn the compare function On Set Compare 0 to turn the compare function Off page 110 CompareDS datasource file name or Detector name The CompareDS key value should contain the name of the datasource to be used to compare with the other loaded datasources The name can be either a detector name or a fully qualified CAM file name i e Com pareDS C GENIE2K CAMFILES Naidemo cnf Genie 2000 Font Customization It s possible to customize fonts used in selected portions of Genie 2000 by creating an file named G2KFONTS INI in the GENIE2K CTLFILES directory e A section is required in the INI file
191. en CAM File datasources If you want to copy the energy calibra tion information as well select the Include Energy Calibration check box Load x Load from nbsstd cnt B T Include Energy Calibration Cancel Help Figure 41 Load From a Datasource Calibrate Menu The Calibrate menu provides several options for calibrating the energy and efficiency of the datasource graphically displaying the calibration setting preferences for the calibration and loading and storing calibration files 59 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Setup Setup displays a dialog screen Figure 42 which allows you to select preferences and calibration settings to be used throughout the calibration and analysis processes Pp Calibration Setup Preferences Calibration Settings m Energy Units m Tolerance Energy Cal 1 500e 000 keV Eff_Match 1 000e 000 keV m Tail Curves Conversion C None Factor Low m Tolerance Units Continuum Energy Step C Linear C None C FWHM Toy Channels Channels C FWHM Analysis Sequence Description Cancel Help Figure 42 Calibration Setup Preferences Energy Units Though energies are stored in keV you can change how energy units are shown in the display s dialog boxes and in reports eV keV MeV or Other The proper Conversion Factor for other units is defined as the number of keV units equal to 1 other unit For ex
192. en o bee oe ee oe ee 198 Saving the Certificate File s sa ee ew i 198 Printing the Certificate Pile es acted Go Be Ee GR we ee ee ee Se ee or AS 198 Creating a New Certificate File 2 ee ee 198 Viewing the Original Certificate ateu ee 198 Exiting the Editt m cne aces Aa de a eA we ee a a R G 198 6 Using the Analysis Sequence Editor 199 Launching the Editor se eetas crecer Re Oe EH E ED OEE eS 199 Editing a Sequence Files sa cs Bow RG A a ae Wo ed 200 Insert Step o gee beatae hewn ele Dae a AGE ee we LE Dae es 201 Delete Steps ceed aw dee heise d nie heed ede kaw eed aw ede dees 201 Select ALSO 5 2 ice bree e BB os Ge ah eS ees 201 setup Alsonthim core eae do rra ee a be ee AAA 202 Sequence Preferences s s rs was tee eee a OW A Ae a e ES E a 202 Edit Sample Information sc sosca s e 0 20 e 202 Prompt to Select Datasource o sor e aree ee 202 Options Men s s gta de a ee ae wy a Be ke dew da ne lh 205 Saving a New Sequence File o cate aeaa eama a e a e aaa ee 205 7 Using Cascade Correction 206 PrerequisSiteS 2 ci ram e SHER YRS RE Eww DES ew oes 206 Performing the Analysis 06 4 40 wo ete a Sw ew ee a 207 8 Using the Geometry Composer 208 Starting the Composer iss 6 6b be Ee ee e ee ee 208 Creating a Geometry Definition e 209 Selecting the Geometry Template s sass sece maree mads m e 209 Editing the Detector and Sample Dim
193. ensions ooa aaa a 210 Save Data As User Version es ociosa awe ai epe aee ee 215 Verifying the Geometry Definition lt e se sses ww saw sics wm enpak Eae a 217 Editing a Geometry Definition secca cs tases cud rao tar patku Saai 218 Editing the Sample Environment 218 Editing the Efficiency Parameters mos ae co ee 219 Editing the Energy List e s sotos caia a a ee we a we 219 Changing the Integration Settings e sasa eoa e e 2000000000000 220 Checking the Geometry s Validity 2 2 0 o e 221 Saving the Definitions cu inea egg aoa ae dee ee Ge WE Re Saws Gea ap es 221 Generating an Efficiency Curve ee 222 The Materials Library Editor 2 2 ee 222 The Nature of a Library ENY s es e ype Eh ew eh a a a a 223 Defining New Materials 2 1 224 Correcting Data Entry Errors woo aia ee ea eee ee ee a we ee i 226 Basing a New Material on an Existing Definition 00 227 Combining Existing Materials to Make a New One 000 228 Deleting a Material Library Entry c scs a doeane a a aa i a a ee 228 View Ments sea apama a aea aa aa ue ae ba Sa e OS anaa ale di a ge 229 Toolbar 26s ee ee SS e HR ee RR Re OEE DESEO Ee EE DERG OE 229 Status Bars seos gos o GH bee Oe ee Oe we ae gow BSS ee ae Be 229 Split pe ere ieee ive a a ed Ra atag eae wb eeaedaedeea es 229 Option Menu s s gel aged ode ek el a we ww e oo we wg he 230 CONTISUTAION macia era ARA oO So 230 Defau
194. ent and B services performed by us in connection with such equipment such as site supervision and installation services relating to the equipment shall be free from defects for a period of one 1 year from the date of performance of such services If defects in materials or workmanship are discovered within the applicable warranty period as set forth above we shall at our option and cost A in the case of defective software or equipment either repair or replace the software or equipment or B in the case of defective services reperform such services LIMITATIONS EXCEPT AS SET FORTH HEREIN NO OTHER WARRANTIES OR REMEDIES WHETHER STATUTORY WRITTEN ORAL EXPRESSED IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE SHALL APPLY IN NO EVENT SHALL CANBERRA HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY SPECIAL EXEMPLARY PUNITIVE INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSSES OR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER WHETHER AS A RESULT OF BREACH OF CONTRACT TORT LIABILITY INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT DURING THE APPLICABLE WARRANTY PERIOD AT CANBERRA S COST OR IN THE CASE OF DEFECTIVE SERVICES REPERFORMANCE AT CANBERRA S COST IS YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS WARRANTY EXCLUSIONS Our warranty does not cover damage to equipment which has been altered or modified without our written permission or damage which has
195. ent background in the counting area is not negligible it is recom mended that a background spectrum be acquired and used while performing the P T calibration Calibration Curve Fitting The cascade summing correction factors obtained using Genie 2000 software could be in serious error if you re not careful in fitting the P T calibration curve The error due to extrapolating the curve beyond the last empirical P T data point could be signifi cant To avoid this it is highly recommended that a dual curve fit with a crossover en ergy of 122 keV Co be used It is further recommended that the default order of 2 be used for the high energy polynomial This would provide a linear and a predictable extrapolation in the log log scale 73 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Keeping the above in mind you can correctly use the Peak to Total Calibration proce dure described in the following sections Setting up a Peak to Total Calibration Selecting the Peak to Total command opens the dialog box shown in Figure 54 P T Calibration m Calibrating Files File Extension ent Directory not selected P T Files Background File none m PTEG Parameters P T data in the opened datasource Extrapol Chan 20 ae umber of triplets Avg Window 4 j Iterations 2 Add new data to existing ones Cancel Help Figure 54 The Peak to Total Dialog Selecting the Calibration Spectra The first step is to select the
196. equence selected from the Calibration Setup dialog If NONE was selected the algorithms will default to the ones last chosen from the Analyze Menu b The Standard Efficiency Correction algorithm will be executed and a report generated in the GAA s report window It is not necessary to preset parameters for this step c Nuclide Identification will take place using the NID with Interference Correction algorithm The NID parameters used should be set up from the Analysis Nuclide Identification NID w Interf Corr menu before performing this process A report will be generated in the GAA s report window d The energy lines in the certificate file will be compared to the results of the NID process When a match is found the efficiency will be divided by the Coincidence Correction factor calculated during the NID process The certificate s error will be adjusted as described in step 5 An asterisk will be displayed to the right of any line that has been adjusted Click on the Show button to display the calculated calibration curve Select the appropriate polynomial fit to the efficiency data points Click on the OK button when you are done In the Efficiency Calibration window click on the OK button to accept the calibration The empirical efficiency calibration has been corrected for the effect of cascade summing and should now closely represent the true efficiency Use the Calibrate Store function to save your correct
197. er gt lt protocol gt aliases comment gt echo 7 tcp echo Thadp discard 9 tcp sink null discard 9 udp sink null systat 11 tcp systat 11 tcp users daytime 13 tcp daytime 13 udp netstat 15 tcp kpop 1109 tcp Pop with Kerberos phone 1167 udp ingreslock 1524 tcp maze 1666 udp nfs 2049 udp sun nfs Check to see if any one of the default Genie 2000 port numbers are defined If so then edits must be made to this file as follows Datasrce nnnn tcp VDM datasource connection Advise nnnn tcp VDM advise connection Configur nnnn tcp VDM configuration connec tion where nnnn is an undefined port number If a Dialup Adapter is used for binding the TCP IP protocol stack it is possible that your Windows system is set up to Connect to the Internet as needed This feature 252 Non Network VDM Configuration will instruct the system to prompt you for an Internet connection whenever a Genie 2000 client application connects to the VDM To disable this behavior bring up the Internet settings applet from within the Control Panel Use the Connections notebook tab as shown in Figure 185 and uncheck the checkbox labeled Connect to the Internet as needed click on OK to save this set tings change Internet Properties 21 x General Connection Navigation Programs Security Advanced r Dialing J Disconnect if idle for fi 3 minutes J Perform system security check before dialing
198. er mode e Preamp Type selects the Preamplifier type as either TRP or RC e Flat Top sets the flat top portion of the digital filter time response MCS Settings If you chose either MCS or Both in the Devices MCA menu page 27 you ll select the MCS Disc Mode in Figure 20 Note This window s initial focus is on the Cancel button pressing the keyboard s ENTER key after making changes in this dialog box will cancel the changes Be sure to click on OK to accept the changes e Disc Mode establishes the MCS mode to be used MCS for input DSA 2000 Figure 20 Choosing the MCS Disc Mode 33 MCA Input Definition Input Settings The Input command is used to change the name of the Input and set up the structure of its memory via the Dialog Box shown in Figure 21 These commands are not avail able in the Acquisition and Analysis application Define Input Input name Dsa 2000 Input Size Channels DetectorType Ge X 16384 M Out of Service El ea J Memory groups 1 256 32768 OK Apply to All i Help Figure 21 The Define Input Dialog Note This window s initial focus is on the Cancel button pressing the keyboard s ENTER key after making changes in this dialog box will cancel the changes Be sure to click on the OK button to accept the changes e Input Name lets you change the default detector name Detector Type selects the type of detector to be used with this MCA Input Size changes the n
199. er unit volume Either mode of describing the activity content of the standard source is correct Note however that if the Sample Quantity is entered as the real quantity 5 mL an analy sis of both of these examples will report the Co activity to be 0 2 uCi mL If an anal ysis of the calibration spectrum is to yield an activity report of 1u Ci each the sample quantity must be entered as 1 each Assay Date The assay date and time which are used for an Efficiency Calibration decay correc tion can be found on the data sheet that came with the source Original Certificate This field lets you link a scanned copy BMP or JPG of the original calibration cer tificate to the current CTF file To view this bitmap copy of the original certificate select the File View Original Certificate menu option The Line Data At the bottom of the screen is a List Box that is used to scroll through the contents of the Certificate File Above the List Box are the edit fields for the currently selected file entry the one shown in reverse type 1 The Sample Quantity is entered by way of the Edit Sample info dialog in the Acquisition and Analysis application 196 Editing a Certificate File Selecting an Entry to Edit Each entry describes a single line in the calibration source spectrum When you click on the line you want to edit the edit fields will be loaded with the data from the selected en try Editing the Line Data The fie
200. er will be incremented by one When the counter reaches 108 it will reset to 1 Note This preference must be enabled for any sequence that includes a Save Datasource step and that will be executed in a command line environment using ANALYZE EXE or REXX directly Efficiency Calibration Check the Import calibration at execution box to indicate that an efficiency calibra tion should be imported at execution If the box is not checked the calibration in the datasource being analyzed will be used Notes No calibration selection prompt will be issued if the analysis sequence is ex ecuted in a command line environment using ANALYZE EXE directly or via REXX 203 Using the Analysis Sequence Editor 204 When an efficiency calibration that includes the specification of a GIS file is imported during an analysis sequence this specification will be overrid den if a GIS file is also specified in either the Sequence Preferences settings or the NID with Interference Correction algorithm settings Prompt If Prompt is selected you will be asked to specify the calibration when the analysis sequence starts to run Specify Now If Specify now is selected you ll choose the calibration file now instead of at execu tion time The drop down list shows the efficiency geometry identifier of each CAL calibration file found in the CALFILES directory If any calibration file does not have an efficiency geometry identifier spe
201. erful for the knowledgeable user the experienced spectroscopist reviewing difficult spectra testing system performance on unique samples optimizing analysis routines etc Genie 2000 Support Services However many lab operations consist mostly of routine repetitive operations using less skilled operators users who are not trained as scientists or radiochemists but technicians who are trained to count samples by specific procedures These users do not need immediate access to everything in fact their access to sensitive setup func tions needs to be controlled For this group of users the batch procedure environment provides a step by step guide through the process of counting samples as well as other operations Additionally the batch procedure environment features a security system that prevents access to various functions by operators not qualified to operate them Both the interactive and batch user interface environments operate on a common set of compute modules so consistency of operation and results is assured irrespective of the environment used They can and most typically do exist side by side in a given system with the batch environment used for routine operations and the interactive used for the non routine The power of the batch environment is exploited by a range of special dedicated appli cations software products for specific applications If you are involved in applications such as routine alpha and
202. ers Ref Pk OK Cancel Show Help Auto Use results 06 Cancel show Hep tuto ESA Figure 50 The Energy Calibration Full Dialog Peak Edits In the Peak Edits box you ll see the Cursor button used with the Cursor Method the Markers button used with the Marker Method and the Accept button used with both methods to add the entry in the Energy text box to the list box The Delete button de letes the highlighted entry from the list box You ll also see the Ref Pk button which selects deselects the currently highlighted entry in the list box as the reference peak 69 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Only one peak from a pulser for instance may be assigned as a reference peak The reference peak will not be used during the calculation of the calibration coefficients Cursor Method To use the Cursor Method there must be a spectrum in the Spectral Display area and its cursor must be on the peak that is being used for calibration Select the Cursor button to use the spectrum s cursor channel position to determine an approximate FWHM in order to establish a computed as opposed to displayed ROI and attempt to fit the peak The computed peak centroid computed FWHM and tail values will be calculated and displayed in the list box Now enter an energy value in the Energy text box and choose Accept to add the data to the highlighted list box entry Note that because the Cursor Method uses a relatively unsophis
203. ers controlling efficiency curve generation Energy list Integration Convergence a Integration MDRPN IV Use MDRPN defined for detector Value 2 n n a Figure 163 The Integration Settings Tab Checking the Geometry s Validity Once you have completed making all necessary changes to your definition you should again have it tested to insure that is valid for later use by the calibration and analysis procedures To do that select Efficiency Curve Check Geometry Validity to perform a more extensive validation of the geometry definition than the automatic validity check made when you exit the geometry definition window Saving the Definition Once you are satisfied that all of the parameters are correct you must do a File Save As to save the definition before going on to perform a LabSOCS ISOCS efficiency calibration Note This will generate two files a GEO file and a GIS file Each contains the same information but in two different formats for different sections of the software To avoid confusion they should always be treated deleted re named etc as a two part set 221 Using the Geometry Composer Generating an Efficiency Curve This function is available only if LabSOCS ISOCS is installed First make sure that you have already saved your newly created or modified Geometry Definition Then select Efficiency Curve Generate Efficiency Data Points to calcu late the efficien
204. f Windows NT 2000 XP Windows NT 2000 XP supports Plug n Play which will automatically detect hardware during installation and attempt to install the proper support Canberra s PC board acquisition devices do not support 2 This parallel port can still be used for most peripherals but not for control of the Model 8224 Multiplexer 240 Installing Genie Software Plug n Play and may cause detection problems if plugged in during Windows installation Installing Genie Software This section describes installing the Genie 2000 Basic Spectroscopy and optional soft ware from the distribution CD Please note that this installation requires 50 to 90 MB of free space on your hard disk depending on options selected Note also that Admin istrator privilege is required under Windows NT 2000 XP to perform the installation since edits to the registry are made Notes Canberra recommends that Genie 2000 software be operated using the local system administrator account If however you opt to run Genie 2000 from a non privileged account you must manually change the permission and secu rity setting in the Genie2K directory tree and their files Not doing so will produce unreliable results It is also recommended that the Windows XP Switch Users function be disabled to prevent simultaneous access to common Genie 2000 files The System Administrators Control Panel can be used to disable this feature Re fer to the Windows XP online help for ad
205. f the spectrum as in a real device If LLD Mode is set to Manual the current LLD setting is used If LLD Mode is Auto the LLD value from the template file CAM parameter CAM_F_LLD is used The purpose for this behavior of LLD Auto Mode is simply to give the user different feed back based on different adjust control settings Voltage The voltage status On Off and voltage level are maintained and used by the Simula tor For Nal detectors the energy input from the detector varies exponentially with the voltage level setting Accordingly the Simulator reads the baseline voltage level from the template file CAM parameter CAM_F_VOLTAGEB and shifts the spectrum up down with respect to the difference between the current via adjust control setting and baseline voltage levels The Ge spectrum does not respond to the voltage level as the Nal spectrum does The only requirements for germanium are that the voltage level 21300 V and that the HVPS be On Finally when voltage is turned on or off or when voltage level is adjusted the Simula tor will wait for a period of time to simulate the voltage ramping process Gamma Analysis will display the Wait message in the adjust control window As with an ac tual device the wait time is proportional to the change in voltage Digital Stabilizer The Digital Stabilizer adjusts the spectrum up or down in order to maintain the speci fied Gain Ratio at the Centroid Every five seconds ac
206. from the file open dialog box Add to Existing Results and Tolerance If the Add to existing results box is checked peaks outside the specified Tolerance either fixed Energy or variable FWHM of a peak in the datasource s peak results ta ble will be added to the table Peaks within the Tolerance of an existing peak will not be added If the Add to existing results box is not checked the current peak results table will be replaced by this search Generate Report If the Generate Report box is checked a predefined report will be generated when this phase is executed and will be displayed in the application s report window The report is defined in the AEF file as the Report Template Name and Section Name asso ciated with this phase Auto Generate ROIs If this option is selected then the peak locate engine will automatically generate ROIs based on the FWHM calibration The user can also specify a multiplier to be applied to the ROI width In addition an option for checking for adjacent peaks can be enabled this will flag any peak ROI that may be affected by an adjacent peak Analyze Menu VMS Standard Peak Search The VMS Standard Peak Search Figure 94 is taken from the Genie VMS application as an optional Peak Locate Analysis engine It locates all peaks in the search region whose significance is above the Peak Search Sensitivity threshold A second differ ence method locates the peaks above the sensitivity
207. g a sequence file 200 Editor materials library 222 Efficiency data points generating 222 Efficiency calibration 89 Efficiency calibration Crossover point 0 90 Data sets totalused 90 generic characterizations not suitable 210 Efficiency calibration auto function 91 Efficiency correction Dual method 141 Empirical method 142 Linear method 142 Ph ias e rra e 141 Effluent DAC UDS e Cea a e a we a a 185 Vale vih ir a Sa 185 Energy Calibrate cursor method 70 Calibrate marker method 70 Coefficients calibration 63 Drop peak function 72 Energy only calibration 61 Full calibration 63 69 Order of the polynomial 73 Recalculate oscuros es 71 Recalibration auto function 70 72 Tolerance units 60 Units selection 0 60 Energy lines certificate extracting 193 Energy lines extracting 182 Energy list editi g daras ke 219 Energy units Certificate file 194 Nuclide library 183 Preferences cse ic a Re 116 Energy units changing 205 Environment variables Analysis engine files 268 Genie 2000 ooo 264 Report template files 268 Error multiplier in analysis reporting phase 156 Execu
208. gy Calibration Full screen which allows you to examine and if necessary edit the data in any of the lines Please refer to En ergy Calibration Full on page 69 for an illustration and explanation of this screen Load Calibration File Lookin Calfiles y Ex i ja naidemo cal sa nbsstd cal ss test cal Fiename e Files of type Calibration Files CAL y Cancel Help Info I Append to Existing Calibration Figure 48 Calibrate by Calibration File By Calibration File Choosing to calibrate By Calibration File displays a dialog box Figure 48 which lets you select a Calibration File defining the list of energy channel pairs to be used for calibration The Info button displays descriptive information for the selected file Append to Existing Calibration When adding energy points to the current datasource from a file such as in construct ing a composite energy file there may be common energy points in the two files If the Append to Existing Calibration checkbox is selected the system will ask if you want to append to the existing calibration If you answer yes it will tell you each time it finds a duplicate entry Editing the List When you select OK you ll see the Energy Calibration Full screen which allows you to examine and if necessary edit the data in any of the lines Please refer to En ergy Calibration Full on page 69 for an illustration and exp
209. he Find Mass Number command uses the dialog box in Figure 140 to locate a specific mass number in the library It searches for the value you enter in the Mass Number text box 189 Using the Nuclide Library Editor Once you ve entered the mass number click on the First button The library will be searched until either the mass number is matched or the end is reached If the end is reached a message will tell that there was no match When a matching entry is found the search will stop and the nuclide will be selected for editing To search for the next entry that matches the search criterion click on the Next button If you want to leave the last entry you found selected for editing click on OK Click on Cancel to restore the name selected before you brought up Find Wa Find Mass Number Mass WK Cancel Figure 140 The Find Mass Number Dialog The File Menu The file menu lets you Start a New library Open Save or Save as a file print the file as a Report or Exit the editor Creating a New Library The File menu s New command erases the current Library from the editing window allowing you to enter a new Library Saving the Library The File Menu offers the Save command for saving the file under the same name and the Save as command for saving the file under a different name 190 The Master Libraries Printing the Library To create both a text file and a printout of the current Librar
210. he MCA entry in the Definition Table that you want to set up Devices The Devices menu shown in Figure 12 sets the parameters for the MCA and associ ated devices Some Devices are disabled grayed out because they aren t used with your MCA 26 Defining an MCA Devices MCA Sample Changer ADC MXR Stabilizer Amplifier High Voltage Power Mgmt Vacuum DSP Gain DSP Filter Figure 12 The Devices Menu MCA Selecting the MCA command in the Devices menu pops up the Dialog Box shown in Figure 13 which lets you set the Ethernet address for the DSA 2000 and select the type of input MCA for input DETO1 MCA Full Memory ok C 2k C 4k C 8k C 16k C 64k DSA 2000 E PHA C MCS C BOTH Station Address Hex foooo Cancel Help Figure 13 The MCA Device Setup Dialog 27 MCA Input Definition e MCA Full Memory selects the DSA 2000 s full memory size e Station Address specifies the network address for communicating with the module e DSA 2000 selects the DSA 2000 s input type Sample Changer The Sample Changer screen in Figure 14 lets you disable the sample changer interface None or enable the Internal Changer interface Sample Changer for input DETO1 Device Driver Protocol Driver None Control Manual Programmable Figure 14 The Sample Changer Controls Stabilizer High Voltage DSP Gain and DSP Filter If an
211. he display window s start and end channels and their energies and the display VFS The current ROI s width net cps and total cps are also shown If Expand is on the display window data is for the expanded window If Compare is on and the compare spectrum is currently selected the data is for the compare spec trum Input Info The Input Info status page includes data related to the configuration of the currently open input number of channels acquisition mode and the type of MCA Amp ADC and HVPS User Info The User Info status page includes six extra CAM parameters which can be used for special purposes CAM_T_DISSTR1 through CAM_T_DISSTR If none of these CAM parameters have been defined this screen will be blank Nuclide Info The Nuclide Info status page includes estimated nuclide information for the current cursor channel Nuclide Energy Half life and Percent Yield If the cursor is within an ROI then the FWHM Area and estimated Activity is also displayed Display Menu Operations If Ask to Save on Clear is enabled you Il be asked to save changes when clearing a de tector s spectrum If this option is disabled then the clear will be done unconditionally Interactive NID The Interactive NID Setup dialog Figure 86 lets you choose the nuclide library to be used for the Nuclide Identification Source page 115 as well as setting the tolerance for searching that library and the activity units to be u
212. he energy calibration curve as a graph Please refer to Energy Show on page 72 for a complete discussion and an illustration of this function Energy Show Selecting the Energy Show menu item or the Show button on some screens will dis play the calculated energy calibration curve as a graph as seen in Figure 53 You can select the Energy button to show the energy curve or you can select the Shape button to show the FWHM and Low Tail curves ul Energy Calibration Curves m Measured Calculated Drder of the polynomial 1 Ej B Peak E Drop EK 512 1024 1536 2048 2560 3072 3584 4096 Channel Datasource D GENIE2K CAMFILE S nbsstd cnf Energy 1 020e 001 key 4 567e 001 Ch FWHM 9 211e 001 keY 3 867e 002 E 1 2 Lo Tail 8 235e 001 ke 3 900e 00 FE Cancel Help Print Figure 53 A Typical Energy Show Display The Show Energy Calibration Curves display contains a Peak text box so that you can eliminate outlying peaks one at a time Enter the number of the peak to be dropped then select Drop Pk The peak will be deleted from the list and both the curve and the equation will be regenerated You may repeat Drop Peak until satisfactory results are obtained but you can t reduce the number of data points to less than two 72 Calibrate Menu Note that the Order of the polynomial is limited by the number of data points pres ent For instance at least two points are required for a first order cur
213. he pole zero 1 The Model LB1502 Schottky Clamp Box is available from Canberra to prevent this problem The Schottky clamp is built into the Model 1510 Intergrated Signal Processor and Models 2025 and 2026 Spectroscopy Amplifiers 278 Manual Pole Zero control so that the trailing edge of the unipolar pulse returns to the baseline with no overshoots or undershoots as shown in Figures 195 196 and 197 Figure 195 Correctly Adjusted Pole Zero Some amplifier shapings may exhibit small undershoots These arise primarily from amplifier shaping component tolerances and secondary time constants associated with the detector preamp system If an undershoot is present and is less than 20 mV its im pact on performance is insignificant However these small shaping undershoots should not be confused with pole zero misadjustment undershoots which exhibit a much longer time constant and have a larger performance impact 279 Technical Information Figure 196 Undercompensated Pole Zero Figure 197 Overcompensated Pole Zero 280 Adjusting the TRP Reset Pulse Adjusting the TRP Reset Pulse When a Transistor Reset Preamp TRP is used its Reset output is connected to the amplifier s Inhibit input and the pole zero is fixed at O For proper operation you ll have to make an adjustment on the TRP preamp so that the amplifier and ADC are gated off during the preamp s reset time The adjustment is
214. he software you can read the Release Notes install Acrobat Reader and review the Genie 2000 Tutorials Manual the Genie 2000 Operations Manual and the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual Using This CD r Install Genie 2000 Install Acrobat Reader E Manual Genie 2000 Operations Manual Customization Tools Manual View Release Notes Explore this CD Visit our Web Site Copyright 2004 Canberra Industries Inc This program is protected by US and International copyright laws Contact Us Basic Spectroscopy v3 0 Installation EXIT Figure 178 The Genie 2000 Installation Screen Installing Genie 2000 Note Windows Scripting Host one of the components being installed with Genie may ask you to reboot when its installation is complete If this happens se lect No You should allow the Genie 2000 installation to finish before you reboot 1 To install the software select the Install Genie 2000 button and follow the instructions presented on the screen 2 You will be asked if you want to install Genie 2000 documentation directly on your hard drive Installing the documents requires about 21 MB of disk space 242 Installing Genie Software 3 Next setup will ask if you would like to Install Acrobat Reader You can also install the Reader by clicking its button on the setup screen 4 Next you will be asked to choose between Standard Installation and Custom Installation as described in the following two section
215. her a library peak falls within the Search Region Gamma M Library Peak Locate Setup Lx m Search Region Start Channel fi Stop Channel 4036 Nuclide Library C GENIE2K CAMFILES STDLIB NLB Select Y Gain Shift Correction M Include Unknown Search Energy Tolerance 1 50 FWHM I Generate Report Cancel More Help Figure 91 The Gamma M Library Locate Setup Nuclide Library The name of the library in the current datasource will be shown in the Nuclide Library text box To select another library click on Select then choose a library file from the file open dialog box Include Unknown Search Peaks found by the Unknown Search algorithm that are farther away from existing li brary locations than the Energy Tolerance are treated as separate peaks Peaks that are closer to the existing library locations than the Energy Tolerance are assumed to be the library peaks already assigned The Library Locate will be followed by the Unknown Locate which is governed by the Search Region The Energy Tolerance value which is accessible only if the Include Unknown Search box is checked specifies the Energy Tolerance as a full width at half maximum FWHM multiplier This determines whether a peak found during the Unknown Lo cate is one of the peaks already assigned during the Library Locate Gain Shift Correction Gain Shift Correction is a technique for moving the peaks so that their centroids are correctly p
216. hms and Current Steps lists you Il see some steps with an asterisk before their names such as Reporting Standard These steps have parameters that con trol how the sequence s output will be presented Note An Analysis Sequence file can also be created or edited with the standalone Analysis Sequence Editor which is described in detail in Chapter 6 Using the Analysis Sequence Editor Unique Parameters Note that the steps listed in the following table have parameters that can be defined uniquely each time they occur in a sequence Step Parameters Peak Locate and Peak Area Start channel and Stop channel Save Datasource File name Save as type and Description Report All parameters other than Activity Units and Multiplier Edit Menu Common Parameters All other sequence step parameters are common they cannot be specified independ ently If there are multiple instances of one of these steps in a sequence all instances of that step will have the same parameters Insert Step To add a step to the sequence highlight a step in the Step Selection list box then click on the Insert Step button The step will be added to the Current Steps list Delete Step To remove a step from the sequence highlight the step in the Current Steps list that you want to remove then click on the Delete Step button Select Algorithm To choose an algorithm for the current step
217. hould ensure that these other terms are reasonably accu rate to obtain the most stable reliable results Gain Evaluator C GENIE2K CAMFILES Nbsstd cnf True Energies Nuclide m Source of True Energies Current NID Analysis Results E E 5 Select All C Certificate File y 32 49 Clear 1460 81 K 40 on Nuclide Library y Inputis Sufficient required energies 13 supplied energies 27 Outputis Reliable required matches 7 outputmatches 20 Tolerance Factor 0 17 Average ShifvFVWHM Fraction 0 01 Percent Gain Shift 0 029 Datasource Energy Calibration E 1 02E 001 4 567E 001 Ch 0 000E 000 Ch 2 Calculated Energy Calibration E 1 02E 001 4 567E 001 Ch 0 000E 000 Ch 2 I y Cancel Help Print Report Fix File Gain Save New CAL Fie Figure 74 Gain Evaluator Dialog Interactive vs ASF Evaluation The Gain Evaluator can be run interactively or as a part of an analysis sequence In the interactive mode you can select any or all of the energies in the True Energies list box When used as a step in an Analysis Sequence File energies can t be selected the routine will use all of the energies in the specified Source of True Energies Source of True Energies Select the source of energies to be used in performing the Gain Evaluation e The Current NID Analysis Results e A Certificate File e A Nuclide Library File Ideally the source of true energies should list energies that correspond
218. ics etc Training can be conducted either at our training center in Meriden Connecticut USA or at your site anywhere in the world Introduction Maintenance Contracts Software maintenance contracts are available for Genie 2000 for an annual fee The contract customer enjoys unlimited telephone and Internet support newsletters con taining useful information on using the software Software Services Bulletins notifying them of any software problems and most importantly free copies of all software updates released during the contract period Typically releases occur twice per year Thus the user who keeps up a service contract is always assured of running the very latest developments in spectroscopy software Updates Updates are also available for users who do not choose to take a maintenance contract Although most find the contract to be more cost effective the availability of updates still assures that the Genie 2000 customer can use the latest technology About this Manual If you bought a complete system from Canberra you ll find the early chapters are de signed to get you up and running quickly If you re installing the software and hard ware yourself you ll first want to refer to Appendices A and B for installation information Operations Volume 1 Operations contains information for day to day operation of the Genie 2000 system Chapter 1 Introduction this chapter lists the software available for the Ge
219. id Check the Grid box to add X and Y grid lines to the plot The grid is printed as shown with dotted lines Y Log Scale Check the Y Log Scale box to change the Y axis scale from linear to log The maxi mum number of counts is determined automatically X Energy Scale Check the X Energy Scale box to change the X axis scale from channels to energy Range The entire spectrum will be plotted if the Full Spectrum box is checked If the box is not checked a range of channels can be plotted If an illegal value is entered into ei ther of the channel boxes the word Error will replace the illegal value in the box Print When all parameters have been chosen click Print to bring up the printer selection di alog Plot to Clipboard The Plot to Clipboard command copies the current spectral display including expand window cursors markers to the Windows clipboard as a bitmap This image may then be pasted into other applications such as word processors or paint programs This command can also be executed with CTRL C Print Report Window Selecting Print Report Window will print the contents of the Report Window page 173 to the Windows default printer Export Report to PDF The Export Report to PDF command creates a PDF file of the contents of the Report Window page 173 The standard Save As dialog lets you choose the folder to store the file in Open Workspace The Workspace function lets you save and restore the cur
220. ides and gamma lines that are affected by cascade summing as well as those that are free from the effect and e Decay parameters such as branching ratio internal conversion correction factors and absolute yield percentages for nuclides and gamma lines that are affected by cascade summing e The data in this library were obtained from the NuDat online database at the National Nuclear Data Center http www nndc bnl gov nndc nudat in December 2000 Although this library is not user editable it is quite comprehensive and will be updated periodically by Canberra Industries Table 2 The Cascade Correction Data Library 24Na 38C 42K Ca 46Sc 56Mn 59Fe 60Co 65Ni 72Ga 7Ge 76As Se 82Br asy Y m 27 99Mo Ruy 103Ry 105Ry 109Pq 111pq m 110Ag m MAG Cd m 115Cd 115Cd m 11414 m 1161n m 11714 117Sn m 1258 p 1223 1249p 125S 127Te 134Cg 131Ba 133Ba 139Ba 1401 La 143Ce 147Nd 149Nd 151Pm 1538m 152Ey 152Ey m 154Ey 153Gq 159Gqd 160Th 165Dy 166H o 171Er 169Y 175Y 177VYb 177L y 175Hf 180Hf m 181Hf 18272 187W 188Re 1850s 1939 192 1941 197pt m 198 Au 199 Au 233Pa 239Np 207 Using the Geometry Composer 8 Using the Geometry Composer The information developed by the Geometry Composer is used by Canberra s patented Cascade Summing Correction algorithms and the LabSOCS ISOCS software The Composer helps you define sample geometries for HPGe gamm
221. ight it to transfer its data into the Peak Edits text entry fields Make any needed edits then click on the Accept button to store the revisions Deleting an Entry Select an entry then click on the Delete button Note There is no confirmation dialog the peak and its data will be removed from the list and cannot be recovered Adding a New Entry To add a new entry to the list 1 Click on New Record to clear the Peak Edit fields 2 Enter the new entry s values into the appropriate fields 3 Click on Accept to insert the new entry into the list Establishing a Crossover Energy For fitting the peak to total calibration curve it is recommended that a dual polyno mial curve fit be used To do this a crossover energy must be specified The recom mended crossover energy is 122 keV Click the Cross over button to select the currently highlighted entry in the list box as the crossover energy point Only one crossover point may be assigned The selection of a crossover energy point indicates that two curves will be generated for the dual polynomial curve If no crossover energy point is selected a single curve will be gen erated The result of doing this can be seen in Figure 57 Note that at least two data points must exist on each side of the crossover energy point for dual curves to be generated Clicking either Show or OK starts the correction with the software performing the itera tions to correct the peak to total ratios f
222. imum size but can easily be dragged to a larger size 176 Abundance 99 9800 99 9900 85 5100 10 6000 100 0000 100 0000 Figure 126 The Nuclide Library Editor Editing a Nuclide Library Editing a Nuclide Library Genie 2000 includes a Standard Nuclide Library a Nal Detector example Library a Demo Nuclide Library and four Master Libraries The Demo Nuclide Library DEMOLIB NLB contains 17 nuclides and 60 lines The No MDA flag page 180 is not set for any of the nuclides in the Demo Nuclide Library Table 1 lists the library The Standard Nuclide Library STDLIB NLB contains 109 nuclides and 511 lines the No MDA flag is set for all nuclides except those listed in the Demo Nuclide Library Table 1 The Demo Nuclide Library K 40 Co 57 Co 60 Se 75 Sr 85 Y 88 Cd 109 Sn 113 Cs 134 Cs 137 Cs 138 Ce 139 Hg 203 Kr 85 Sc 46 Sc 46 Pb 214 The four Master Libraries are included to help you build tailored libraries for specific situations For more information on these libraries their origin and their use refer to The Master Libraries on page 191 We ll edit the Demo Nuclide Library to see how to use the Nuclide Library Editor Opening a Nuclide Library The Open command in the File menu is used to select a file for editing From the stan dard File Open dialog box open the file DEMOLIB NLB This will result in a screen like the one in Figure 12
223. indings dialog The name of the protocol can be clicked on which brings up a list of adapters it is bound to Highlight the adapter s which do not require the Canberra 802 3 protocol driver and click on Disable Click on Close to save these new bindings Exit the Network settings dialog by clicking on OK follow the prompts for your Windows distribution and reboot your system Windows 2000 XP Setup The following steps should be followed to ensure proper setup of the AIM protocol stack under Windows 2000 XP Launch the Network and Dial up Connections applet for Windows 2000 or the Network Connections applet for Windows XP via the Control Panel Right click on the Local Area Connection icon and click Properties Click the Install pushbutton on the Local Area Connection Properties window Highlight Protocol and then click the Add pushbutton Installing AIM Device Drivers 5 Click on the Have Disk pushbutton 6 Make sure the CD is still loaded in the CD ROM drive Click the Browse pushbutton to select the directory Bin G2K Vx x 2000_XP having the required Windows 2000 XP AIM drivers where is your CD ROM drive and x x is the version of Genie being installed 7 Click OK 8 A dialog box will appear having the following entry Canberra NDIS 5 0 SNAP Protocol driver click OK to accept this protocol 9 Make sure that the Canberra NDIS 5 0 SNAP Protocol is bound to the correct Ethernet adapter this is not an issue if y
224. ing and plotting facility for tracking system performance S506 Genie 2000 Interactive Peak Fit e Displays peak fit information allowing review of peak search results e Allows user to adjust peak search results by adding deleting peaks adjusting fit regions etc Introduction Requires S500 or S502 S509 Genie 2000 Alpha Analysis Software Includes Alpha acquisition and analysis window Peak area and ROI background subtract Reagent correction Efficiency correction Nuclide identification Automatic interference correction Weighted mean activity calculation Minimum detectable activity Post NID processing action levels Workspace save restore Acquisition and Analysis Settings Requires S500 or S502 S544 Genie 2000 NuCHART Chart of Nuclides Color coded Chart of Nuclides Comprehensive compilation of nuclear data from the Brookhaven NuDat database Presents data on alpha beta gamma x ray and neutron decay Quick search by nuclide name Comprehensive search by energy window intensity half life radiation type etc Shows parent progeny relationship Creates CAM file nuclide libraries for Genie S560 Genie 2000 Programming Library Allows a programmer to interact directly with Genie 2000 capabilities from a C language environment Allows the addition of user coded analysis engines to the Genie 2000 en vironment The Programming Library also provides a set of ActiveX components which
225. ion results for later use select the Store button in Figure 67 page 87 Cross over Select the Cross over button in the Show screen to select the currently highlighted en try in the list box as the crossover energy the point where the low energy curve and the high energy curve intersect Only one point may be assigned 88 Calibrate Menu Calibrate by ISOCS LabSOCS Efficiency Results ISOCS LABSOCS RESULTS ISOCS LabSOCS File c genieZk isocs data geometry laboratory simplified_ marine ISOCS LabSOCS Time 06 17 02 11 21 49 Template WELL_OR_MARINELLI_BEAKER Geom Description GLASS_BEAKER_1 Comment ISOCS UNITS ACT G PART_123 456 Detector EXAMPLE Collimator no_collimator 1 00 3 5548E 002 C 1 6138E 003 C Length Meters not used iC Value calculated by ISOCS U Value modified by user Energy Efficiency Uncertainty Convergence Final of Voxels X Mass 100 00 4 23693E 001 lt 0 005646 1229 150 00 5 66324E 001 0 010306 1229 e Figure 70 The Efficiency Calibration Report The selection of a crossover energy point indicates that two curves will be generated for the dual polynomial curve If no crossover energy point is selected a single curve will be generated Note that at least two data points must exist on each side of the crossover energy point for dual curves to be generated Print Select the Print button in Figure 70 to send a copy of the report to the default print queue Select OK to ret
226. ions are allowed If the first line contains Local as the entry then a loopback IP address is used for socket connections If the first line contains anything other than local the computer name IP address is defined via the system network settings Given the above explanation of the file format the example file defines the following information e The local node is named LOCAL and is an Intel node e There is a local VDM which support access to files only e There are two remote VDM s on nodes NODE1 and NODE2 which support both control access and configuration of hardware Please be aware that F and B type VDMs are only supported locally they cannot be a remote node Note also that a default Network Configuration File named G2K_VDM NCF is auto matically installed with the Genie 2000 software this file is configured to allow access to a local VDM for both file MCA and MCA configuration operations Workspace Files The workspace function allows you to save a specific configuration within the Gamma Acquisition and Analysis GAA and Alpha Acquisition and Analysis AAA pack ages For example if you have a four detector system a workspace file can be created that allows you to open all datasources detectors at once by selecting the saved workspace file from the menu selection 271 Genie 2000 Configuration 272 Workspace files are created when a current Acquisition and Analysis configuration is saved to a workspace file
227. is 80 certificate file name you want to use you can select either Info to see more informa tion on the file or OK to load the file into the energy line editor Open Certificate File Look in I Camfiles x E a Am243 ctf 2 U232 ctf a Cal ctf a Nbsstd ctf a Pu242 ctf las Test_spc ctf a Th228 ctf File name rs Files oftype JAI Certificate Files CT El Help I Append to Existing Calibration Info Figure 60 Calibrate by Certificate File Append to Existing Calibration When adding energy points to the current datasource from a file such as in construct ing a composite efficiency file there may be common energy points in the two files If the Append to Existing Calibration checkbox is selected the system will ask if you want to overwrite the existing energy each time it finds a duplicate entry Editing the List When you select Open you ll see the Efficiency Calibration screen which allows you to examine and if necessary edit the data in any of the lines Please refer to Per forming the Efficiency Calibration on page 89 for an illustration and explanation of this screen By Nuclide List Calibrating By Nuclide List lets you choose a nuclide list Figure 61 as a source of nuclide lines You can accept all nuclides in the list by choosing OK to move to the Efficiency Calibration screen which allows you to examine and if necessary edit Calibrate Menu the da
228. is set in MCS Adjust refer to MCS on page 56 for other MCAs There are two options for clearing the spectral display e Select Data to remove all spectral data including the time information in channels one and two from the display e Select Data amp ROIs to remove both the data and all ROIs from the display Adjust allows you to adjust the controls of the current hardware datasource s pro grammable front end electronics This section shows typical adjust screens but only those which are applicable to the current datasource will be available to you and the controls they show will not necessarily be those shown in the illustrations As adjustments are made in the dialog box the new values are sent to the hardware To save the adjustments to the datasource s CAM file use the File Save command so that the next time this datasource is selected the proper setting will be loaded into the MCA The Next and Prev ious buttons at the left side of the dialog box are used to move to the next or previous page of the controls when there are more control elements than will fit in the basic box ADC Click on the ADC button to see the dialog box in Figure 33 which shows a typical ADC adjust screen The controls you see on your adjust screen may vary depending on which ADC you assigned to this datasource 49 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 50 q y Cony gain LLD threshld a 1024
229. ithms list box within the Algorithm Selection dialog box ENGINE Max 16 chars This field represents the generic language independent name of the engine for a par ticular phase It is this field that is stored in the Analysis Control block CAM record structure to define the analysis sequence TYPE Max 1 char The engine types are e Type 1 Analysis Engine subroutine uses predefined common CAM parameters e Type 2 Analysis Engine subroutine uses both predefined common CAM parameters and optional parameters from the analysis sequence record struc ture within the Analysis Control Parameters block Type 3 Report Engine subroutine uses both predefined common CAM parameters and optional parameters from the analysis sequence record structure within the Analysis Control Parameters block LOCATION Max 64 chars This is the engine location The portion of the line preceding the is the name of the system dependent DLL Windows that contains the engine The name of the entry point for the engine follows the As mentioned above there are different types of engines They can make use of a step number passed to them as follows e Type 1 entries in the AEF are restricted to using common CAM parameters only this implies that when these entries are used as part of an analysis sequence one common set of parameters are used for multiple invocations e Type 2 3 entries in the AEF have ad
230. its Mass Percentage 3 Enter the new name density and comments click on Load into Library and the definition is complete Any of these three techniques make it very easy to define a custom Material Library tailored to the specific needs of your laboratory Deleting a Material Library Entry 228 To delete an entry from the library select it in the list then click on the Delete Sub stance button If the entry is part of another definition the deletion will not be al lowed For example dirt1 cannot be deleted as long as the just created mud1 still exists View Menu View Menu The View menu s commands are used to customize the display For instance turning off the Toolbar and the Status Bar will make the display area larger and the Split com mand lets you display up to four geometries at a time Toolbar When checked the toolbar is displayed just below the Geometry Composer s menu bar Status Bar When checked the status bar is displayed below the bottom scroll bar in the Geometry Composer Split When checked the Split display function is enabled as shown in Figure 171 You can change the split at any time by dragging the gray lines to create two or four panes of any size N LabPoint1 geo GeomComposer File Edit Efficiency Curve View Options Help DSS SS MBEMF A EMA AD IKw Al Geometry Composer Report Date Wednesday April 25 2001 Description none Comment none File N
231. ivity ratios are then plotted on a log log scale showing the best weighted linear fit to the data The activity ratios are used rather than absolute activities to enable consistent relative scaling When the same activity is determined at all energies the fitted slope would be zero with all activity ratios being unity However if line activities differ there could be a variety of causes for the discrepancy e Statistical variation allows for about 32 of all normally distributed data to fall outside of the one standard deviation error bars that are plotted Note that since this is a ratio there are two statistical uncertainties involved but points well outside the line with small uncertainties are likely to have other causes e Ifa single data point is too high or low there are several possible causes gt Incorrect peak fit use Interactive Peak Fit IPF to resolve poor multiplet deconvolution or bad FWHM calibration gt Wrong background possibly caused by another peak or Compton edge very close gt Part or all of this peak belongs to another nuclide data point will always be high due to poor energy calibration unresolved multiplet or because this line is part of an interference set Note interference correction improves the weighted mean activity but does not change the line activity that is used in LACE So if that line is part of an interference correction set and the other nuclide has no real activity the data poi
232. izard will automatically be loaded into the MCA Runtime Configuration Database when you finish the definition You don t need to do anything more Editor Definitions If you created or edited the MCA Definition with the MID Editor you ll have to manually load the saved file into the database yourself The next section tells you how 38 Using MCA Definition Tables Loading the Definition Use the Load to command Figure 26 to choose the Definition to be added to the da tabase Wi Load Definition to Database File Name i MID Directory is CAGENIE2K1MIDFILES Files Figure 26 The Load To Dialog Loading Multiple Definitions Though you will usually use only one definition at a time there may be times when you want to load more than one definition To do this be sure that the Input name in each of the Definition Files is unique If you try to load an Input Definition which contains a duplicate Input name you ll see an error message telling you that the requested Definition can t be loaded Unloading the Definition Though some of the programmable front end controls such as ADC Gain or Amplifier Gain are initially set with the MCA Input Definition Editor many may also be ad justed in the Acquisition and Analysis application while you re collecting data These adjustments can be stored in the database with File Save and when you Unload the database are saved in an Input Definition File fo
233. k areas of all peaks found by the peak locate phase independent of the peak locate method Sum Non Linear Least Squares Fit Peak Area Selecting Sum Non Linear LSQ Fit brings up the setup screen shown in Figure 95 The Peak Area Non Linear Least Squares Fit algorithm calculates peak areas of multiplets using the fitting method described in the Peak Area for Multiplets section of the Algorithms chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual It normally calculates the peak areas of single peaks using a summation method de scribed in the Peak Area for Single Peaks section of the Algorithms chapter but you can choose the peak fitting method instead This method also automatically determines the region of interest ROD around each peak found by the peak locate method in use Peaks that are close to each other are au tomatically grouped into multiplet ROIs and analyzed as multiplets The method of de termining the ROIs is described in more detail in the Determination of Peak Region Limits section of the Algorithms chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual If the peak locate results already contain ROI definitions such as after a User Spec ified Peak Locate these ROIs will be used without changes No multiplet analysis will be performed If the peak locate results do not contain ROI definitions that is they in clude peak centroids only the ROI limits will be calculated automatically 133 Gamm
234. l template file SimNai cnf a Ge template file SimGe cnf and an Alpha template file SimAlpha cnf In addition any number of custom tem plate files may be used which must be actual CAM files containing real spectral data Before opening the default template the Simulator will search for a file with the name Sim cnf where is the Simulator s serial number In this way every Simulator can have a unique template file If this template file is not found the default template file is used Note All template files must reside in the Genie2k Ctlfiles folder A Simulator device defined with two memory groups can have a separate template file for each memory group using the name Sim tm cnf where mis A or B corre sponding to memory groups 1 and 2 respectively Therefore the Simulator searches for template files in the following order 1 Sim m cnf Devices with two memory groups 2 Sim cnf Devices with no memory groups defined 3 SimNai cnf SimGe cnf or SimAlpha cnf Default templates In addition to a real spectrum each template file must also have these three CAM pa rameters defined CAM_F_VOLTAGE CAM_F_AMPGAIN and CAM_F_LLD The first two CAM_F_VOLTAGE and CAM_F_AMPGAIN are especially critical Since the spectrum is affected by changes in the voltage level Nal mostly and Amp Gain these settings are read from the template files as baseline values the spectrum will be adjusted according to the difference be
235. laced It is normally enabled checked because Nal peaks in particular tend to shift from their original calibrated positions as a function of temperature 127 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 128 More Peak Locate Parameters Selecting the More button brings up the screen in Figure 92 which lets you set several other parameters affecting Gamma M Library Peak Locate The description of each parameter lists the default value for both Ge and Nal detectors P More Gamma M Locate Setup Window Settings Reject Factors gt Area Variance Interference 3 Background Overlap 0 3 Nbr Bkgnd Terms Max Nbr Gain Passes 10 Sigma 25 Reject Gain Factor 0 0001 Constant Gain Correction m Reject MDA Cancel Help Figure 92 The Peak Locate More Setup Showing Ge Detector Defaults Window Settings Area specifies the FWHM multiplier which establishes the left and right ROI limits around the peaks for a fit to determine whether the peak is present in the spectrum Default 2 5 for Ge 1 for Nal Interference specifies the FWHM multiplier which establishes the limit beyond which two adjacent peaks are no longer considered to interfere with each other when determining whether a peak is present Default 3 for Ge 1 5 for Nal Overlap specifies the FWHM multiplier which establishes the limit below which two adjacent peaks are considered as one that is one of the two peaks is deleted Def
236. lanation of this screen 67 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis By Entry Choosing to calibrate By Entry displays a dialog box Figure 49 which lets you man ually enter energy channel pairs to be used in generating the energy calibration coeffi cients for the energy vs channel equation Calibration by Entry Energy keV Channel FWHM Low Tail sa Delete Change FWHM Clear Low Tail IV Append to Existing Calibration Figure 49 Calibrate by Entry You must also manually enter FWHM values to be used in generating the shape cali bration coefficients for the FWHM vs energy equations If Low Tail Curve was selected in Calibration Setup page 60 you are also allowed to manually enter Low Tail values to be used in generating the shape calibration coeffi cients for the Low Tail vs Energy equations Add Button To create an entry in the list box type an energy value into the Energy text box then the corresponding channel number FWHM value in channels and Tail value in channels in their text boxes When the values have been entered select Add You can add these energy channel pairs in any order they will always be displayed in ascend ing energy order Delete Button To remove a line and all its values from the list box highlight the line then select the Delete button Change Button To change any of the values for a line highlight the line edit any of the values then select the Change bu
237. launched in Notepad CAUTION DO NOT edit this file e Close Notepad then click Finish in the Wizard Windows XP For Windows XP e Find and select the directory containing the datasource files e Click View Customize This Folder e In the dropdown box choose Use existing customization template e Ifyou want to apply this template to all the subfolders check the Also apply this template to all subfolders checkbox e Click OK The first time the datasource folder is opened in Windows XP you ll see the message that The file or folder you are opening contains Web content that may be unsafe Click the message s Yes button to allow the datasource preview to run If datasource preview does not work under Windows XP after you ve installed Genie 2000 and rebooted check the following e Click View Customize This Folder 236 Working With the Preview e In the dropdown box make sure Use existing customization template is se lected If it isn t select it then click OK Using a Different Directory Any directory can use this feature To enable another directory do the following e Using the Control Panel Folder options enable the showing of hidden and sys tem files e Navigate to the datasource directory GENIE2KICAMFILES and copy the Desktop ini file and the Folder Settings folder to the target directory the one you want to enable for datasource previewing e Open a Command Window
238. lds in the entry are used as follows 1 Nuclide This is the name of the radionuclide which caused this particular line and can be any text string of your choice up to a total of eight characters 2 Energy The photopeak energy of the line in keV is shown here 3 Emission Rate This is the number of gammas per second gps or alphas per second aps that this line was emitting at the time the source was originally assayed 4 Rate Uncertainty The uncertainty in the assayed emission rate expressed as a percent is displayed here 5 Half Life This is the half life of the nuclide which can be expressed in Years Days Hours Minutes or Seconds The unit should be chosen before entering the half life value 6 Uncertainty This is the uncertainty of that half life expressed in the same units as the half life For example in Figure 145 the data shown would be read as The half life is 463 9 Days plus or minus 0 1 Days 7 Use for Calib INIT This option is used only when performing an Energy Calibration with Genie 2000 s batch commands Selecting this option for a peak tells the Batch Calibration that the peak is to be used for performing an Initial Energy Calibration before doing a complete calibration Normally only the first lowest energy and last highest energy peaks would have this option enabled For further details refer to the ECAL section of the Batch Procedure Reference chapter in the Model S561 Batch Tools
239. le as the source of true energies A certificate file is typically used when the NID analysis results are unavailable or are suspect and there is some a priori knowledge about the measured source that is al ready documented in the certificate file Nuclide Library Select the Nuclide Library button to specify a nuclide NLB library as the source of true energies A nuclide library is typically used when the NID analysis results are unavailable or are suspect and there may or may not be some a priori knowledge about the measured source Iteratively selecting likely nuclides and assessing the results until good matches are achieved can sometimes be a successful strategy for empirically determining what nu clide s are evident in the spectrum even when excessive gain shift precludes success ful NID analysis True Energies Nuclide The True Energies list box lists the energies and their associated nuclides in the Source of True Energies you selected By default all of the energies from the NID Analysis 96 Calibrate Menu Results or from a Certificate File are initially selected none of the energies from a Nu clide Library are initially selected e The Select All button selects all of the listed energies e The Clear button deselects all of the listed energies e Click on a single energy to select or deselect it The Data Plot Data points for all matched peaks are displayed and plotted as True Energy X axis vs Energ
240. les CNF Toolkit files TKA IEC1455 files IEC 43 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis The Description text field lets you add a file description of up to 32 characters to be saved with the file This information which you ll see in the File Descriptor field in the Open Datasource dialog box Figure 28 makes it easier to identify this specific data file Data Plot The Data Plot command sends a plot of the data in the spectral display to the printer device The scale type linear or log and VFS are determined by the current settings of the spectral display Customizing Your Plot You can choose one of four plot styles any of three customization check boxes and ei ther a range of channels or the full spectrum Figure 30 Selecting any checkbox will preview that selection on the four sample plots Data Plot x rvu ha hy Y Log Scale Py b a Charel C Charel C Chamel C Chanel TX Energy Scale m Range IV Full Spectrum Start Channel fi End Channel 4096 Cancel Help Figure 30 The Data Plot Dialog Plot Styles Although any style will work well with any printer Styles 2 and 3 are intended for color printers and Styles 1 and 4 are intended for black and white printers 1 Solid black spectrum line ROIs filled with hatching 2 Solid black spectrum line ROIs outlined in color 3 Solid black spectrum line ROIs filled with colors 4 Solid black spectrum line 44 File Menu Gr
241. lgorithms you want to use from the Analyze Menu Peak Locate on page 124 and Peak Area on page 133 If you don t specify the algorithms Efficiency Calibration will use the first Peak Lo cate and Peak Area algorithms it finds in the spectroscopy application s AEF file which may not always be the ones you want to use Note that these choices apply to all open datasources Accept The Accept button verifies the entered values and displays them in the list box Delete The Delete button is used to delete the highlighted entry from the list box Cross over The Cross over button selects deselects the currently highlighted entry in the list box as the crossover energy point Only one crossover point may be assigned The selec tion of a crossover energy point indicates that two curves will be generated for the dual polynomial curve If no crossover energy point is selected a single curve will be generated Note that at least two data points must exist on each side of the crossover energy point for dual curves to be generated Cascade Correction These controls enable Genie 2000 s Cascade Correction routines Calibrate Menu Geometry Composer File Select the Geometry Composer GIS file associated with the geometry used to ac quire this data Generate Reports Select the Generate Reports checkbox to output the reports generated by the analysis algorithms Detector Characterized for LabSOCS Select this ch
242. lt Parameters for New Geometries 02 ee ee 231 Deleting a Geometry Definition e 234 DataSource Preview 6 0 2 ee eee ee ee ee ee 235 Enabling Datasource Preview ee 235 The Active Desktop ngs correrse ars ae 235 Customizing the Datasource Folder s oso sa 0 o e e 236 Working With the Preview c crego uca ee 237 Software Installation 209 Installing Windows 240 Installing Gente SO TWATE sc 2 m 4 abe ee A ee a ee SS ee 241 Installing Genie 2000 ee 242 Standard Installation sse soea o e 243 Custom Installation 000 0000 00000000000 0000848 243 Installing Optional Software ee 243 Completing the Installation 2 2 0 0 000000 00000002000 244 Installing TCP IP Network Components ea a a 244 Windows NT 2000 XP TCP IP Setup 2 2 o o 244 Additional TCP IP Installation Tips s s i corce see o ee ee 251 Non Network VDM Configuration 2 2 ee 253 Windows 2000 Setup e e so ee 253 Windows XP Setup o os oY bbe 8 eae a SE awd ee e 256 Installing AIM Device Drivers 2 2 ee 259 Windows NI Setup ws to sacs Sa ee oe E es we Ee ee wee 260 Windows 2000 XP Setup ee ee 260 Installing the USB Driver lt lt ee ee 261 Installation of the PCI MCA Driver 2 2 ee 261 Installing the Security Key 2 2 ee 262 Creating a
243. m of having to correct the efficiency calibration for cascade summing effects will not arise LabSOCS and ISOCS users can therefore ignore this chapter Why Efficiency Calibration Correction is Needed Unfortunately the gamma rays emitted by Co 8Y or even 52Eu are affected by the phenomenon of cascade summing As a result counts are lost from the full energy peaks of these nuclides and smaller detection efficiency will be measured at the gamma ray ener gies An efficiency calibration performed using such data points affected by cascade sum ming will therefore be in error The magnitude of the error depends on the source detector counting geometry The closer the source is to the detector the larger the error due to cascade summing Also the larger the detector size the larger will be the error due to cascade summing Efficiency errors of 10 30 are not uncommon in such scenarios It is therefore neces sary to correct the empirical efficiency calibration for cascade summing losses or gains to obtain the true efficiency The next section Correcting the Calibration de scribes the procedure for correcting the efficiency calibration Correcting the Calibration 284 This procedure assumes that a spectrum has been acquired using a mixed gamma ray standard source and that it has been energy and shape calibrated The mixed gamma ray standard is assumed to contain nuclides that are affected by cascade summing It is further a
244. ma Acquisition and Analysis This lets you specify the save parameters separately for each instance of the step The save parameters you specify for each instance will be used when that instance is exe cuted in the sequence Save as Type The Save as type box lets you select the file format you ll save as CAM CNF Toolkit TKA or IEC455 IEC If you type in the file name without an extension the selected Save as type extension will automatically be appended To save a file with an extension other than those associated with the file filters type the file name and extension surrounded by double quotes filename abc into the Save as type box Description For CAM files you can enter an optional description of up to 32 characters Edit Menu The Edit Menu allows you to enter and edit Sample Information define and edit Anal ysis Sequences Sample Info Sample info presents you with a dialog screen Figure 114 for entering sample infor mation for the current datasource W Edit Sample Information J xj Sample Title GENIE 2k Spectrum No 1 Sample ID NBS Std Collector Name Type Point Source Sample NBS Standard Source Quantity Description Uncertainty Units m P Sample Buildup Type None Deposition Irradiation Geomety Random Begin Date at Error Sample Date Penas f soam naa Cancel Help Load Cal Figure 114 Editing Sample Inf
245. mu library c genie2k isocs data parameters mu04_8 b txt r Chemical Formula Composer AddAe 1p New Substance Composition SSS Material ibrary Component Component Balance Allowable Addition 10 0000 _Tleet Double click for Info Formula Clear D gt 30 00 6 0U 100 00 L Cu oe p aluminum cellulos E Mow percentage Element X n pa atom ratios Final Material Composition Density g cm3 0 Name of the new substance untitled Comment sss Exit Editor Help Delete substance Figure 167 The Copper Component Has Been Added The same basic procedure is then used for entering the tin component using Sn for the Element and 10 for the Mass Percentage After doing that the window will look like the one in Figure 168 With 100 of the material defined the Arrow Buttons we have been using have turned red iif Editor of mu library c genie2k isocs data parameters mu04_8Ib txt r Chemical Formula Composer Addas New Substance Composition AddAs Material library Component Component Balance Allowable Addition 0 0000 Clear Component Double click for Info Clear 90 00 CU 100 00 _Cu 304ss ianei o 10 00 SN 100 00 L5n KII acule aluminum p y cellulos a ae Mass ercenta Element X n 13 E a atom ratios Final Material Composition CU 30 00 5N 10 00 _Cu 30 00 _Sn 10 00 Density g cm3 p Name of the new substance fortea Comment fo Exit Editor H
246. n 39 User specified peak locate 126 Using the Analysis Sequence Editor 199 the Certificate File editor 192 the Keyboard 11 the Nuclide Library Editor 176 Using an input definition 37 Validating the geometry definition 221 Values Action level cs e each bo ae ees 4 187 Effluent DAC 00 185 MPO ue ate Fed ath a di 184 VDM editingaremote 17 VFS AT O e bbe dae ad 110 Linear os eric a Be Re EN 110 LOG swe eS Oe Ya a ew ee 110 Mantal e coria ae ae eS 110 Voltage HVPS output control 55 Windows installling 240 Workspace file format 271 Zero ADC control ooo ae ee 50 Centroid control 52 Mode control 52 Spacing control 52 Window control 52 321 A CANBERRA Warranty Canberra we us our warrants to the customer you your that for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of shipment software provided by us in connection with equipment manufactured by us shall operate in accordance with applicable specifications when used with equipment manufactured by us and that the media on which the software is provided shall be free from defects We also warrant that A equipment manufactured by us shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment of such equipm
247. n 0 Off This key name value pair represents a on off switch for the Show All datasource dis play option A 1 represents a On value and a 0 is Off i e ShowAll 0 See Show All Datasources on page 175 for more detail CurrentDS datasource file name or Detector name The datasource name CurrentDS should contain the name of the datasource to be opened when the workspace file is loaded The name can be either a detector name or a fully qualified CAM file name i e CurrentDS C GENIE2K CAMFILES Naidemo cnf DataSource DSx This section is used to specify information for a given datasource including the datasource name the type of datasource and whether the datasource is to be opened as read only There should be a section like this for each name in the OpenNames section list DSName datasource file name or Detector name The datasource name DSName should contain the name of the datasource to be opened when the workspace file is loaded The name can be either a detector name or a fully qualified CAM file name i e DSName C GENIE2K CAMFILES Naidemo cnf Genie 2000 Font Customization DSCType 769 Detector 1 NativeSpect file Currently there are two types of datasources a detector or a file If the datasource is a detec tor then type value should be 769 If the datasource is a file then type value should be 1 DSReadOnly 1 On 0 Off This value is the flag to open that datasource as read only or not A 1 means On op
248. n The definition of the geometry starts with its Description and an optional descriptive Comment Since Genie uses the Description as the File ID and the Comment as the File Descriptor these should be selected to uniquely identify the geometry so that when the calibration file is retrieved it can be shown to be the proper one Density and Material Enter the density and material of the sample source They are used by the calibration process to correct for factors such as attenuation due to sample and container wall composition The list at the right of the dialog box is used to specify the material used for the con tainer and source Double click on a material to display its name default density chemical composition and mass attenuation coefficients Figure 155 Material INFO 2 xi Material Name plass Density g om3 26 Comment eommon_glass _den_2 4 2 8 Chemical Composition 0 45 432N4 11 13 51 32 72 C4 10 72 _5102 70 00 _N420 15 00 _C40 15 1 Mass Attenuation Polynomial coefficients Energy range 0 040000 8 000000 Mey 2 75162482 0 48698685 0 05006566 0 01291193 0 01940519 0 00250608 0 00502803 0 00120063 0 00057330 0 00013649 ae Close Figure 155 Displaying the Material Parameters To modify these parameters or to add further materials to the library click on the Call Mukditor button directly above the material list This will launch the Materials Li brary Editor described on page 222 To s
249. n curve as a graph Please refer to Energy Show on page 72 for a complete discussion and an illustration of this function Energy Full When you select Energy Full its menu lets you choose how energies are to be entered for spectrum calibration e By Certificate File which allows you to select a certificate file containing the energies e By Nuclide List which allows you to select a list of nuclides and their energies from a specified library e By Calibration File which allows you to select a calibration file defining the list of energies e By Entry which lets you manually enter each energy its channel number and its FWHM and Low Tail values 63 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 64 By Certificate File Calibrating By Certificate File lets you choose either of two types of a certificate file Figure 45 as a source of calibration energies full or partial The partial certificate file CTP is similar to the full certificate file CTF lacking only the assay date and time and the activity units for each nuclide See Save as Certificate on page 65 for more information When you have highlighted the certificate file name you want to use you can either select Info to see more information on the file or select OK to load the file s energy data into the energy line editor Append to Existing Calibration When adding energy points to the current datasource from a file such as in construct ing a composite
250. n in Figure 62 lets you enter the percent uncertainty and change the activity units E Additional Nuclide Information xi m General Information Assay Date at Activity Units JuCi bz Conversion Factor 27000 Nuclide Uncertainty q Name Activity In Activity i Nuclide Activity Uncertainty po OK Cancel Help Figure 62 Editing Additional Nuclide Information General Information These text boxes let you enter or change assay date and time and the activity units The Assay Date is the date and time at which the source was measured you must enter both Though Activity Units defaults to uCi you can choose another unit for reporting nuclide activities Since the activities are stored in microcuries the Conversion Factor defaults to the proper value for converting microcuries to other units If you choose lt gt you can type in the name of an Activity Unit not shown in the list then enter the Conversion Factor that will convert your units to uCi Nuclides Highlight a nuclide in the list box to enter or edit its Activity and Percent Uncertainty data When you ve finished editing that nuclide select Change This will copy the data to the list file and move the highlight to the next nuclide When you ve finished select OK to save this as a full CTF certificate file and re turn to the Calibrate by Nuclide List screen You ll see that all nuclides which have Additional Nuclide I
251. n in the sample LACE Analysis 108 Energy keV In R 0 319 0 050 0 030 In K Figure 209 LACE Result with Absorber Thickness Halved 108 Energy keV In R 0 578 0 083 0 030 In E Figure 210 LACE Result with Absorber Thickness Doubled 301 Line Activity Consistency Evaluator Figures 211 and 212 show the effect of halving to 0 575 g cm and doubling to 2 30 g cm the nominal matrix density of 1 15 g cm in the calibration Positive slope indi cates the matrix density is lower in the calibration than in the sample while negative slope indicates the matrix density is higher in the calibration than in the sample 108 Energy kev Inm R 0 259 0 041 0 030 1n k Figure 211 LACE Result with Matrix Density Halved 302 LACE Analysis 108 Energy kev In R 0 388 0 055 0 030 In K Figure 212 LACE Result with Matrix Density Doubled Finally Figures 213 and 214 show the effect of using much lower aluminum and higher cadmium atomic mass metals but at the same nominal density for the copper absorber in the calibration Downward concavity indicates the absorber atomic number is lower in the calibration than in the sample while upward concavity indicates the ab sorber atomic number is higher in the calibration than in the sample 303 Line Activity Consistency Evaluator 304 10 Energy kev In R 0 259
252. n properly matching true energies with found peaks Successful gain adjustment requires that the true energies listed in the specified certifi cate file correlate to at least half of the peaks found by the specified peak search ASF Successful ADC zero adjustment requires that at least one low energy less than 1 3 that of the highest certificate energy in the certificate file be matched with a found peak In addition the ADC must allow computer controlled adjustments and its zero adjustment must have been specified during setup Otherwise only the gain will be adjusted Ideally the certificate file should list only those energies that correspond to all of the found peaks However the number of input true energies must be no more than twice the number of found energies and contain energies that actually correspond to most of the found peaks If the number of input true energies is more than twice the number of found peak ener gies peak matching and gain adjustment will fail The routine can t resolve more than one nuclide at the same energy in the source of true energies so matches will not be made at any true energy that is repeated Best re sults will be obtained if all of the input true energies have a relative separation of at least several FWHM It is also desirable to have peaks that span the full range of the spectrum Peak Search ASF Selects the Analysis Sequence ASF file to be used for the gain adjustment calcula tions
253. nSpector s power switch is turned off This battery with an operating life of at least five years is in a socket on the In Spector s MCA Board When its status changes from Good to Disc discharged replace it with a Panasonic CR2025 battery or equivalent 12 V Fault The 12 V Fault status tells you that because there is an overload on the 12 V or 12 V power supply the Power Manager has put the supply into a Power Save condition The most likely cause of this is that the preamplifier connected to the rear panel Preamp connector requires more power than the InSpector can supply The proper re medial action is to disconnect the preamplifier s power cable and change the power mode to Battery Full or AC Full If successful the fault will be cleared 283 Correcting for Cascade Summing D Correcting for Cascade Summing In gamma ray counting laboratories it is a common practice to use mixed gamma ray standard sources for performing an empirical efficiency calibration of the detector Nuclides such as Co and 88Y are almost invariably present in these mixed standards This is because the gamma rays emitted by Co and Y can be used to extend the ef ficiency calibration up to an energy of 1836 keV Eu may also be used due to its multiple energies and long half life Note Ifa mathematical efficiency calibration method such as Model S573 ISOCS or Model S574 LabSOCS is used instead of a source based method the proble
254. nce spectrum If you change the reference datasource by selecting a different spectrum the Marker Info status page information changes accordingly Only one energy calibration that of the reference spectrum is meaningful for the set of compared spectra Compare nbsstd cnt Cancel Help Figure 81 The Compare Dialog Move the Compare Spectrum When Compare has been turned on you can move the compare spectrum by clicking on the VFS box in the upper right hand corner of the display window the VFS box will change to the color of the compare spectrum or by selecting Display Compare VES The mouse cursor will change to a solid double headed vertical arrow Use the mouse or the cursor keys to position the compare spectrum anywhere within the spec tral display When the compare spectrum is enabled the VFS scroll bar controls the compare spec trum s scale With the reference spectrum enabled VFS box returned to its original color the VES scroll bar controls the reference spectrum s scale Off Select Off to disable the compare mode and return to the current display mode normal or expanded whichever was in effect before Compare was turned on 111 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 112 VFS ROls When Compare has been turned on selecting VFS will let you position the compare spectrum vertically within the spectral display as described in Move the Compare Spectrum on page 111 It also allows independen
255. nd the volume units cmd m ml 1 for each of the Effluent and DAC limit variables in the library Drop down lists are used for the selection For each item you want to change click on the Down Arrow then click on your choice from the list Effluent and DAC Limit units Activity Volume cm3 Cancel Help Figure 134 Effluent and DAC Limit Units Dialog Effl DAC Values This command sets the Effluent and DAC limit values for the currently selected radionuclide Click on Effl DAC Values in the Option Menu to see the dialog box shown in Figure 135 Effluent and DAC Limits for BE 7 Used in Daily Weekly Yearly Calculations Inhalation DAC O fo on0e 000 fo 000E 000 uciema Daly f Effluent Air fo oo0E 000 fo o00E 000 f0 000 000 uciema Day y Effluent Water 0 000 000 0 000 000 0 000 000 uCi em3 Day zi Release to Sewer 0 000 000 0 000 000 0 000 000 uCi em3 Day Cancel Help Figure 135 The Effluent DAC Values Dialog 185 Using the Nuclide Library Editor Now you can set values for each of the four Effluent and DAC limits for regulation 10CFR20 The units for these Effluent and DAC values are the ones set under Effl DAC Units in the Options menu page 185 Action Level Derived Units To set the Action Level values open a library file then choose this command to spec ify the unit for either or both of the Action Levels Figure 136 Because activities are sto
256. neral Information The upper part of the AGA Status screen displays general information about the cur rent AGA session Status current status may be In Progress Completed Successfully or Failed iteration limit reached or communication failure Initiated the date and time when the adjustment was started Acquisition the current live time and preset Iteration the current iteration and iteration limit Gain Shift the current percent gain shift and percent gain shift tolerance Gain Initial the amplifier gain before any adjustments are made not changed by AGA Current the gain which was used to acquire the data displayed in the report changes with each iteration Calculated the gain to be used on the next iteration changes with each iteration Zero Initial the ADC zero before any adjustments are made not changed by AGA Current the ADC zero value which was used to acquire the data displayed in the report changes with each iteration Calculated the ADC zero value to be used on the next iteration changes with each iteration Data Text Box The text box in the lower half of the AGA Status screen Figure 76 displays the con catenated data from all iterations as tabular data and gain adjustment data Tabular Data e True and Found energies in the first two columns with unmatched energies indicated by dashes e Matches are aligned showing the resulting gain Correction Fa
257. nergy calibration valid and should be performed only when the evaluated gain shift is deemed excessive Al ternatively the datasource can be recalibrated outside of the Gain Evaluator perhaps aided by Save New CAL File below In either case the altered datasource would re quire a new analysis that reflects the changes Detector datasources can be corrected via recalibration see Save New CAL File or gain adjustment via Auto Gain Adjust page 98 97 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 98 Save New CAL File Click the Save New CAL File button to save the calculated energy calibration in a new calibration CAL file This saved CAL file can then be loaded outside of the Gain Evaluator to establish a new corrected energy calibration for the datasource and perhaps other datasources known to have the same energy calibration gain shift Alternatively the datasource can be rebinned to make the current energy calibration valid using Fix File Gain above In either case the altered datasource would require a new analysis that reflects the changes ReEvaluate Click the ReEvaluate button to perform another evaluation on the current datasource us ing the selected energies The results will be displayed in the plot and the Data Text Box Since the interactive version of the Gain Evaluator initializes with the current NID analysis results when available using a different or altered source of true energies re quires a re evaluation A
258. nfidence Threshold The NID Confidence Threshold is used to accept or reject peaks for identification this parameter s range is O low to 1 high MDA Confidence Factor In the standard NID the MDA Confidence Factor is used as the designated MDA con fidence during the MDA test only if Perform MDA Test is enabled Note that the MDA Confidence Factor is used both here and in the Detection Limits algorithm page 147 If the Confidence Factor is changed here the Detection Limits calculations are affected too unless the factor is changed again in the Detection Limits Setup screen before performing its calculation In addition the VMS Standard Peak Search page 131 will be affected by any change in the Confidence Factor if its Criti cal Level test is enabled Generate Report If the Generate Report box is checked a predefined report will be generated when this phase is executed and will be displayed in the application s report window The report is defined in the AEF file as the Report Template Name and Section Name asso ciated with this phase NID with Interference Correction S501 Gamma Option If the current spectrum already includes peak area and effi ciency correction results the Nuclide Identification with Interference Correction algo rithm Figure 103 identifies the spectrum s nuclides and automatically performs an interference correction and weighted mean calculation on them as described in the Basic Calculations
259. nformation added are marked by a double asterisk If you are satisfied that all data in the Calibrate by Nuclide List screen is correct you can select this screen s OK to load the file into the energy line editor 82 Calibrate Menu Editing the List When you select OK you ll see the Efficiency Calibration screen which allows you to examine and if necessary edit the data in any of the lines Please refer to Per forming the Efficiency Calibration on page 89 for an illustration and explanation of this screen By Calibration File Choosing to calibrate By Calibration File displays a dialog box Figure 63 which lets you select a Calibration File defining the list of energy efficiency error triplets to be used for calibration The Info button displays descriptive information for the se lected file Load Calibration File Look in fa Calfiles El E z ls naidemo cal sa nbsstd cal sa test cal Filename SS any Files oftype Calibration Files CAL i i Help I Append to Existing Calibration Info Figure 63 Calibrate by Calibration File Append to Existing Calibration When adding energy points to the current datasource from a file such as in construct ing a composite efficiency file there may be common energy points in the two files If the Append to Existing Calibration checkbox is selected the system will ask if you want to append to the existing calibration If you answer
260. ng conversion e The converted file will be stored in the same directory as the original file e Old files of the same name as the intended output file name will have their ex tension changed to b where the question marks will be replaced with an integer e The original file will be retained in its native format e The converted file will be opened by the application The supported file types are CAM Oxford AccuSpec InterWinner v 4 1 Unpacked 100 File Ortec GammaVision Silena Aptec PCMCA v 6 31 7 02 EasySpec Intertechnique Nucleus Ortec ADCAM Sampo 90 PC Toolkit Gamma AT IEC 1455 Spectran AT File Menu The Info Button Press the Info button Figure 28 to display information about the currently selected CAM File datasource Close Selecting Close lets you close the current datasource If the open datasource has been changed but not saved you will be asked if you want to save it Save Save allows you to save the datasource with all related information to its original lo cation Save as Save as displays a dialog box Figure 29 which prompts you for a file name to save the current datasource to Sve eee 2x Save in CI CAMFILES als ck E 4 i dB Nbsstd d Thblank BB Pu1000 Burooo E Publank Ublank Bl Test_bkg E Test_spc Th1000 Save as type Cam Files CNF y Cancel Description Figure 29 The Save As Dialog The file types supported by this operation are CAM fi
261. ng the Nuclide Library Editor Maximum Permissible Concentration MPC units Activity Soluble Insoluble Ci Activity Volume Activity Volume Occupational Air uli om3 i uli cm3 bd Water UC cm3 uli cm3 uCi Jom ulit cm3 Cancel Figure 132 The MPC Units Dialog Drop down lists are used for the selection For each item you want to change click on the Down Arrow then click on your choice from the list MPC Values This command is used to set the MPC values for the currently selected radionuclide Click on MPC Values in the Option Menu to see the dialog box shown in Figure 133 Now you can set values for each of the eight Maximum Permissible Concentration limits The units for these MPC values are the ones set under MPC Units in the Op tions menu page 183 Maximum Permissible Concentration MPC for BE 7 Occupational Public Soluble air 0 000E 000 uCi em3 0 000 000 uCi cm3 Soluble water 0 000 000 uCi em3 0 000 000 uCi em3 Insoluble air fi Q00E 006 uCi em3 0 000 000 uCi em3 Insoluble water 0 000 000 uCi em3 0 000 000 uCi em3 Cancel Help Figure 133 The MPC Values Dialog 184 The Options Menu EffI DAC Units This command is used to set the Effluent and DAC limit units Click on Effl DAC Units in the Option Menu to see the dialog box shown in Figure 134 Now you can set the Effluent and DAC limit Activity Units uCi or Bq for the library a
262. ng the Wizard 66 8 45 5 2486662048 PRL e ed EE EERE EEE ES 18 The MCA Input Definition Editor eee e e ee ee ee e a 21 Basic COncepiS e awe chads Ste cies a Ghee eo deel od bh as AA 22 Starting the MCA Input Definition MID Editor o e e 22 Building an MCA Definition ee 23 AddinganMCA s o e gee be REDDER HERE Re EEE A 23 Interpreting the Definition Entry lt s as awed eae i a 0000000004 25 Deleting an MCA ends at eaa eA e PEDO e e a a AE E a E e ead a 25 Defining an MCA se cons Bee eR ew EE EERE RR eR eS Re Epa RE E E 26 Devices 4 fe ee a a a Se ee ee ot eee a 26 MCA oi ge de toa et de a et She we A ae a A 27 Sample Chandio e s ey Sk Gok oe oe a Ee ee we ee Ge a 28 Stabilizer High Voltage DSP Gain and DSP Filter o o 28 The SettihgS s sc lio a A a Pd 29 MCA Settings cz laa 4 a a aa aa da 29 Stabilizer Settings i e co Bk Rew RRL ES ERE RR ORE DEER RE 29 High Voltage Setting Se i ye aS be ee ea e Bee te digas Bed a eG 31 DSP Gain Sellos 34 fe Saw RRO OLR oS a eS 31 DSP Filter Settings ui aa a A A 32 MCS SEIMES 245 ss ke wp BES a Ee BS a Bee a ee eS 33 Input Settings se egg bee be a a DRE ER LS REDDER HER OEE 34 Saving the Input Definition 000000002 eee 34 Changing the Summary View sci a macca eana adad naa ee 35 Editing an MCA Definition gt s se sa re eea eta eaae ee 36 Viewing the Pile Details sss moei due goi hw he doe RA AA 36 Editing the Defi
263. nie 2000 the typographic conventions used in the manual and the keyboard conventions for us ing the program without a mouse Chapter 2 The Acquisition and Analysis Window describes the appearance and func tion of the Genie 2000 s main window Chapter 3 MCA Input Definition takes you through system configuration the defini tion of physical MCA inputs The first part of the chapter discusses the MID Wizard which will quickly and easily set up your system s MCA for most common situations The remainder of the chapter is devoted to the MCA Input Definition Editor which is available for those setups which will use other parameter settings Chapter 4 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis provides a structured reference where you can easily locate specific information The next four chapters discuss the Certificate File Editor the Nuclide Library Editor the Analysis Sequence File editor and the Geometry Composer These utilities create and edit calibration standard certificate files nuclide library files analysis sequence files Comprehensive standard libraries are included with the package and can serve as the basis for easily defined custom libraries These are followed by two chapters spe cific to Using Cascade Correction and Using the Geometry Composer Genie 2000 Software The Appendices Software installation a nearly automatic process is covered in detail Appendix A n Stalling the Software Appendix B Genie 2000 Configur
264. nie 2000 software so the value of this field is at the discretion of the user this field is typically used in larger networks to help partition them and its users into logical domains Identification Services Protocols Adapters Bindings fi Windows uses the following information to identify your tees computer on the network You may change the name for this computer and the workgroup or domain that it will appear in Computer Name fa SA Workgroup WORKGROUP Figure 183 Computer Name Identification Installing TCP IP Network Components 2 Click the Close button to exit the Network setting dialog You ll be prompted via the dialog in Figure 184 to set up the TCP IP properties Microsoft TCP IP Properties IP Address DNS WINS Address Routing An IP address can be automatically assigned to this network card by a DHCP server If your network does not have a DHCP server ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below Adapter 1 MS Loopback Adapter Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server Specify an IP address IP Address 2 Subnet Mask Default Gateway a a y Advanced Cancel Apply Figure 184 TCP IP Properties Screen An IP address must be defined for this computer so it can be associated with the previously entered computer name this is how computers and applications communicate with each other using TCP IP the com
265. nition ses ede be ee RE EERE ERR SE GEOR EES 37 The NewCommand 2 a 0 0 e ai a a a ee 37 The Input Definition Report c sce mec ama ee 37 Using MCA Definition Tables i sescca ee ee 37 Viewing the Current Database ss s 2 2 o 37 Loading and Unloading Definitions 2 0 0 0 000000000 38 Loading the Definition sanse s sa ew ee de we wh a me Ba 39 Unloading the Definition ain a da o we ee ee we ee eG 39 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 41 Elle Ment 24 4 amp au aoe ae dow a ee ea eS e So ee OR ae oh 41 Open DatasQUICE 64 6 doen al a Red we de a we a ke wha ai 41 CLOSE Baca rd a oe ee er ae oe we ge So a ee pe ee aerate ear dea 43 SV a cehe ee aw awe Dee Care ee eee Ae Ee OP eR ee he ewes 43 Save dS 4 Gece o Git Gee es Neer a ates ee Ace ee ee es ae teh a 43 Data Plot au 5 6 8 0 he Sao sp iso Glee Bk a HA oe eae Meee e ole 44 Plotto Clipboard s e s ens be wee deh eH EDR RE HEE REDE RL GE HES 45 Print Report WindOW lt s ee on se A ois Be GE ee DE a a a 45 Export Report to PDF x s s ae p cas e Geo SB ew le we Be Soe pi Gea Pa 45 Open Workspace s aw homa e a kk ek wd a eo a we Re we we ge S 45 Saye Workspaces ge Ysa ee ow we dew a ee or EG EG Ee oe Se ee 46 Delete Workspace qone s eae eee RES e RR EE He eee HEE YE Eee Ex 46 Eit saves AEE ae ett a ee a A E ee aes le ee 46 MCA Menu ecs 25 a Bee eo a te Rage eA ee GE eh aaa 47 Acquire Stafty 4 854565 bd be DRE
266. nt To Point Tunneling Protocol Y Streams Environment TCP IP Protocol Have Disk OK Cancel Figure 181 Select Network Protocol 246 Installing TCP IP Network Components Highlight the TCP IP Protocol from the Network Protocol list and press OK to add You will be prompted for your Windows NT 2000 XP installation disks CD ROM in order to copy the required files for the selected network adapter note that on some pre loaded systems the Windows NT 2000 XP distribution is installed on the hard disk partition containing Windows NT 2000 XP If remote VDM access is required then proceed to Additional Setup Steps for Remote VDM Access on page 248 Press the Close pushbutton to exit the Network setting dialog At this time you will be prompted via a dialog shown in Figure 182 for setup of TCP IP properties On this dialog an IP address and subnet mask must be specified Since the loopback adapter has been selected i e restricting TCP IP communications to local only then any legal IP address and subnet mask may be specified e g 200 200 200 1 for IP address and a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 Note that with this type of setup Genie 2000 will use the standard loopback IP address 127 0 0 1 and not the one specified in this dialog Press OK to complete the setup Microsoft TCP IP Properties IP Address DNS WINS Address Routing An IP address can be automatically assigned to this network card by a
267. nt rate in the gain reference peak must be significantly higher than the count rate in the background Zero Centroid This control sets the reference channel at the low end of the spectrum for zero inter cept stabilization which prevents interference from the effects of gain drift The cen troid s channel number can also be typed in from the keyboard then accepted with the Ok button within the control To allow the stabilizer to correct for zero drift the count rate in the zero reference peak must be significantly higher than the count rate in the background Gain and Zero Window Controls These controls set the width in channels of the upper and lower sampling windows for each Mode The operation of the stabilizer depends on measuring the count rate in these two windows detecting a difference then providing a correction to equalize count rates Gain and Zero Spacing Controls These two controls set the spacing in channels between the upper and lower sam pling windows for each Mode The windows should be placed so that a shift in the ref erence peak reflects a significant change in count rate through the windows For broad peaks the spacing should be set so that the windows edges are not on the flat part of the peak Gain and Zero Mode Controls The Stabilizer s Gain and Zero or both can be set to Off On or Hold If the drift in either mode zero or gain exceeds the Correction Range the overrange flag will be set and that mo
268. nt will be high gt Gamma abundance wrong review library e If points trend together but not in a straight and level line this is because effi ciency calibration doesn t match sample You should first investigate the causes of individual peak errors fixing those which cause errors in the nuclide activity Where the line activity ratios indicate a statistically discernable trend with energy LACE can assist you to qualitatively evaluate the correlation between the efficiency calibration and the sample emission rate The shape 293 Line Activity Consistency Evaluator of the LACE curve can help determine the type and general magnitude of discrepancy between the efficiency calibration and the measured sample When LACE shows a discrepancy between the efficiency calibration and the results for a given sample measurement you can improve the correlation and enhance accu racy by either performing a new calibration that better matches the sample measure ment or changing the sample conditions to better match the existing calibration When a sourceless efficiency calibration ISOCS LabSOCS is used the efficiency calibra tion parameters can be quickly altered until a match is achieved In either case the LACE output must be properly interpreted to direct required changes LACE Analysis 294 A variety of parameters must be considered when investigating possible discrepancies between an efficiency calibration and the actual conditions
269. o red because an error was detected on the datasource the field will be changed to white if the reported error has been corrected remember that a datasource includes an MCA and various front end devices You ll find more information on possible errors in Genie 2000 Input Datasource Errors in the Error Codes chapter of the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual w MCA Front End Hardware Status Type 12K Serial No 1111 MCA Hardware version v1 0 Type 12K DSt Serial No 0 Zero correct 1 Gain centroid 7680 ch Gain window 8 chs Gain spacing 64 chs Gain rate div 1 Correction mg Ge Gain mode Off Gain correct 0 Gain overrange Clear Gain ratio 1 000 2 Type 12K Hi Serial No 0 Voltage 1300 0 Inh signal Positive Polarity Positive Status On Update Help Figure 40 Typical Status Report Calibrate Menu Advance Selecting Advance issues an advance command to a sample changer assigned to the current hardware datasource If this datasource does not have a sample changer as signed to it in the MID configuration file the command will not be issued Load If you are displaying a Detector hardware datasource and you have at least one CAM File datasource open you can copy spectral data and energy calibration information from the selected CAM File datasource to the Detector datasource Selecting Load displays the dialog box in Figure 41 Use the Load from list box to choose one of the op
270. o we 116 Update Information se ss oeer eu se eak eek ea e o e a E E a E 116 Spectrum Labels s ses aew a to we a Bee et eas Se a l 116 MCA VIEW 2s haa 0 Raich Bo wath A eee ee Radin alee A 117 Operations s e i epep a RR REDE ERE REDE E DER HERE RLS 121 Interactive NID ia eels Bc vente ae nee he er ed Je a ee 121 Analyze Menu simio OE oe OS RAS Ro OO ESO Oe wm Be e 122 Exec te Sequence 2 as ee Gee ed oe G a ee De SO a ee eaa 122 Abort SEQUENCE eb Sa ed Bee YE eae ee eR a ee OES a eee 123 Analysis Phase Selection c s cs sti 2 p bpb trew ei 123 ACQUISIION 4 se ao aa de iai o a ew doe a e ek ae a eee 123 Peak Locate aka bite ke eM a as a e a a ew e 124 Unidentified Second Difference oe 2 o o 124 User Speciiied s x sone BES Hee Dk SRA A ew eee Ee ee 126 Library Locate Gamma M 00 ee ee 127 Library Locate Simple siup u ai a y aaa ke ww we 129 VMS Standard Peak Search eaa o ee 131 Peak Ateca ci y ooo Be he ewe Ree OEE ED ee ERR OE a OEE OEE RS ee 133 Sum Non Linear Least Squares Fit Peak Area o ee 133 Library Gamma 136 ATCA Correcto s do o ii seme erat hed Ps a dia Eid e 138 Standard Background Subtract oes sa amaa ea ee 139 Reference Peak Correction cose e se e a e e i e e oe a Ea a 140 Bificiency COMTECU N sere 2 ew SG a a ew 141 Nuchde Identification p 4 es a a Seow See Biel BG dee Ques eld gd oe ee 142 Tentative NID osa ew ERR ERASE ER ERE ES Bes 142 NDS drapes a ranges ge a nee has
271. on of this function 70 Calibrate Menu Energy Recalibration Selecting Energy recalibration displays a dialog box Figure 51 which lets you recompute the energy vs channel calibration curve Shape calibrations FWHM and Low Tail are not affected by this command note that the FWHM energy and Low Tail energy pairs used by the shape calibration curves are zeroed out Y Energy Calibration Recalibration x Energy key Channel Populate Auto Cancel Help Figure 51 The Energy Recal Dialog Populate The Populate button invokes a dialog screen similar to the one in Figure 52 which allows you to populate the list box with the energies from the current datasource a certificate file or a previously stored calibration file Populate x Source Calibration File C Certificate File Cancel Help Figure 52 The Populate Screen 71 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis If the certificate or calibration population option is invoked when the list box already contains energies there may be a duplication of energy entries If a duplicate is found you will be asked if you want to replace the existing energy entry Auto The Auto button performs an automatic peak locate on the reference spectrum The list box is then populated with those energies found in both the populate file and the reference spectrum with their associated channel values Show Button Select the Show button to display t
272. opriate to account for possible feeding from a parent nuclide The algorithm only treats par ent daughter pairs It does not handle multiple generation e g parent daughter grand daughter nuclide chains Note that it is necessary to execute the NID plus Interference Correction analysis step on the datasource prior to running this algorithm The NID plus Interference Cor rection step calculates the activity of each identified nuclide at the Sample Time by treating it as a standalone decay That is it does not account for parental feeding The definition of the parent or daughter for a given nuclide is established in the nu clide library NLB file used in the NID plus Interference Correction step These defi nitions are editable in the Nuclide Library Editor see The Optional Nuclide Data on page 178 Note that while defining a parent daughter relationship you must specify the Decay Ratio the fractional probability for the parent to decay into the daughter and the Error in the Decay Ratio while editing the daughter nuclide The Parent Daughter Correction algorithm first examines each nuclide as a potential daughter If the nuclide has a parent defined in the nuclide library and the parent was found in the datasource the nuclide s activity at the Sample Time is corrected for feeding from the parent The algorithm then makes a second pass through the list of identified nuclides this time examining each as a potential parent
273. or Input contains the set of operations to be performed on the MCA and elec tronic front end hardware Acquire Start Select Acquire start or press the F4 key to initiate data acquisition on the current datasource This command is disabled for datasources that are already acquiring data Acquire Stop Select Acquire stop or press the F4 key to issue an unconditional Stop command to a currently collecting datasource Acquire Setup Selecting Acquire setup displays a dialog box Figure 32 which allows you to define default acquisition parameters to be used when starting data collection on hardware datasources 11 Acquire Setup Live Time 1000 F Star Time Prest m External Real Time Sec F Stop C Min C Hr Computational Preset None Value C Int l 8132 Integral Start Chan 1 C Area Y LI C Counts Stop Chan 256 8192 ROI Selection Input Size 192 E Current Help Figure 32 Typical PHA Acquire Setup Mode The available acquisition modes depend on the MCA being used and the time and computational preset options depend on the current acquisition mode For instance time and computational presets are available only in PHA or LFC mode MCS presets are available only in MCS mode 47 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 48 Time Preset The time presets are available only when the MCA is set to PHA mode or LFC mode Live time preset for the current hardware datasource
274. or Setup Figure 110 asks you to specify the actual true energies ex pected to occur in the spectrum by selecting lines from the current NID results a cer tificate file or a nuclide library file These true energies are matched to peaks found in the resident peak search analysis results Gain Evaluator Engine Setup Source of True Energies Current NID Analysis Results Certificate File y Nuelide Library F J Generate Report True Energies Nuclide 5 C5134 Cancel Help E Figure 110 Gain Evaluator Setup Output includes the reliability of the peak matching the percent gain shift and the re sulting energy shift in each found peak as a fraction of the local peak width The specified datasource must already contain a spectrum acquired from a source with known true energies Note Use generic nuclide libraries with caution since extraneous true energies can result in unreliable results and excessive calculation time Use of a source specific certificate file or nuclide library is recommended Source of True Energies Select the source of energies to be used in performing the Gain Evaluation All of the energies listed in the specified source will be used e The Current NID Analysis Results e A Certificate File 155 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis e A Nuclide Library File Generate Report Selecting the Generate Report button generates a report containing a table of data for all true
275. or the effect of the side peaks If you click the List Pks button in the Show display Figure 58 you ll see the iterated or final values of the peak to total ratios 77 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis P T Calibration Entries Energy keV P T Error Cross Peak Edits Accept E y 122 017 nergy keV Delete P T Value 0 674561 New Record Error 0 10052 _New Record Figure 57 A Crossover Peak has Been Selected Peak to Total Show Select the Show button to display the Peak to Total calibration curve as a graph Fig ure 58 Please refer to Efficiency Show on page 93 for a complete discussion of this function Note that the default order for the polynomial is 2 for both the low energy and high en ergy curves The order of the polynomial settings can be changed up or down as required w Peak to Total Efficiency Calibration Curves Low Energy Measured High Energy Scale C Linear Log ore RA Order of the 100 1000 psa E JE Energy ke Peak E ER Datasource C GENIE2K CAMFILES ES_TEST CNF InfEff 1 724e 001 7 269e 000 In E 7 810e 001 In EJ 2 InfEff 2 095e 000 3 632e 001 In E 3 007e 002 In E 2 Cancel Help List Pks Print Figure 58 Show the Peak to Total Calibration List Peaks Select the List Pks button to display a list of the peaks used in the calibration as shown in Figure 59 The calculated vs measured P T
276. ore Setup Showing Ge Detector Defaults Window Settings Area specifies the FWHM multiplier to establish the left and right ROI limit around the peaks for a fit to calculate the peak area Default 3 for Ge 1 5 for Nal Interference specifies the FWHM multiplier to establish the limit beyond which two adjacent peaks are no longer considered to interfere with each other for the purpose of determining their areas Default 4 for Ge 2 5 for Nal 137 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Overlap specifies the FWHM multiplier to establish the limit below which two adjacent peaks are considered as one that is one of the two peaks is deleted Default 0 3 for both Ge and Nal Reject Factors Variance specifies the area variance rejection factor Only peaks whose area is larger than this factor times the uncertainty of the area at 1 sigma will be accepted as valid peaks Default 0 for Ge 1 for Nal Background specifies the peak rejection factor based on the area of the background Only peaks whose square of the area is larger than this factor times the area of the background will be accepted as valid peaks Default 0 for Ge 1 for Nal Number of Background Terms defines whether the fits are to be made with an added constant or linear continuum 0 means that no additional continuum term will be used 1 means that only a constant continuum will be used and 2 means that a linear continuum will be used Default 2 for both
277. ork Configuration File is required on all computer nodes that are running the Genie 2000 software environment the name and location of the file is defined by the environment variable CINETCFG as described in Genie 2000 Environment Vari ables on page 264 This file defines both the location and the functions of the Virtual Data Managers VDMs that the client node has access to Example This example of a typical Network Configuration File is followed by a detailed expla nation of format and content 1 Local 1F pipe datasrce 1M node1 pipe datasrce 1C node 1 pipe configur 1M node2 pipe datasrce 1C node2 pipe configur The format of a Network Configuration record is e Node System Type 1 char Specify type 1 for Intel nodes e VDM Type Code 1 char Type code as follows 270 File Formats VDM supports hardware control access VDM supports file access VDM supports both hardware control and file access Qf 2s VDM supports hardware configuration access e VDM Connection Identifier This identifier must be in the form of nodename pipe pipeid where Nodename Optional identifier which is the name of the remote node the are required pipe Required text for connection identifier pipeid Actual name of the connection must be either DATASRCE for M F or B type VDMs or CONFIGUR for C type VDMs The first record of this file indicates whether local only TCP IP or network TCP IP connect
278. ormation 160 Edit Menu The Text Fields The text fields allow you to enter descriptive data for your sample You can enter up to 64 characters in the Sample Title field and all four of the Sample Description fields You can enter up to 16 characters in the Sample ID Type and Sample Geometry fields and up to 24 characters in the Collector Name field The Information Fields The information fields let you enter the Sample ID Type sample Quantity its Uncer tainty and Units the Sample Geometry and the user defined percent Random Error and percent Systematic Error all of which are used in calculating the uncertainty for the nuclide line activity as described in the Basic Calculations section of the Algo rithms chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual Buildup Type Selecting None will allow entry of the Sample Date and time that is the time you col lected the sample The Begin Date is not available for this Type Selecting Deposition or Irradiation lets you enter the Begin Date and time and End Date and time for your sample s deposition or irradiation time Load Cal The Load Cal button lets you load a calibration file CAL into the datasource You have the option of loading the source s Energy Shape calibration Efficiency calibra tion or both The Info button displays a dialog box which shows descriptive informa tion for the currently selected file if any is available More The More button will no
279. ort Window to the system clipboard so you can paste the data in another application such as a word processor or a presentation program Copy Contents to Clipboard This command copies the entire contents of the Report Window to the system clip board Clear Contents Selecting this command will remove all data from the Report Window Load Existing Report This command loads a selected RPT file into the Report Window If there is already a report in the window the loaded file will overwrite it Execution of this command re quires that the Report Window not be minimized Default Size If you have changed the size of the Report Window either by dragging a window bor der or by using one of the sizing commands in this menu this command will return the window to its default size 173 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Maximize The Maximize command will enlarge the Report Window to full screen allowing you to read the data more easily Minimize This command removes the Report Window from the display and maximizes the spec tral display Datasource Menu The Datasource menu doesn t appear in the Menu Bar until at least one datasource has been opened It can show up to eight datasource file names If more than eight datasources are currently open the More item will be added to the menu Selecting More brings up a list of all open datasources letting you choose the one of interest Fig ure 125 The maximum number of d
280. ortcut icon anywhere on the desktop and if you like you can rename it Starting the Virtual Data Manager All Genie 2000 programs require the Virtual Data Manager VDM program to be run ning before they can be started If the VDM is not already running when an application is launched it will be started automatically This may cause a brief delay when launch ing an application Uninstalling the Genie Software Note The Genie 2000 software components must be uninstalled in the order in which they were installed to ensure that all modified Genie 2000 and system files are returned to their proper state To uninstall all or part of the Genie 2000 software 1 Click on Start Menu 2 Select Settings 3 Select Control Panel 4 Select the Add Remove Programs icon 5 In the scroll down list of programs in the Install Uninstall pane highlight the Genie 2000 component s you want to uninstall 6 Select the Add Remove button to remove the highlighted items 263 Genie 2000 Configuration B Genie 2000 Configuration Though most users won t need to customize their Genie 2000 setup the information in this chapter is useful for configuring Genie 2000 for specific situations Genie 2000 Environment Settings Starting with V1 2 Genie 2000 stores all its environment settings in the registry as opposed to defining environment variables via SET statements in AUTOEXEC BAT The registry key location of these settings will be HKEY_
281. ou have only one Ethernet adapter in your computer If multiple adapters are present the adapter binding can be determined from the Bindings dialog The name of the protocol can be clicked on which brings up a list of adapters it is bound to Highlight the adapter s which do not require the Canberra NDIS 5 0 SNAP Protocol driver and click on Disable Click on Close to save these new bindings 10 Exit the Local Area Connection Properties dialog by clicking Close follow the prompts for your Windows distribution and reboot your system Installing the USB Driver In order to communicate with Canberra s USB enabled devices MCAs a special driver must be installed Follow these steps to install the USB driver 1 Plug the MCA into the USB 2 Windows will prompt you for the USB driver diskette 3 Insert the Genie 2000 CD into the CD ROM drive 4 Specify the ClUsb directory on the CD ROM 5 Click OK It is not necessary to reboot when installation is complete Installation of the PCI MCA Driver Windows 2000 and XP are Plug and Play operating systems Therefore after a PCI MCA i e ASA 100 is installed in the system and the system is restarted the operat 261 Software Installation ing system will automatically detect the presence of the MCA and prompt the user to navigate to a directory that contains the Canberra PCI driver The directory will be found on your distribution media in an operating system specific dir
282. ound where they should be the value of the Gaussian Sensitivity should be decreased 131 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Maximum Number of Iterations This value is the maximum number of iterations the peak search will perform when fit ting a Gaussian function to a multiplet The minimum value is 0 a reasonable value is 10 FWHM Based Rejection If the FWHM Based Rejection checkbox is enabled the standard peak search function will reject singlet peaks whose measured FWHM expected FWHM ratio is less than the FWHM Rejection Ratio setting This option is very useful if you typically analyze spectra at low sensitivities e g less than 3 FWHM Rejection Ratio This value specifies the minimum valid measured FWHM expected FWHM ratio that will be accepted for a singlet peak If the ratio for a peak is less than this value the peak will be rejected This parameter is used only if the FWHM Based Rejection function is enabled Minimum value is 0 maximum value is 1 0 Fit Singlets Fit Singlets controls singlet peak analysis If the checkbox is enabled singlet peaks are fitted to a single peak Gaussian function otherwise singlet values are calculated by the total peak area method Show Regions of Interest If the Show Regions of Interest checkbox is checked the ROIs calculated during the area analysis are copied to the display ROIs section of the datasource thus causing the ROIs to appear in the MCA View Control win
283. oves across the spectrum synchronized with the dwell time When collect ends either by preset sweeps reached or manual Stop you can place the Left and Right markers on either side of the peak of interest and then use the Set 57 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 58 ROI button to pick up those positions and using the values of scan start and end convert those positions into a discrimination ROIs SCA LLD and SCA ULD that will be used for subsequent MCS acquisition Or you can try again moving your scan start and or scan end in so that the board will see a smaller part of the full scale allowing you to get better resolution Selecting Status shows a Hardware Status Report for all devices MCA and program mable front end electronics associated with the current hardware datasource Figure 40 shows a typical Status Report which includes device type serial number and any programmable settings that are obtainable from each device An asterisk next to the parameter means that an unexpected setting was read from the device Though the majority of the entries in the Status Report are direct reflections of the MCA Input Definition Editor settings or the spectral display Adjust settings a few of them are explained in greater detail in the Status Screen Entries on page 282 The Update button sends all programmable parameters to the devices and verifies them updates the Status Screen If the display s Status field had been changed t
284. ows a typical power manager adjust screen The controls you see on your adjust screen may vary depending on which power manager you assigned to this datasource Stab C HYPS PwrMar Gain C Filter Standby del e See a a Figure 38 Typical Power Manager Adjust Dialog Power Mode Click on a Power mode button to select one of the device s power modes The Battery Full mode keeps the system electronics on at all times using power from the device s batteries 55 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 56 The Battery Save mode minimizes battery drain by turning off some of the device s circuits whenever possible When data acquisition is initiated the system changes to the Battery Full mode and data acquisition begins after the Acquisition Delay time has elapsed which allows time for the high voltage to reach its preset value and for the internal electronics to become thermally stable When acquisition is finished the system returns to the Battery Save mode In the AC Full mode the device operates from battery port A If the AC Power Adapter is connected to this port it will supply power to the device The AC Adapter s User s Manual tells you how to connect it to the battery port with the supplied connecting cable If ac power is lost the Power Manager will automatically switch to port B allowing its battery to continue supplying power When ac power is restored the Power Manager will switch back to port A
285. ox causes the chosen parameter s to be used for all multiplet peaks instead of allowing the value to vary for best fit If either or both of these check boxes is not checked the specified pa rameter will be allowed to vary Fit Singlets Normally the Peak Area routine fits only multiplet peaks but if you check the Fit Singlets check box singlets will also be fitted rather than calculated using the summa tion method Display ROIs If the Display ROIs check box is checked the ROIs resulting from the analysis will be copied to the Display ROIs block in the datasource The ROI color conventions are Color 1 Singlet peaks Color 2 Multiplet peaks Color 3 Not used Color 4 Not used Reject Zero Area Peaks If the Reject zero area peaks check box is checked any peaks with negative or zero peak areas will be deleted from the peak results table Residual Search When the Perform Search checkbox is selected the algorithm will examine the current datasource s ROIs for hidden components in a peak region those that would other wise not be found by the Peak Locate algorithm A new peak will be added at the highest residual which is separated from the nearest established peak by at least the specified Minimum Separation in FWHM and the limits for that ROI will be re established This process will be repeated until there are no more peaks to be added In most situations the residual search works best when the Fixed
286. pecify the material for the container click on its name in the list e g glass then click on the upper arrow lt to copy that choice and its density to the Container Wall Density and Material fields Next click on the sample material e g water then click on the lower arrow to copy that data to the Source Density and Material fields In Figure 156 glass was selected for the beaker and water for the sample Editing the Detector and Sample Dimensions LabSOCS Template SIMPLIFIED_MARINELLI_BEAKER Delete Help m Template Version y Detector and End Cap r Geometry Information OK default Example M Description Glass_Beaker_1 Diam ggg Length fi5o Comment Pan 123 456 Cancel Set Sample via r Dimensions Scale Help Dimensions mm om inch C Volume ml C Weight g foot Cm Show Template Geometry Elements Dimensions Density and Material p lt Select from List Description ai a2 a3 ar Jas gona Materia CallMuEdior 45 Container Wall 26 gass lt acrylic aluminum cellulos 1 water lt concrete Source Detector Figure 156 Add Geometry Information The density values from the Materials Library entries for the selected materials are au tomatically inserted into the Geometry Description If necessary the density can be edited to better fit the sample CAUTION Carefully review the default density to assure that it is appro p
287. pee KONEET E a kE ERE a 167 Interactive NID cce 0 la ai ee Oe a ee A 167 Geometry Composer s s x ei sag ba ee Se oe we ee a e ee SoS ow 168 SID goa sua a tages i al eae how wee a he hog dean gh A haa oe de 169 A sendy Wee th Ge ude arava este a are whats Gy ee pee eer se ake We eee 169 Datasource OVEIVIEW soe co ke ee eRe a Oe be Cm A 170 Acquisition Data ocio gas bee he Soe OR OG whee She A 170 Analysis Dala eave a whee Boge eee a a we Gas goes Od gee aes me Ag 4 171 Calibration Data s seo e oie se Paw ee A See RRR ee eS 172 Report WINdOW eli id es Ae a hh a ek aE ee 173 Datasource Menu 5 3 6 66 4 he AGH eR AA ee aR GE OOS 174 Show All DatasOurces lt 5 cote as aie a SOA a ORG ae Se OS 175 4 Using the Nuclide Library Editor 176 Getting Started s aia eee ee SAE Gee DA A ht A a E E 176 vii viii Editing a Nuclide Library ee 177 Opening a Nuclide Library sos s aa waoe e o e 177 Th Nueliide Data na kor e a a el oe Gh a a dar G 178 The Energy Line Data s pe bee ee RE Re ares ea 180 The Options Ment c sens sa ma kG see Bee A Re A ae a a we 182 EROI gt 20 Be ee ee a a eee he Ree o 182 Energy Units pe e boa ER RR eR He RE HERES RE SERRE PER 183 MPC URIS i oe ios dior Bob dane ee ete eek eh ee ce J ee a a 183 MPC Values seca re GAM Gea SSR ESS REDO ESE OE See A ES 184 Bil DAC Units mar od soe gg ke wc ails GO e la wh A ele eae ah 185 EMI DAC Vales us cio aa ge e ad
288. play an error message If the definition is valid you ll see a report like the one in Figure 160 N glass beaker GeomComposer Fie Edit Efficiency Curve View Options Help nst 6 MBamMKE kR uM 2an Al Geometry Composer Report Date Monday June 17 2002 Description Glass _Beaker_l Comment Part_123 456 File Name c igenieZkiisocsidatalgeometryllaboratoryisimplified marinelli_beaker glass beaker geo Software Labgocs Template SIMPLIFIED_MARINELLI_BEAKER Version default Detector Example Environment Temperature 22 C Pressure 760 mmHg Rel Humidity Integration Convergence 1 00 MDRPN 2 4 CRPN 2 4 Dimensions mm Geometry Compon a ae a at as d6 Material D gftm3 B Cone Container Wall 1 00 glass 2 60 Detector Well 105 00 Container Diameter 160 00 Source 120 00 Source Detector 5 00 List of energies for efficiency curve generation 100 0 150 0 200 0 300 0 500 0 700 0 1000 0 1400 0 2000 0 For Help press F1 Figure 160 The Geometry Composer Report 217 Using the Geometry Composer Note If you open an existing definition in the Geometry Composer you ll imme diately see the Geometry Composer Report for that definition Editing a Geometry Definition If need to change any of the parameters shown in the report select Edit Dimensions and Detector to open the editing window Figure 153 on page 210 Editing the Sample Environment In the LabSOCS ISOCS efficienc
289. ption software if that has not already been done 2 Energy calibrate the detector to be used as described in Calibrate on page 59 3 Create a Geometry Description for the sample analysis configuration that will be used as described in Chapter 8 Using the Geometry Composer on page 208 4 Perform a Peak to Total Calibration for that geometry as described in Peak to Total on page 73 5 Perform an Efficiency Calibration for that geometry as described in Efficiency on page 79 CAUTION If you performed a source based empirical efficiency cali bration and your calibration source includes nuclides which give rise to cascade summing e g Y Co Eu you should refer to Appendix D Correcting an Efficiency Calibra tion for Cascade Summing on page 284 Note Calibrations performed by the optional Model S573 ISOCS or Model 574 LabSOCS applications do not suffer from cascade summing effects and therefore do not need to be corrected as described in Appendix D 206 Performing the Analysis Performing the Analysis Once the prerequisites have been met you are ready to use Cascade Summing Correc tion in your analyses The details on the procedure can be found in the NID with In terference Correction on page 145 As you perform the procedure outlined there you will find a reference to the Coinci dence Library used for the Cascade Summing Correction calculations The library in cludes e Nucl
290. puter name is translated into an IP address Either select the Specify an IP address radio button and enter in a valid IP address and subnet mask e g IP address of 200 200 200 1 and a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 or select the Obtain an IP address automatically radio button if this computer resides on a network which uses TCP IP and employs dynamic IP addressing It is recommended that you contact your network administrator for guidance in setting up this portion of TCP IP since IP addresses must be unique on a network Select OK when setup of TCP IP properties is complete 3 When all required files have been copied and the installation is complete you will be reminded to reboot your system to complete the installation process and will be given the option of restarting your computer immediately Select No to the restart computer question since some additional setup steps are still required 249 Software Installation The Genie 2000 Network Configuration File as pointed to by the environment variable CINETCFG typically named G2K_VDM NCF must be edited as follows Edit the first line of this file to remove the text LOCAL as shown below this indicates that the computer name IP address information is defined via the network settings information and not defaulted to Local 127 0 0 1 Original 1 local 1B pipe datasrce 1C pipe configur Edited 1 1B pipe datasrce 1C pipe configur If access to
291. r future sessions The Unload Process To unload a Database click on the Database menu s Unload from command which will bring up the Dialog Box shown in Figure 27 If several choices are listed there are multiple definitions in the database 39 MCA Input Definition Wd Unload Definition from Database Figure 27 The Unload Dialog Click on the one you want to unload then click on the Unload from button Note that this menu item is disabled if the MCA Runtime Configuration Database is currently being used by another application 40 File Menu 3 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis This operations reference for both the basic Model S500 502 504 Basic Spectroscopy Software and the Model S501 Gamma Analysis Option lists all of their commands and functions by menu and submenu For a description of the application s user interface please refer to The Genie 2000 Tutorials Manual File Menu The File menu lets you open close or save a datasource save it under another name save as print or copy a plot of the current spectrum print the contents of the Report Window open save or delete workspace files and exit the program Open Datasource The Open Datasource command displays a dialog Figure 28 which allows you to open a datasource Open Datasource Teste E gt CAMFILES A 4m1 000 cnt la Amblank cnf B Bkadt cnt a Cal cnf a Cemipf cnf D Naidemo cnf la Nbsstd cnf a Put000 cnf
292. r reject a library peak in the spectrum Default 2 5 for both Ge and Nal Constant specifies the constant term of the MDA equation used to accept or reject a library peak in the spectrum Default 3 for both Ge and Nal Generate Report If the Generate Report box is checked a predefined report will be generated when this phase is executed and will be displayed in the application s report window The report is defined in the AEF file as the Report Template Name and Section Name asso ciated with this phase Library Locate Simple The Simple Library Peak Locate setup screen is shown in Figure 93 The analysis will include the library energies included within the Search Region or that are equal to ei ther region limit The current energy calibration will be used to determine whether a li brary peak falls within the Search Region 129 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 130 Simple Library Peak Locate Setup x Search Region Start channel fi Stop channel 4036 Nuclide Library CAGENIE2K4CAM FILESASTDLIB NLB Select Tolerance 1 00 keV Energy C FWHM J Add to existing results I Auto generate ROIs ROI Width 1 00 FWHM I Check for adjacent peaks I Generate Report Figure 93 The Simple Library Locate Setup Nuclide Library The name of the library in the current datasource will be shown in the Nuclide Library text box To select another library click on Select then choose a library file
293. r the matches the less stringent the matching process and the more likely that inappropriate matches might be made and therefore the more restrictive the criteria to consider Matching sufficient Average Shift FWHM Fraction gives the average from all of the listed energies and indicates the required NID Tolerance FWHM to be able to perform a successful NID analysis While this gives the average value for all of the found energies as a general characteristic the individual values given for each line in the tabular data indicate which lines in particular might have trouble being properly identified via NID analysis Percent Gain Shift Tolerance is the measured Percent Gain Shift that must be attained to have a status of Completed Successfully The measured shift must be less than the tolerance value Percent Gain Shift is calculated from the weighted average of all of the correction factors of the listed matches and indicates how much gain has shifted Each correction factor is weighted according to respective uncertainties Datasource Energy Calibration indicates the current energy calibration equation Calculated Energy Calibration is determined using the true energies and their matched peak channels The current energy calibration quadratic term if any is kept constant during the fit 105 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis File Gain Adjust File Gain Adjust Figure 77 is available only for file datasources Executing this rou tine
294. rallel or infrared port or set up this computer so that other computers can connect to it Figure 189 Selecting the Network Connection Type 256 Non Network VDM Configuration 6 Do not configure any connection devices if this is a stand alone system See Figure 190 Click on Next New Connection Wizard Devices for Incoming Connections You can choose the devices your computer uses to accept incoming connections Select the check box next to each device you want to use for incoming connections Connection devices Direct Parallel LPT1 Figure 190 Selecting Devices for Incoming Connection 7 Select Allow Virtual Private Connections as shown in Figure 191 Click on Next New Connection Wizard Incoming Virtual Private Network YPN Connection Another computer can connect to yours through a YPN connection Virtual private connections to your computer through the Internet are possible only if your computer has a known name or IP address on the Internet IF you allow YPN connections Windows will modify the Internet Connection Firewall to allow your computer to send and receive VPN packets Do you want to allow virtual private connections to this computer Allow virtual private connections O Do not allow virtual private connections Figure 191 Selecting the VPN Connection 257 Software Installation Select all users you wish to have access rights to the network At a minimum the Loc
295. rases the current Certificate File from the editing window allowing you to enter a completely new Certificate File Viewing the Original Certificate If you have attached a bitmap copy of the original certificate file to a CTF file page 196 you can view it with the View Original Certificate command Exiting the Editor When you are finished with the editor click on the Exit command in the File menu to close it Launching the Editor 6 Using the Analysis Sequence Editor Genie 2000 includes an Analysis Sequence Editor which allows you to create or edit analysis sequences that you can use to automatically analyze your spectra Launching the Editor To launch the editor type ASE at the command line When you press ENTER you ll see a window similar to the one in Figure 146 i Analysis Sequence Editor Untitled p x File Options Help r Sequence Title Sequence Preferences Step Selection Edit Steps Current Steps Peak Locate Efficiency Correction Nuclide Identification ParentD aughterCorrection Detection Limits Post NID Processing Reporting Select Algorithm Save Datasource of Setup Algorithm Figure 146 The Analysis Sequence Editor Window You can also start the editor with an ASF file loaded by typing for instance ASE lt filepath gt MDA_sho asf Or you can launch the editor then use the File Open command to open an existing ASF file for editing Figure 147 show
296. re installation specifies the number of retries attempted by the AIM driver when it encounters an Ethernet commu nications error The default value for this setting if not de fined is 3 This setting may need to be increased on Ethernet networks that contain heavy traffic 267 Genie 2000 Configuration SPACE This is a fully specified pathname pointing to the location of the ISOCS LabSOCS SPACE INI file SET SPACE C GENIE2K ISOCS DATA ISOCS_HOME This is a fully specified pathname pointing to the root ISOCS directory SET ISOCS_HOME C GENIE2k ASEQNUM This is the name of the last file stored by an Analysis Se quence file save Used only if the Automatic File Naming feature has been turned on SET ASEQNUM lt value gt where lt value gt 00000001 99999999 File Formats The Genie 2000 Report Template files Analysis Engine files Network Configuration file and Workspace files can be configured to your own requirements with the infor mation in this part of the manual Report Template Files Report Template Files are ASCH files that govern the content and format of report data as generated by the Acquisition and Analysis windows as well as the Report job command the location of these files is defined by the environment variable RTPLFILES which is described on page 266 Please refer to the Report Module and Template Files chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual for details of file content and syntax An
297. recalibration 72 Energy recalibration 70 Automatic Gain adjust 3 vara ir de BSS 98 HVPS tuton cesos ei 55 pole zero 2 ee 54 VFScommand 110 Background subtract algorithm 139 Baseline restorer control 53 Basic nuclide library data 178 Batteries status reportentry 283 Battery power ModeS 55 BLR CONTON ssip amp eae hb we od E eee 53 Buildup type sample info 161 Calibration Efficiency s o 4 ese s ex ges SR SS 89 Energy cursor method 70 Energy full 63 69 Energy marker method 70 Load ai 2 e834 643824 68444 3 161 Preferences osa soe eS 60 SEIS coria eee Ds 60 Setup function 00 60 315 Calibration data overview 172 Cascade correction Data library sc ocios 207 Prerequisites 0 206 Cascade summing correction explanationof so es ccce reres 284 Certificate Partialtile a he ete amp E He 65 81 Save AS ee ee 65 81 Certificate file Adding anew line 198 Creatinganew 198 Deleting anentry 198 Editing the line data 197 Energy UNS 194 Extracting energy lines 193 Full i ee eae rasa 65 81 Header data 196 Library extract o 193 Line data coros reses dad 196 Opening A isis ale Ge a 195 PEDO 6 vehi ow e eo 198 Certifi
298. red Factory Assembled Systems For complete systems provided by Canberra the hardware and software have been in stalled and tested at the factory After setting up the system go to Chapter 2 MCA In put Definition Preliminary configuration of inputs will have been done at the factory for testing but you will probably want to change some of the initial definition for ex ample the detector names for your own operation Doing it Yourself If you are putting the system together yourself Canberra recommends that you follow the sequence presented here Basic System Requirements Successful installation and operation of Genie 2000 software requires at a minimum Computer Industry standard computer with a Pentium 233 processor and CD ROM drive is required Operating Systems Windows NT V4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP RAM A minimum of 64 MB Windows NT 2000 or 128 MB Windows XP is recommended but in the Genie 2000 en vironment more memory will generally improve perfor mance Hard Disk 100 MB free disk space for Genie 2000 software and sam ple data file storage Display VGA color 800 x 600 resolution minimum 1024 x 768 recommended 1 Due to extensible nature of the CAM file system you can expect data files including all parameters analysis results library information and calibrations to average 80 100 KB each 239 Software Installation Security Key The security key supplied with the Genie 2000 sof
299. red in microcuries you ll have to enter a Conversion Factor to convert microcuries to your unit The conversion factor must include any necessary mass or volume con version as might happen if Concentration is selected and its unit is different from that of the current sample Action Level Derived Units m Action Level 1 Units i Activity Conversion i C Concentration Factor Action Level 2 Units C Activity Conversion Factor Concentration Cancel Help Figure 136 The Action Levels Unit Dialog Activity vs Concentration Select Activity if the action level is to be based on total activity such as uCi or Con centration if the action level is to be based on activity per unit quantity such as Bq kg Examples Example 1 If the Action Level 1 Unit is microcuries and it is activity based Conver sion Factor 1 must be set to 1 Example 2 If the Action Level 2 Unit is Bq kg it is concentration based and sample quantity values have been entered in grams g the Conversion Factor 2 is 0 000027 0 001 or 0 027 186 The Options Menu Action Level Derived Values With a nuclide library open and appropriate Action Level Units defined the dialog box shown in Figure 137 will let you set the Derived Nuclide parameters and Action Levels for a nuclide Note that the Action Level units displayed are those which were defined in Action Level Units on page 186 Action Level Derived
300. rehensive spectrum analysis for alpha and gamma spectroscopy quality assurance system automation and turnkey packages for specific dedicated applica tions A block diagram of the Genie 2000 architecture is shown in Figure 1 The core of the Genie 2000 software is a module known as the Virtual Data Manager or VDM The VDM manages all information flow within the system It is responsible for communications with both data files and MCA devices and for presenting infor mation from them to the subsequent layers of software in a consistent manner Thus the VDM makes it possible for the user to operate on all spectra whether from a data Introduction Gamma Acquisition amp Analysis Alpha Acquisition amp Analysis Job Batch Environment command line Quality Assurance Compute Modules MED Setup Virtual Data Manager VDM MCA Input Definition Editor Physical Devices CAM Files Figure 1 The Genie 2000 s Architecture file or from one of the 10 or so different MCA hardware products supported with consistent display user interface and analysis VDM and its attached hardware drivers maintain all the low level communications to MCAs as well as data transfer from MCAs to data files The VDM is designed to communicate to subsequent layers of software via a layer called inter process communication or IPC IPC is
301. rent Gamma Acquisition and Analysis GAA settings to a Workspace file A workspace file contains the specific datasources detectors and or spectrum files that will be loaded which datasource will be the currently displayed datasource and other display settings 45 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Select Open Workspace Figure 31 to open a workspace file which will set up the Gamma Acquisition and Analysis GAA window See Workspace Files on page 271 for a detailed description of a workspace file Or in in Windows Explorer you can navigate to C Genie2k CAMfiles and click on a Gamma Workspace GWS file to automatically start the GAA application and load the selected workspace file Look in o CAMFILES 4 Eg WS Cernipf qws MEM DETOL gws File name Files of type Gamma Workspace Files qws E Cancel A Figure 31 The Open Workspace Dialog Save Workspace Select Save Workspace to save the current workspace file If the workspace file al ready exists you will be asked to confirm that you want to overwrite it Delete Workspace Select Delete Workspace to delete the selected workspace file You will be asked for confirmation before the file is deleted Exit Select Exit to close Genie 2000 If you have an open but unsaved datasource you will be asked 1f you want to save it 46 MCA Menu MCA Menu The MCA menu which is available only when the currently selected datasource is a Detect
302. riate for the actual material used Set Sample Via By default the Geometry Composer bases its calculations on the sample s Dimen sions Click on Volume or Weight to select another basis for the calculations The selected basis is inserted into the Dimensions table and an entry box for its value is enabled Once the dimensions of the sample and its container have been entered see Sample Dimensions below the value for the volume or weight is set automatically based on the container dimensions and the sample density previously entered in the Density and Material section of the window Dimensions Scale All dimensions default to the unit selected in Default Parameters for New Geome tries on page 231 Use the buttons here in Dimensions Scale to select another unit Note that the units selected apply to the dimensions for both the detector and the sam ple CAUTION Changing units during data entry will convert all existing en tries to the new units 213 Using the Geometry Composer Sample Dimensions The Dimensions table in the middle of the window is used to enter the dimensions of the sample and its container There is one row in the table for each element in the defi nition of the geometry and one or more columns of data Show Template Click on the Show Template button to see a drawing like the one in Figure 157 showing the elements and relationships of the geometry currently being defined Picture Scale Ce
303. ronment using ANALYZE EXE directly or via REXX regardless of this preference setting Prompt to Select Datasource If you check the Prompt to select datasource box you ll be prompted to choose a datasource when the sequence begins execution If the box is not checked the analysis sequence will use the detector or file datasource that is open and active when the analysis sequence is run 202 Editing a Sequence File Note No prompt will be issued if the analysis sequence is executed in a command line environment using ANALYZE EXE directly or via REXX regardless of this preference setting Analysis Sequence Preferences r Efficiency Calibration TF Import calibration at execution T Prompt to select datasource E Promot romp T Edit sample information Automatic file naming for Save Datasource steps Ese no q r Cascade Correction T Enable Cascade Correction Prompt for Geometry Composer file Cancel Help Figure 149 Analysis Sequence Preferences Automatic File Naming Check the Automatic file naming box to cause the system to automatically create a new file name each time the Save Datasource step is executed The files are saved in the standard CAMFILES subdirectory and are named sequentially If the box is not checked you will have to specify a file name when the sequence is run The first time this function is executed the file will be named 00000001 CNF and the count
304. roper algorithm for each step e Setting the parameters for each algorithm e Editing the parameters for a step In addition you can set a number of parameters separately for each analysis sequence Unique Parameters Note that the steps listed in the following table have parameters that can be defined uniquely each time they occur in a sequence 200 Editing a Sequence File Step Parameters Peak Locate and Peak Area Start channel and Stop channel Save Datasource File name Save as type and Description Report All parameters other than Activity Units and Multiplier Common Parameters All other sequence step parameters are common they cannot be specified independ ently If there are multiple instances of one of these steps in a sequence all instances of that step will have the same parameters Insert Step To add a step to the sequence highlight a step in the Step Selection list box then press the Insert Step button The step will be added to the Current Steps list Delete Step To remove a step from the sequence highlight the step in the Current Steps list that you want to remove then press the Delete Step button Select Algorithm To choose an algorithm for the Current Step press the Select Algorithm button For instance if you had inserted and highlighted the Peak Locate phase step pressing the Select Algorithm button would bring up the window in Figure 148 which shows
305. s Standard Installation This is the choice that most people will use The Genie 2000 application is installed with predefined defaults no further user selections are required Select the Standard button then click Next The application will now be installed When the installation is complete some final instructions will be displayed Custom Installation The components that comprise the Genie 2000 application are installed in sub directo ries in the installation directory specified earlier in the procedure If these default sub directories are not acceptable for a particular installation you can change the loca tion directory where these components are installed In addition Setup allows you to modify the values of the following environment set tings SAD_TIMEOUT DS_LOGON PSET_DELAY ADVISE_HOLD and HDW_STATUS See Appendix B Genie 2000 Configuration for a description of these settings 1 Select the Custom button then click Next or press the ENTER key 2 A dialog box will appear Select the components whose directories you want to change When you have made all your selections click Next or press the ENTER key 3 For each component selected a dialog box will prompt you to enter the drive and directory in which to install the component Change the drive directory as necessary and click Next or press ENTER After all selected components are complete the application will be installed 4 After installing the applica
306. s Certificate If you highlight one or more nuclides then choose Save as Certificate you ll create a partial certificate file CTP which can be used for energy calibration This certificate file is similar to the full certificate file CTF created in the Certifi cate File Editor page 192 lacking only the assay date and time and the activity units for each nuclide Append to Existing Calibration When adding energy points to the current datasource from a file such as in construct ing a composite energy file there may be common energy points in the two files If the Append to Existing Calibration checkbox is selected the system will ask if you want to append to the existing calibration If you answer yes it will tell you each time it finds a duplicate entry You can select OK to save this limited data as a partial certificate file If you want to add the missing information making this a full certificate file highlight one or more nuclides then choose Additional Info to enter the additional data 65 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Additional Nuclide Information In addition to entering the nuclide s assay date and time and its activity units this screen Figure 47 lets you enter the percent uncertainty and change the activity units Additional Nuclide Information General Information Assay Date at Activity Units fuCi v Conversion Factor Nuclide Uncertainty Nam
307. s the editor with MDA_sho asf loaded In the Algorithms and Current Steps lists you 1l see some steps with an asterisk before their names such as Re 1 See the Batch Procedure Reference chapter of the Model S561 Batch Tools Support Reference Manual for details of the ASE command 199 Using the Analysis Sequence Editor porting Standard These steps have parameters that control how the sequence s out put will be presented Wj Analysis Sequence Editor Mda_sho asf File Options Help Sequence Title uba Analysis w Report Sequence Preferences Step Selection Edit Steps Current Steps Peak Locate Insert Step Reporting Standard Peak Area _ treerstes Peak Locate Unidentified 2nd Diff Area Correction _ Peak Area Sum Non Linear LSQ Fit Efficiency Correction Delete Step Reporting Standard Nuclide Identification Efficiency Correction Standard ParentD aughterCorrection Nuclide Identification NID yw Interf Cor Detection Limits Detection Limits Currie MDA Post NID Processing Reporting Standard Reporting Select Algorithm Reporting Standard Save Datasource gt ff Setup Algorithm of Figure 147 An ASF File Opened for Editing Editing a Sequence File The editor allows you to create a new sequence change an existing sequence s list of steps or edit any of the steps by e Inserting or deleting steps e Selecting the p
308. s will default to the ones last chosen from the An alyze Menu CAUTION Analysis sequence ASF files contain their own algorithm definitions It is your responsibility to ensure that the algo rithms called in these sequences are the same as the algo rithms used for efficiency calibration Failure to do so may greatly affect the accuracy of the results 91 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Use results The Use results button will retrieve peak analysis results directly from the current datasource and populate the list box This button will not be enabled if peak area anal ysis results are not present in the datasource Show Select the Show button to display the efficiency calibration curve as a graph Please refer to Efficiency Show on page 93 for a complete discussion and an illustration of this function Supported Curves All supported efficiency curves will be generated so that any one can be used for later analysis The supported curves are Dual Polynomial using In of energies for low and high curve on each side of a crossover point A minimum of 2 order In In polynomial is allowed and gt For Dual in the single curve mode and for the high energy curve in the two curve mode a maximum of 9 order In In polynomial is allowed gt For the low energy curve in the two curve mode a maximum of 5 order 1n In polynomial is allowed Linear Polynomial using linear 1 E coefficients A minimum of 2 order
309. save the partial template Note A User defined Template should only be saved with those parameter values which will be constant from one geometry to the next because those values can t be edited when that User defined Template is used as the basis for a new geometry definition You ll now see Figure 158 where you should change untitled to an appropriate 215 Using the Geometry Composer name for the new template then click Add to add the new definition to the list of available template definitions Edit Template Versions Library x Name of new template version urtiteg Available Versions default Figure 158 Saving a User Template Selecting a User Defined Template To define a geometry based on any partial template you have saved 1 Select File New 2 Select the same generic definition used previously in this example Simplified Marinelli Beaker then click on OK 3 This will display the dialog shown in Figure 159 where you can select the custom definition you just saved as your base template then continue as described in Detector and End Cap on page 210 216 Verifying the Geometry Definition Select Template Version Glass_Beaker user Figure 159 Selecting a User defined Template Verifying the Geometry Definition When you ve completed the geometry definition click on OK The Composer will verify the definition and if a potential problem is found dis
310. se cursor over an identi fied peak will display the peak s Nuclide ID Energy Net Area with percent error and Activity optional in a bubble Figure 83 e The Energy Units page 116 displayed in the bubble are those specified for the entire system e The activity units displayed in the bubble are chosen in Interactive NID page 121 in the Display Preferences dialog The activity value will be correctly displayed for the selected unit but the unit itself is not displayed The two nuclide identification source radio buttons are enabled only if one of the Peak Labeling checkboxes is checked Library Lines Choose the Library Lines button to display peak bubble information from the Nuclide Library chosen in Interactive NID setup page 121 When you use Library Lines the bubble s Activity values will be estimated Analysis Results Choose the Analysis Results button to display the Activity from the current NID results for this datasource Show Activity Check Show Activity to add Activity data to the Peak Information bubble Figure 83 This checkbox is enabled only if Display Peak Information is checked 115 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Energy Units Select the Energy Units to be used for reporting energy in the display Select Other to use the calibration units and conversion factor stored in the current datasource Plot Mode Normal shows a maximum of 1024 data points For example in a 4K spectrum the plot routine
311. sed in the Peak Information window E Interactive NID Setup Tolerance 1 00 keV Energy C FWHM NID Library C GENIE2K CAMFILES STOLIB NLB Select Activity Units uci C Bq C Other J C pCi C kBq C MBq Conversion factor 1 0 Cancel Help Figure 86 The Interactive NID Setup Tolerance This is used to specify the value to be used in deciding if an energy line in the given li brary matches the peak being searched for Energy FWHM The energy units for the Peak Match Tolerance value Choose Energy for a fixed tol erance or FWHM for a variable tolerance Peak Match Enter the Tolerance value for peak matching If you choose Energy Units enter the value in keV If you choose variable the tolerance becomes the number entered multi plied by the FWHM calculated at the energy of the peak NID Library Select the default Nuclide Library to be used when Library Lines is used for the Nu clide Identification Source page 115 121 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Activity Units The selected Activity Unit determines the activity units used for reporting in the Peak Information window When you choose one of the standard activity units uCi pCi Bq kBq mBq the correct Conversion Factor referenced to 1 uCi is automatically supplied If none of the standard units is acceptable select Other then type a label in the text box and enter the unit s Conversion Factor Analyze Menu 122 The Analyze
312. ses These may in some cases cause certain faults Some polarity values as set to a predetermined value 291 The InSpector 2000 Simulator HVPS Reset This is implemented but currently there is no method to cause a voltage fault Inhibit Signal Polarity Polarity Power Manager Standby Delay Gain PUR Guard FDisc Setting FDisc Mode Auto Input Polarity Inhibit Polarity Inhibit Mode Inhibit Setting ICR Gain Attenuator LT Trim LTC Mode LLD Mode Auto This is used See LLD section but does not simulate an actual Auto Mode Filter BLR mode FDisc Shaping Preamp Type Trigger Select Inhibit 292 F Line Activity Consistency Evaluator The activities calculated for all associated energies line activities for a given multi line radionuclide should be the same within statistical variation The Line Ac tivity Consistency Evaluator LACE facilitates analysis of this characteristic and helps in assessing how to improve the gamma analysis LACE first searches the analy sis file for nuclides with multiple gamma lines e g Co 134Cs 152Eu Fe 35U 238U equilibrium progeny 7 Ra equilibrium progeny 42Th equilibrium progeny For each of these multi line nuclides the ratios between each line activity and a refer ence activity weighted mean and key line are calculated The energy vs line act
313. ses 103 Print Repot NOW vox coses sarria ce eee dba He aa 103 Return to Setup Save e ece e d ea wae enap a p Ea ee a a a E E a e a 103 General Information s ias eea a e pi ei a ee 104 Data Text BOK o ec ceo ake bi ba Re RE ee OE EHR ERE Re SO 104 File Gam Adj St oe cai ms ee A ee a a a a a 106 Current Energy Calibration 2 spama ee ee 106 Goal Calibration Files s s e e ei yaen eead eea OD e eee eee 106 Goal Energy Calibration mires RY e a 106 Reanalyze After Adjustment s o s esos sc oea oa iep 0000000002 eee 107 Lod se samak a a a a iE e Br dee aE evel he Bagi BAR i eaa Reet a a aain a heed 107 SOIE as yy ey eo ok dere eae oe eee R n a al Gyre es ena eae E 108 Display Menus se c toere ca ee eR erta ERE HE MESO A 108 Expandi meee rs OG bose eee Bde ee Gee a he Re 108 SCE 4 Alar E Ge a bs oe Sp ecw een es pe See oe ee ate 110 COMPAS s s eee Pb eee Res eee Rb eee ee ee Code ee eae heed Ea 110 OD a Bch a e pas o ote ee a aes eae See aes boda Pee 110 Olt ars ERA A ANA e Meee oe ee ee 111 NES ea teen eh a ace ie eG ace ee ees ae ee ee Dee x 112 ROIS coeg 5 Ghd Sade Ow OE ee Be eee ES ee he a Bes 112 Display Preferences cc eea sep rag ea E LP Oe REE REE ESOS SE RE HS 113 Edit COLOS e aia organ a ts Gt do act aren Grane oe er eat oe Be 113 vi Peak Labeling eos dace goes o Ro eA Ro AE ee ee e As 114 Energy UNIS sor cise o a arte oh kh meat ese ob Sw ae a 116 Plot MOG cng d m kee or Aes e ete er Senos ee ee gr ee ee es dr ic
314. set To clear the flag set that function to off to clear the overrange flag and set the value to 2048 then correct the cause of the excessive drift before returning the mode to on Power Manager This section refers to adjustments for the InSpector MCA only Battery A and B Status Bat A or B Status is reported as Good when the battery voltage is gt 5 8 V Low when the battery voltage is lt 5 8 V Discharged when the battery voltage is lt 5 5 V 282 Status Screen Entries When the Power Manager detects a Discharged battery it will no longer use that battery port until the battery is removed voltage detected as lt 0 5 V and replaced with a battery with a voltage gt 5 5 V The Power Manager specifically looks for the battery to be removed because an unloaded battery will recover some of its voltage but will not have enough capacity to support a load for more than a few seconds Batteries The line labeled Batteries shows the status of the InSpector s batteries If this line reads Warning you have only a few minutes of power left before the In Spector shuts down Good means that at least one battery s voltage is gt 5 8 V Warning means that the voltage of both batteries or just one if only one is con nected is lt 5 8 V RAM Batt Back The RAM Batt Back line shows the condition of the internal lithium battery used for maintaining data in the spectrum memory when the I
315. sion factor is the number of becquerels in each lt gt unit Select the nuclides you want to include by clicking on them one at a time in the list box The activity of each nuclide in the selected units must be entered in the edit box provided any uncertainty should also be entered When data has been entered in all of the edit boxes click on the Change button to update the list box When all the nuclides to be extracted have had activities entered click on OK This will make entries in the certificate file for all of the energy lines of the selected 193 Using the Certificate File Editor 194 nuclides The emission rate for a line will be calculated from the activity and the abun dance of that line from the library file Certificate Extract This command lets you extract energy lines and their associated information from one or more existing certificate files CTF You can extract energy lines from multiple certificate files at any point while editing the current certificate file Select Certificate Extract then click on Open and double click on a certificate file name in the Files list box The Extract Certificate Nuclides list box will be populated with the energy lines from the selected certificate file as seen in Figure 143 Ej Extract Certificate Nuclides x Extracting From Nbsstd ctf Nuclide Energy keV 037 063 853 E ord HG 203 188 Select all SN 113 688 SR 85 _996 CS 137 638 x Deselect all
316. sistency Evaluator perform Action Level Calculations or run the Genie Script Engine LACE Line Activity Consistency Evaluator LACE is used only after NID analysis as 1t requires the quantitative output from such analysis Data can be post NID processed by LACE as a component of an analysis se quence as shown in Figure 105 or manually via the Post NID Processing sub menu of the Analyze menu 149 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 150 Step Selection se pe ere rr Peak Area Current Steps Interactive Peak Fit Insert Step Area Correction Efficiency Correction Nuclide Identification Delte Step ParentD aughterCorrection Alaorith Detection Limits gorithms Action Level Calculation Reporting Select Algorithm LACE DA Analysis MGA MGAU E Setup Algorithm Save Datasnumne GG Cancel Help _ Cancel Hep Load Figure 105 Adding LACE to an Analysis Sequence For addtional information on how Lace operates refer to Appendix F Line Activity Consistency Evaluator Figure 106 shows the output options available after analysis is performed by the LACE algorithm during manual initiation The results can be displayed as a plot on a screen window and or printed via a report template EJ LACE Analysis Setup ES r Generate Report cos Figure 106 LACE Analysis Setup Screen If no output option is selected the processed data is available for future output from the datasource CAM parameters designat
317. spectrum command Printing A certificate file osmosis caros Printing an input definition PUR control suis sia eros PUR LTC adjusting the RAM batt back status report entry Recalculate energy Ref peak function o Reject zero area peaks Release notes files Remote VDM note Report window options Reporting Phas 3 cora Soa ee Se a ea Reporting activity units Reporting an input definition 320 Requirements minimum system 239 Reset pulse width setting the 281 Resetting the HVPS 55 ROI limits peak area 2 2 aaa 136 ROIs AddIOB o 112 Automatically adding 112 Deleting few ak Sa ee we we we 8 112 Loading s re ee an i 112 SODE oie eee 112 Runtime configuration database 37 Runtime database Adding an MCA to 23 definition of o oo 37 Deleting an MCA from 25 Unloading a definition from 39 Sample changer AUVANCIDE gt pubs o Bere eG 59 Sample info Builduptype 161 Editi s 2b E eee ee 160 Text fields css irradia 161 Save as certificate gt vo c eatea ses 65 81 Saving a datasource osuna eean 43 Scale DisplaY e ca as Bee a ee 110 Ment convo bean eee eae s 110 Screen update rate 00 116 Search for
318. ss in the Genie Re port template Alternatively if you want to compute the Activity per mass gram di rectly select Efficiency Mass Other options are Efficiency Length and Efficiency Area Other options are Efficiency Length and Efficiency Area Calibrate by ISOCS LabSOCS Select Efficiency Option Select optional efficiency factor C Efficiency Mass C Efficiency Area C Efficiency Length Figure 66 Select Efficiency Factor 86 Calibrate Menu When you ve selected an efficiency type click on Next The calibration information will presented as in Figure 67 Calibrate by ISOCS LabSOCS Efficiency Results Show 3 05914E 002 3 50919E 002 3 31500E 002 i Report 2 71219E 002 1 97248E 002 Store 1 60350 002 1 30256E 002 A 1 05924E 002 8 18317E 003 Cross over Comment PART_123 456 Description ISOCS PART_123 456 Eff Geom ID LASS_BEAKER_1 coca too Figure 67 Results of an Efficiency Calibration If you have selected an Efficiency Mass Efficiency Length or Efficiency Area cali bration type the screen shown in Figure 68 will be displayed Check the default value for the mass or length area and correct it to the appropriate value if needed Press the Recalculate button to see the new values Calibrate by ISOCS LabSOCS Efficiency Results Show 4 93693 001 5 66324E 001 5 34985E 001 i Report 4 37701 001 i 3 18325E
319. ssary to adjust the ADC s LLD control This adjustment must be made after the amplifier and ADC have been set to process the energy range of interest To make the adjustment two radioactive sources with high activity are required Source A with an energy peak in the upper part of the desired spectrum and Source B a high activity source with an energy peak in the lower part of the spectrum The fol lowing LTC optimizing process assumes that Source A is Co and Source B is 3 Cs The 1173 2 keV peak of Co will be used as a reference The upper peak at 1332 5 keV is not a good choice because a sum peak of 37Cs at 2 x 661 6 1323 2 keV would interfere with the measurement 1 Put Source A near the detector so that the total count rate from this source is lt 5 keps 2 Set the LLD for a low value so that only energy above the noise level is acquired 3 Enter an ROI about the reference peak and with PUR enabled acquire data until there are 30 kcounts in the peak area 4 Clear the data from the spectrum then put Source B near the detector Adjust the total count rate to be the maximum expected in the course of normal measurements Repeat the acquisition stopping when the area of the reference peak reaches 30 kcounts 5 Compare the count rates Peak Area divided by the Elapsed Live Time of Steps 3 and 4 If they are within several percent of each other the LLD is properly adjusted 6 Ifyou feel improvement is desirable adj
320. ssed in Absolute terms For example in Figure 129 the abundance is 10 67 0 11 5 Key Line This check box is used to select or deselect this line as the Key Line for the nuclide It is used for reporting purposes and is normally selected for the highest abundance line for a nuclide with multiple lines 6 No Wt Mean Check the No Weighted Mean checkbox if you want to omit this line from the weighted mean activity calculations as described in the Activity Corrections section of the Algorithms chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual Once you ve made all your edits to an Energy Line clicking on the Change button will update the entry in the list with the values from the edit fields 181 Using the Nuclide Library Editor Adding an Energy Line To add a new line to the nuclide edit the line data as above then click on the Add Line button This will add the line in its proper energy position in the list of lines for the nuclide Deleting a Line To delete a line from a nuclide select it by clicking on it then click on the Delete but ton There is no confirmation query so make sure you have selected the correct line before clicking on Delete The Options Menu The Options Menu contains several commands that can be used to further tailor the Nuclide Library Extract This command lets you extract nuclides and their associated energy lines and informa tion from an existing nuclide library file
321. ssumed that a peak analysis has been performed on the spectrum including an optional background correction Correcting the Calibration 1 Perform a Peak to Total Calibration for the detector as described in Peak to Total on page 73 Alternatively you can load a Peak to Total calibration file previously created for that detector 2 Select Calibrate Efficiency By Certificate File Select the source certificate file for the gamma ray standard 3 Select the Perform Cascade Correction checkbox Figure 200 If any of the prerequisites have not been met an appropriate error message will be displayed The checkbox will be disabled and you must exit the dialog to correct the deficiency Otherwise the Cascade Correction group box will be enabled gw Efficiency Calibration Energy m Peak Edits keV Efficiency Eror Energy 59 50 kev 9 50 88 00 0 00000 0 00 Efficiency oO Delete 122 00 0 00000 0 00 279 00 0 00000 0 00 Error po Cross over 392 00 0 00000 0 00 662 00 0 00000 0 00 835 00 0 00000 0 00 Cascade Correction 898 00 0 00000 0 00 Geometry 1115 00 0 00000 9 00 Composer JC GENIE2K isocs data GEOMETRY Labor Select file 1173 20 0 00000 0 00 1332 60 0 00000 0 00 1836 00 0 00000 0 00 M Generate Reports gt T Detector Characterized for LabSOCS Geometry Composer IV Perform Cascade Correction Use results Figure 200 Enabling Cascade Correction 4 Select the geometry des
322. st current information is being displayed Geometry configuration j Geometry configuration Current ISOCS path c genie2k isocs exefiles template cnf Ver Release GENERAL_PURPOSE_MARINELLI_BEAKI LabSOCS 4 0 Sep 14 2001 GENERAL_PURPOSE_BEAKER LabSocs el 4 1 May 03 2002 CYLINDER_DISK_AND_POINT LabSocs 4 1 May 03 2002 SIMPLIFIED_BOX LabSocs 4 1 May 03 2002 CYLINDER_FROM_SIDE LabSocs 4 1 May 03 2002 SIMPLIFIED _SPHERE LabSocs 4 1 May 03 2002 SIMPLIFIED_MARINELLI_BE4KER LabSocs 4 0 Sep 14 2001 SIMPLIFIED_BEAKER LabSocs 4 1 May 03 2002 CIRCULAR_PLANE Isocs 4 0 Apr 2 2002 COMPLEX_BOX 4 0 Apr 2 2002 da 40 000050000 A DK Cancel Figure 172 The Geometry Configuration Tab The Current LabSOCS ISOCS Path tab displays the complete path to all of the data files used by the software Figure 173 If you use a different file structure you can change the data by double clicking on a path description then selecting a new path via the dialog box that is displayed 230 Option Menu Geometry configuration x Geometry configuration Current ISOCS path C GENIE2K isocs dat space ini ATTENUATION LIBRARY C_COLLIMATOR COINCIDENCE DATABASE DETECTOR_PAR ECC_OUTPUT GEOMETRY ISOCS_TMPL_NAME NUCLE _DESCRIBER PREDEFINED_ELIST C A GENIE 2K isocs data parameters mu04_8ib txt C GENIE2K isocs data parameters c_collimator txt C GENIE2K isocs data coincids C GENIE2K isocs data database C GENIE2K
323. t VFS control of the compare spec trum The choices offered by the ROI menu are Add or Delete an ROI Clear All ROIs and Load or Store an ROI file Add ROls Select Add ROIs or press the keyboard s INS key to enter an ROI between the current marker positions The ROI will be of the current ROI type as defined in the Prefer ences dialog page 113 Auto ROI Select Auto ROI or press the keyboard s Ctrl Ins to add an ROI at the current cursor position The ROI s width will be determined by the current energy and shape calibra tion The left channel will be 2 FWHM and 1 Low Tail to the left of the cursor The right channel will be 2 FWHM to the right of the cursor The ROI will be of the cur rent ROI type defined in the Preference s dialog page 113 Delete ROIs Select Delete ROIs or press the keyboard s DEL key to delete the ROI between the markers The item is disabled if the markers are not positioned at the limits of a previ ously defined ROI Clear All Selecting the Clear All command clears all ROIs in the current database Load Selecting Load displays a dialog box which lets you select a datasource whose ROIs are to be loaded into the current datasource These ROIs will replace the currently de fined ROIs if there are any Select the By Energy check box to load ROIs by en ergy This will attempt to use the energies stored in the ROI file rather than the channel values If the check box is not selected or
324. t be seen on the Edit Sample Information screen unless the GAAINFO FDS file is present in the directory defined by the environment variable EXEFILES refer to Genie 2000 Environment Settings on page 264 for more infor mation on environment variables When the More button is present it lets you define or customize a dialog which al lows editing of additional sample information parameters Only CAM sample class pa rameters are supported by this mechanism Note If an FDS file is defined that contains sample parameters already present on the main edit sample information dialog any value entries for those dupli cate parameters will be overridden by values entered in the main dialog screen Analysis Sequence The Analysis Sequence command allows you to create or edit analysis sequences that you can use to automatically analyze your spectra Figure 115 161 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 162 YY Edit Analysis Sequence Step Selection r Edit Steps Current Steps Peak Locate Insert Step oa Efficiency Correction Paget Nuclide Identification GainE valuator ParentD aughterCorrection Detection Limits Post NID Processing Repoting IO of Setup Algorithm Sequence Preferences gt 4 Cancel Help Load Store Execute Figure 115 The Edit Analysis Sequence Dialog Sizing the Window The Editor s window defaults to a minimum size but can easily be dragged to a larger size In the Algorit
325. t the Change button to move the changes to the list box Clear Button Instead of editing the values one by one you can remove all values from the text boxes for the highlighted line by selecting the Clear button This will clear all entries at the once Append to Existing Calibration When adding energy points to the current datasource from a file such as in construct ing a composite efficiency file there may be common energy points in the two files If the Append to Existing Calibration checkbox is selected the system will ask if you 84 Calibrate Menu want to append to the existing calibration If you answer yes it will tell you each time it finds a duplicate entry Editing the List When the values for all nuclides have been entered select OK to move to the Effi ciency Calibration screen This screen allows you to examine and if necessary edit any of the lines Please refer to Performing the Efficiency Calibration on page 89 for an illustration and explanation of this screen By ISOCS LabSOCS This calibration method is available only on systems with Model 573 ISOCS or Model S574 LabSOCS installed If neither ISOCS nor LabSOCS is installed on your system this command will be grayed out Choose Calibrate Efficiency By ISOCS LabSOCS to see the dialog box shown in Figure 65 The Run Geometry Composer button launches the Geometry Composer application described in Chapter 8 Calibrate by ISOCS LabSOCS
326. ta in any of the lines Please refer to Efficiency Calibration on page 89 for an illustration and explanation of this screen W Calibrate by Nuclide List x Library Stdib rib y Nuclides Save as Certificate IV Append to Existing Calibration OK Cancel Help Zi Figure 61 Calibrate by Nuclide List Save as Certificate If you highlight one or more nuclides then choose Save as Certificate you ll create a partial certificate file CTP which is similar to the full certificate file CTF created in the Certificate File Editor lacking only the assay date and time and the ac tivity units for each nuclide To save this as a full certificate file to use for efficiency calibration you ll have to add the missing information Highlight one or more nuclides then choose Additional Info to enter the additional information Append to Existing Calibration When adding energy points to the current datasource from a file such as in construct ing a composite efficiency file there may be common energy points in the two files If the Append to Existing Calibration checkbox is selected the system will ask if you want to append to the existing calibration If you answer yes it will tell you each time it finds a duplicate entry 81 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Additional Nuclide Information In addition to entering the nuclide s assay date and time and its activity units the scree
327. te analysis sequence 122 Expand COMA o 108 Offcommand 109 Explanation of the status screen 282 Export reporttoPDF 45 External Start Stop 48 Extracting Avcertificat usos ra Gas 194 A nuclide library 193 Certificate file energy lines 193 Nuclide library energy lines 182 File formats o 268 CN hw oe ee es 44 Ele Mes ar Se SS a GS Ee 41 Files analysis engine 268 Find Nuclide energy 189 Nuclide mass number 189 Nuclidename 188 Fine gain amplifier 53 Fit singlets peak area 135 Fixed parameters peak area 135 Font customization 273 Full certificate file 65 81 Full channel plot display 159 Full energy calibration 63 69 Gain Centroid control 52 Mode stabilizer 52 Spacing stabilizer 52 Window stabilizer 52 Gain evaluator oe corso a o 94 analysis phase 155 Generating efficiency data points 222 Generic detector characterizations for cascade correction 211 not for LabSOCS and ISOCS 210 Genie 2000 font customization 273 Genie 2000 Environment variables 264 Software installation 241 Geometry composer
328. ternational Copyright Treaties You have our express permission to make one archival copy of the software for backup protection You may not copy our software or any part of it for any other purpose Revised 1 Apr 03
329. ters starting on page 128 Unidentified Second Difference The generalized second difference method Figure 89 locates all peaks in the Search Region that are significantly above the continuum as described in the Generalized Second Difference Method section of the Algorithms chapter in the Genie 2000 Cus tomization Tools Manual 124 Analyze Menu w Peak Locate Unidentified 2nd Diff Setup Ea Search Region Start channel fi Stop channel 65535 Significance threshold 5 00 Tolerance 1 00 keV Energy CO FWHM J Add to existing results I Generate Report Cancel Help Execute Figure 89 Second Difference Peak Locate Setup Significance Threshold The second difference algorithm automatically calculates a significance value for each peak it considers The larger the peak with respect to the continuum that it rests on the larger the significance value Only peaks that exceed the Significance Threshold will be accepted as valid For less sensitivity for example to pick out just the large peaks for calibration the Significance Threshold can be raised For more sensitivity the significance limit may be lowered However experience has shown that threshold values below 3 00 produce increasing numbers of false peaks o Peak Locate User Specified ROI Setup Start channel fi Stop channel 65535 Use MCA View C Use ROI File Tolerance 1 00 keV Energy FWHM Search Region
330. ters should be set appropriately Analysis Sequence Description The Analysis Sequence Description dropdown is a list of the currently defined analysis sequence on your system Selecting one of the sequences will direct efficiency calibra tion to execute the peak locate and peak area engines of the selected sequence when the Auto button is pressed The default selection is NONE Energy Only Calibration The standard energy calibration includes low tail and FWHM values For a simpler energy calibration this function Figure 43 allows you to enter the calibration using only energy channel pairs either by the Cursor Method or the Manual Method If only 61 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis 62 one energy channel pair is entered a second pair will automatically be generated as lt energy channel 1 gt when you exit the dialog with an OK a Energy Calibration Energy Only Calibration Peak Edits Energy l key Channel Delete Cursor Approximate FWHM x _Cancel curve will be supplied Figure 43 Energy Only Calibration Manual Method To add an entry to the list box type an energy value into the Energy text box and the corresponding channel number in the Channel text box then select Accept You can add these energy channel pairs in any order they will always be displayed in ascend ing energy order Cursor Method To use this method there must be a spectrum in the Spectral Display area and its cur
331. the algorithms available for the Peak Locate phase To associate one of the algorithms with the phase highlight the algorithm then press OK to save the association The available analysis phases and algorithms are slightly different for the Alpha Spec troscopy Analysis option and the Gamma Spectroscopy Analysis option The setup screens and parameter choices for each of the analysis phases are described in detail in Analyze Menu of this manual starting on page 122 or in the Analyze Menu sec tion of the Model S509 Alpha Spectroscopy User s Manual 201 Using the Analysis Sequence Editor ea Peak Locate Algorithm Unidentified 2nd Ditt VMS Standard Peak Search User Specified Figure 148 Selecting a Peak Locate Analysis Phase Setup Algorithm After you have associated an algorithm with the phase highlight the step and press the Setup Algorithm button or double click on the step Now you can verify or change the algorithm s parameters Sequence Preferences After you have begun editing an analysis sequence press the Sequence Preferences button to set a group of preferences for that sequence Figure 149 Edit Sample Information If the Edit sample information box is checked you will be prompted to edit sample information when the sequence begins execution If the box is not checked there will be no prompt Note No prompt will be issued if the analysis sequence is executed in a command line envi
332. the Energy Units command can change how en ergy units are shown in the editor s dialog boxes and in reports The Dialog Box in Figure allows you to select which energy units you want to display eV keV MeV or Other The proper Conversion Factor for other units is defined as the number of keV units equal to 1 other unit For example the conversion factor for MeV would be 1000 be cause there are 1000 keV units in 1 MeV Saving a New Sequence File The File Save as command lets you save a new sequence file with a Description as shown in Figure 150 The Description is displayed in the editor s Sequence Title field the next time you open the file Save As Save in E3 Ctlfiles c E sE laa Data_sho asf Ecal_sho asf Fcal_sho asf Mda_sho asf Nid_file asf laa Peak_sho asf File name nid_sho ast Save as type Analysis Sequence Files 45F y Cancel Help Description NiD Analysis w Report Figure 150 Save As with a Description 205 Using Cascade Correction 7 Using Cascade Correction Canberra s patented Cascade Correction feature included in Genie 2000 software lets you more accurately determine the activities of radionuclides that exhibit cascade sum ming effects such as 8Y Co and 52Eu Prerequisites Before you execute a Cascade Correction analysis you must have performed these steps 1 Install the Model S501 Genie 2000 Gamma Analysis O
333. thms chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual Reference Peak The Reference Rate in counts per second is the emission rate of the reference source at the reference energy The Reference Energy is the energy of the reference peak Enter the Uncertainty of the reference peak in counts per second 140 Analyze Menu Peak Match Tolerance Enter the Peak Match Tolerance value either in energy or in FWHM units to define how large a difference to allow between a peak in the current spectrum and a peak in the background spectrum and still be considered the same peak Reference Source You can choose either a Stationary reference source or a Pulser For a stationary source the Reference Date is the date and time at which the source was measured Enter the Half Life of the nuclide which caused the reference peak and choose the half life s time units Years Days Hours Minutes or Seconds Background Subtract Select the Yes checkbox to perform background subtraction For the location of the background datasource enter a fully specified pathname in the Bkg File text box If you like press the Select button to look for a CNF background file to load Efficiency Correction S501 Gamma Option The efficiency correction phase contains the algorithms to cal culate the efficiency values for each of the peaks with calculated net areas You can select one of four modes from the drop down list Dual Linear Empirical or Interpo l
334. threshold which are then fitted us ing a pure Gaussian fit routine g vms Standard Peak Search Parameters x Peak Search Start Channel fi Peak Search Sensitivity 5 00 Peak Search End Channel 4096 Gaussian Sensitivity fi 0 00 Maximum Number of Iterations fi 0 I FWHM Based Rejection FWHM Rejection Ratio 1 00 TF Fit Singlets I Show Regions of Interest Critical Level Test I Use Fixed FWHM I Generate Report Cancel Help Figure 94 VMS Standard Peak Search Setup Peak Search Start End Channel The peak search will be performed on the region between the Peak Search Start and End Channels Peak Search Sensitivity The Sensitivity Threshold i e the number of standard deviations above background a feature must be to be considered a peak controls the sensitivity of the peak locating algorithm For example if the sensitivity is set to 5 and the average background in a region is 10 000 counts any feature with a height smaller than about 500 counts above background will be ignored One standard deviation of 10 000 is 100 Typically the sensitivity should be between 3 and 10 Gaussian Sensitivity The Gaussian Sensitivity determines how near to a pure Gaussian shape peaks should be Low settings 5 10 cause the peak fitting algorithm to expect cleanly shaped peaks Higher settings 15 20 provide the algorithm more latitude in working with poorly shaped peaks If multiplets are not being f
335. ticated routine to deter mine ROI limits it is not the best choice in certain calibrations such as for Nal spec tra The Marker Method is recommended for Nal spectra Marker Method To use the Marker Method there must be a spectrum in the Spectral Display area and its markers must be around the peak that is being used for calibration Select the Markers button to use the spectrum s markers to establish an ROI and at tempt to fit the peak The computed peak centroid computed FWHM and tail values will be calculated and displayed in the list box Now enter an energy value in the Energy text box and choose Accept to add the data to the highlighted list box entry The Marker Method is recommended for spectra where there are other peaks close to the calibration peak or when calibrating Nal spectra Auto Button The Auto button performs an automatic Peak Locate on the reference spectrum The list box is then populated with the energies found in both the populate file and the ref erence spectrum with their associated channel values Use Results Button The Use results button will retrieve energy channel FWHM tail results directly from the current datasource and populate the list box This button will be disabled if peak area analysis results are not present Show Button Select the Show button to display the energy calibration curve as a graph Please refer to Energy Show on page 72 for a complete discussion and an illustrati
336. tinuum more accurately but makes it more likely that close lying peaks will be considered as a multiplet instead of as a singlet Continuum Function You can establish the continuum of a spectrum by selecting either a Linear function or a Step function The Linear function is adequate when the spectrum s continuum is relatively flat It is a simple straightforward equation that estimates the continuum un der the peaks as a trapezoid The Step function should be chosen if there are any re gions in the spectrum where the continuum is significantly higher on the left side of a peak region than on the right side this function automatically reduces to a flat line if the continuum is flat None is normally not used with Gamma spectra it is typically used only with Alpha spectra This parameter can also be specified in Continuum in Calibrate Setup on page 60 Analyze Menu 95 Critical Level Test If the 95 Critical Level test is enabled the net peak area of a singlet is examined to see if it exceeds the 95 Critical Level value as described in the Critical Level Testing section of the Algorithms chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual Peaks that do not pass this test will be deleted from the peak results table If the Criti cal Level test is not enabled all peak areas are accepted regardless of their size even negative areas Fixed Parameters Selecting the Fixed FWHM Parameter or Fixed Tail Parameter check b
337. tion Setup will display each of the above mentioned environment settings You may keep the default settings or modify the settings Setup will run through the final installation steps 5 When the installation is complete some final instructions will be displayed Installing Optional Software To install another Genie 2000 program put the first or only installation disk in its drive then 243 Software Installation 1 Click Start Run and type setup where is your CD drive then click OK 2 Follow the instructions presented on the screen 3 Ifthe instructions on the screen tell you to reboot your system and you are installing several options you can install all of them before rebooting Completing the Installation After installing all the software e Install and configure the TCP IP network components page 244 e Install the AIM system drivers if required page 259 e For Models S500 and S502 you must install the security key page 262 e You might want to have a shortcut to the Genie 2000 folder on your desktop page 262 Installing TCP IP Network Components 244 The TCP IP network protocol is a standard component of the Windows operating sys tem environments The Genie 2000 software is a client server architecture communi cations between the client and server components is through Windows sockets using the TCP IP protocol Note Genie 2000 assumes that a network interface is installed in the loc
338. tions will be presented here For an in depth discussion of how the Convergence and MDRPN parameters affect the cali bration process refer to the LabSOCS ISOCS Technical Notes chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual Editing the Energy List Select the Energy List tab in Figure 162 to activate the Energy List Editor This editor al lows you to define the energies for which efficiencies will be calculated This feature may be used to establish properly spaced efficiency values for the desired energy range Figure 162 shows that the default energy list covers the 100 to 2000 keV range The error values listed are the estimated uncertainty error values for each energy based on LabSOCS ISOCS validation testing Deleting an Energy from the List Select the energy line to be deleted then click on Remove Adding an Energy to the List Type the new energy value into the Energy keV field and its associated uncertainty into the Error field then click on Add The new line will be added to the list Restoring the Default Values To restore the Energy List defaults in Figure 162 click on Use Default Energies Load Energy List Use this button to load a previously saved list of energies replacing the current one Save Energy List This button is used to save a custom list of energies for later use 219 Using the Geometry Composer Parameters controlling efficiency curve generation Xx Energy list Integration
339. to all of the found peaks and no more However to get reliable results and avoid excessive 95 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis computational time the number of input true energies should be no greater than twice the number of found energies and contain energies that actually correspond to most of the found peaks The routine can t resolve more than one nuclide at the same energy in the source of true energies so matches will not be made at any true energy that is repeated Best re sults will be obtained if all of the input true energies have a relative separation of at least several FWHM It is also desirable to have peaks that span the full range of the spectrum Current NID Analysis Results Select the Current NID Analysis Results button to specify the Nuclide ID analysis of the current spectrum as the source of true energies Using the current NID analysis results as the source of true energies will be successful only if any gain shift was small enough to be accommodated by the NID energy toler ance during analysis Unexpected or low quality NID analysis results may indicate an excessive gain shift that would be better evaluated using a different source of true energies In this case selecting only expected nuclide energies from a nuclide library or certificate file is rec ommended perhaps requiring some trial and error experimentation Certificate File Select the Certificate File button to specify a certificate CTF fi
340. to edit an existing MID File For instance you might want to e Change the default settings for any of your MCA s programmable components e Replace a manual HVPS with a programmable HVPS and select its default settings 21 MCA Input Definition Basic Concepts We ll begin with some basic concepts that are important to understand before actually getting into the details of how you define your system s MCAs Multiple MCA Configurations Since MCA definitions are saved in disk files you can have as many definitions as you like For example you might have one MCA defined as an 1K Sodium Iodide Spectroscopy MCA in one file and another as a 2K Sodium Iodide Spectroscopy MCA in another file Before you start an experiment you simply pick the configuration you want to use Because an MCA definition file can include any or all of the MCAs that are available to your system you can use more than one MCA at a time However each MCA can be included only once in a given definition file and each MCA in that file must have a unique name Using the MCA Definition Files To use an MCA Definition you must first have saved the definition to disk as a file Once you ve done that all you have to do is load that file into the VDM s internal MCA Runtime Configuration Database From that point on all MCA operations will use the configuration information that was stored in the Definition File To change to a new con figuration all you have to
341. to see the dialog box in Figure 37 which shows a typical HVPS adjust screen The controls you see on your adjust screen may vary depending on which HVPS you assigned to this datasource Stab C PwrMgr Gain C Filter Ki T300 a Status ol HVPS Reset E 3000 0v Figure 37 Typical High Voltage Adjust Dialog MCA Menu Voltage The Voltage scroll bar sets the output of the HVPS between the minimum and maxi mum settings of the Voltage Limit control set in the MID Editor The voltage can also be typed in from the keyboard then accepted with the Ok button within the control Status If the Power Manager described in the next section is in the Battery Full mode or the AC Full mode you can turn the HVPS On or Off In the Battery Save mode you can set the HVPS to Armed or Off If Armed is selected the HVPS will be automatically turned on when acquisition starts HVPS Reset The HVPS is turned Off when a fault caused by an overload or an Inhibit occurs with an InSpector HVPS After the fault condition has been cleared click on HVPS Reset to reset the HVPS then turn it On again with the Status control Clear Ov In Latches When a fault caused by an overload or an inhibit occurs with an ICB HVPS its Over load and Inhibit latches are set After the fault condition has been cleared click on Clear Ov In Latches to reset the latches Power Manager Click on the PwrMgr button to see the dialog box in Figure 38 which sh
342. to the system menu Pop Up Window Keys Enter Complete the pop up window Esc Cancel the pop up window Spacebar Set a check box on off or perform the task described on the select pushbutton Tab Move to the next entry field or check box Editing Keys Backspace left arrow delete Delete the character to the left of the cursor 15 Introduction Del Delete the character to the right of the cursor End or Ctrl Right Arrow key Move to the end of a field Home or Cirl Left Arrow key Move to the beginning of a field 16 The InSpector 2000 Simulator 2 MCA Input Definition The first step in using your Genie 2000 system is to create at least one MCA Input Definition MID so the system knows what kind of MCA is installed in or connected to your system This chapter demonstrates how to create the definition with both the MID Wizard and the MID Editor using the DSA 2000 MCA as an example Instructions for setting up your MCA will be found in its user s manual For most systems you ll use the MID Wizard to help you set up your Input Definition quickly and easily But if your Input Definition is more complex than the MID Wizard was designed to handle you 1l have to create your definition in the MID Editor which is covered in detail starting on page 21 For System 100 and AccuSpec MCAs refer to the Historical Canberra MCAs pdf file on your Genie 2000 CD ROM For AIM MCAs refer to the Model 556A User s Man ual
343. ts the analysis phases for the S500 Basic Spectroscopy Software and all those associated with installed options Each item in the menu lets you select an algorithm to associate with the selected phase then assign and save the algorithm s parameters execute the algorithm or do both The following sections discuss each of the phases their algorithms and the required parameters For more detailed information on the algorithms refer to the Algorithms chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual Acquisition The Acquire Setup dialog box Figure 88 allows you to define default acquisition pa rameters to be used when starting data collection on hardware datasources Time Preset You can set the Live Time or Real Time preset for the current hardware datasource in seconds minutes or hours Live Time and Real time are mutually exclusive but either time preset can be combined with any one computational preset see next subsection Wa Acquire Setup Eg r Time Computational Preset None Value ja C Integral Stat Chan TF C RealTime ini C Counts Stop Chan E a I Clear Data Time at Start of Acquisition Cancel Help Execute Figure 88 The Acquire Setup 123 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis Computational Presets These presets stop acquisition when a computed value you specify is reached When a computational preset is defined the chosen time preset is still active The acquire stop command is
344. tton to move the changes to the list box 68 Calibrate Menu Clear Button Instead of editing the values one by one you can remove all values from the text boxes for the highlighted line by selecting the Clear button This will clear all entries at the once Append to Existing Calibration When adding energy points to the current datasource from a file such as in construct ing a composite energy file there may be common energy points in the two files If the Append to Existing Calibration checkbox is selected the system will ask if you want to append to the existing calibration If you answer yes it will tell you each time it finds a duplicate entry Editing the List When you select OK you ll see the Energy Calibration Full screen which allows you to examine and if necessary edit the data in any of the lines Please refer to En ergy Calibration Full on page 69 for an illustration and explanation of this screen Energy Calibration Full The Energy Calibration Full dialog Figure 50 allows you to mark calibration peaks in a reference spectrum then calculate the energy vs channel FWHM vs en ergy and tail vs energy curves You can enter Calibration peaks into the list box by the Cursor Method or the Marker Method described in the following subsections ul Energy Calibration Full Energy Peak Edits keV Channel ices 80 04 Key 85 E E y Cursor Delete E E Mark
345. tual detector Consult your detector s specification sheet to obtain this information Planar Detectors BEGe etc Select the detector named Dia mn Planar where nn is the diameter in mm which most closely matches the germanium crystal diameter of the ac tual detector Consult your detector s specification sheet to obtain this information Using this method a bias in the cascade summing correction factor of less than 15 can be expected For greater detail on the correction factor refer to the Selecting an ISOCS Detector Characterization chapter in the Genie 2000 Customization Tools Manual Figure 154 shows the result of selecting a characterized detector named Example LabSOCS Template SIMPLIFIED_MARINELLI_BEAKER r Template Version Detector and End Cap r Geometry Information OK pe pesien p ooo o E Save Data As User E Diam 88 3 Length 150 Comment none oa Version Set Sample via ES Scale Help Dimensions mm om C inch C Volume ml C Weight g foot Com Show Template Geometry Elements Dimensions Density and Material p lt Select from List a Descipion a1 az 43 a4 as prema Maternal CallMuEditor 4 Ena War Detector Well 0 ne Container Diameter cellulos 2 concrete csteel Source Detector ditt Figure 154 The Detector Has Been Selected 211 Using the Geometry Composer 212 Geometry Informatio
346. tually five times the Gain Rate Divisor set in MID the stabilizer samples the spectrum windows as defined by the Gain Centroid Gain Window and Gain Spacing controls and calculates the ratio of events counts in the two windows It then adjusts the spectrum s stabilizer gain up or down accordingly It continues adjustments until this ratio is equivalent to the speci fied Gain Ratio If the Gain Factor should over significant time fall outside of the al lowable 10 or 1 range then a fault is triggered The fault is cleared only when the stabilizer is turned off If Gain Mode is set to Hold the stabilizer will maintain the current stabilizer gain If the stabilizer is turned off the gain is reset to 1 0 and therefore has no effect on the spectrum Note that since the spectrum is not affected by thermal effects in hardware components as would a real InSpector 2000 the only way to test the Stabilizer for training pur poses for instance would be to manually change the Amp Gain or Voltage slightly during acquisition Acquisition and Analysis Filter Digital Oscilloscope and Pole Zero The Simulator supports the Digital Oscilloscope Pole Zero Assistant and the Filter settings Rise Time and Flat Top The Simulator creates an approximate trapezoidal pulse from the current Rise Time and Flat Top settings It uses the Pole Zero setting to adjust the overshoot or undershoot relative to baseline of the pulse s trailing edge It also uses
347. tus of each hardware datasource will be shown in the top left corner You can list the next set of eight eight either by using F6 next datasource or by se lecting the Datasource More menu item and choosing any of the open datasources When displaying multiple datasources the current datasource has a heavy border around its display and its name is displayed in the Title Bar Single click on any one of the display areas to make it the current datasource Double click on any one of the display areas to make that datasource a full screen display 175 Using the Nuclide Library Editor 4 Using the Nuclide Library Editor Included with the Genie 2000 Basic Spectroscopy software is an editor for creating and maintaining the nuclide libraries that are used for both qualitative and quantitative radionuclide analysis In this chapter we ll take a look at how to use that editor to modify existing and create new nuclide libraries Getting Started To start the Editor double click on its icon in the Genie 2000 folder This will start the program and will bring up the Dialog Box shown in Figure 126 We Nuclide Library Editor Demolib nlb File Search Nuclide Name Type Natural w Uncertainty Energy Lines Energy Uncertainty I Key Line I No Wt Mean Name SC 46 c0 57 c0 60 SE 75 Add Nuclide Add Line Change Delete More Sizing the Window The Editor s window defaults to a min
348. tware must be connected to a parallel port 1 Referring to Installing Windows on page 240 install the appropriate Windows operating system 2 Install MCA hardware and any network hardware Refer to the manual for your for installation instructions For the System 100 and AccuSpec MCAs refer to the Hardware Installation chapter of the Historical Canberra MCAs pdf file on your Genie 2000 CD ROM 3 Referring to Installing Genie 2000 on page 241 install the Basic Spectroscopy Software 4 Referring to Installing TCP IP Components on page 244 install the required TCP IP network software components 5 To install any Genie 2000 software options refer to Installing Optional Software on page 243 6 Additional information on customizing Windows for running Genie 2000 which is not required by most users can be found in Appendix B Genie 2000 Configuration 7 To set up your MCA Input Definitions use the MID Wizard or MID Editor both described in Chapter 2 MCA Input Definition Installing Windows Windows must be installed on the hard drive refer to the appropriate Windows manu als for complete instructions Please follow these guidelines when installing Windows on your system 1 You ll need approximately 550 MB Windows NT 2000 or 1 5 GB Windows XP of free space on your hard disk for the complete Windows installation 2 Remove all Canberra PC board acquisition devices prior to the installation o
349. tween these baseline values and the Adjust Control settings during acquisition CAM_F_LLD is used as the LLD setting when LLD Mode is set to Auto Baseline values are discussed in detail in several of the following sections 1 These parameters are normally stored as part of a saved CAM file If the parameters are not present in the file the Pars exe utility shipped with Genie 2000 can be used to set values for these parameters 288 Acquisition and Analysis PHA Mode The template file is the basic for the spectrum generated for a particular Simulator de vice The total counts in the template spectrum the Integral is calculated when the template spectrum is read The resulting spectrum will produce approximately the same number of counts per second as the template spectrum The elapsed times are also read from the template CAM file which will be used to generate correct spectrum activity i e counts per second and correct dead time dis play Note that in all of the spectrum and dead time generation there is some random ness added to enhance realism MCS Mode Spectrum generation for MCS mode is implemented simply to give some facsimile of results The Integral and ROI Modes use the same template spectrum as the PHA mode The activity of the template spectrum is used in MCS mode to generate the cor rect number of events per unit time Integral Mode uses the entire template spectrum to calculate activity and ROI mode
350. ty can indicate a significant differ ence in the atomic number between the efficiency calibration and the measured sam ple Upward concavity indicates that the efficiency calibration has a higher atomic number than the measured sample while a downward concavity indicates that the effi ciency calibration has a lower atomic number than the measured sample LACE Example To illustrate how LACE could be used with an actual measurement a 20 mL scintilla tion vial containing an epoxy matrix with a 15 Eu source and an intervening thin 1 63 mm copper absorber was measured Using these nominal parameters a LabSOCS ef ficiency calibration was calculated and the LACE results are shown in Figure 208 The relatively flat curve slope 0 005 0 030 indicates a reasonably good match between the efficiency calibration and sample However the effects of a mismatch between the calibration and sample for certain parameters can be seen in subsequent figures 299 Line Activity Consistency Evaluator 300 103 Energy keV intR 0 021 0 005 0 030 lniE Figure 208 LACE Results with Nominal Parameters Figures 209 and 210 show the effect of halving to 0 815 mm and doubling to 3 26 mm the nominal absorber thickness of 1 63 mm in the calibration Positive slope indi cates the absorber thickness is lower in the calibration than in the sample while nega tive slope indicates the absorber thickness is higher in the calibration tha
351. type choose DSA 2000 then click the Next button MID Setup Wizard Step 1 Select MCA To start select an MCA device from the list below p Available MCAs E EH Network MCAs E9 AM E9 AlM DSP SA 2000 E USB MCAs al RS232 MCAs H Plugin Board MCAs E IEEE 488 MCAs Cancel Help Figure 2 Step 1 18 The MID Wizard Step 2 The Step 2 screen Figure 3 will ask you to define the MCA s Full Memory size Sta tion address and the acquisition mode PHA or MCS MID Setup Wizard Step 2 oe Figure 3 Step 2 Step 3 The Step 3 screen Figure 4 asks for an Input Name the Detector Type Memory Groups and the Number of Channels MID Setup Wizard Step 3 Configure Detector Figure 4 Step 3 19 MCA Input Definition You can change the default Input Name if you like but if the field is empty you won t be able to go to the next screen With the Memory Groups box selected the full memory can be divided into two or more memory groups The number of groups depends on the Number of Channels set ting Steps 4 and 5 Steps 4 and 5 are not used in setting up the DSA 2000 Step 6 The Step 6 screen in Figure 5 asks you to define the high voltage power supply s Range Voltage Limit and working Voltage MID Setup Wizard Step 6 Configure High Yoltage Power Supply C 1300v Range 5000y C 5000v 1300 4v ok st 2 1300 5000 5000 0v 4
352. u Strip The Strip command Figure 120 lets you choose the Background Datasource multi plied by the selected factor to be subtracted from the Current Datasource channel by channel lust 5 CAMFILES y Am1000 cnf D Naidemo cnf D Test_spc cnf Amblank cnt nbsstd cnf la Th1000 cnt Bkgd1 cnf Put 000 cnf 8 Thblank cnf Cal cnf Publank cnf la U1000 cnf Cemipf cnt Test_bkg cnf la Ublank cnf cue Type C Detector CAM File T Open as read only Source Source Background fi Figure 120 The Strip Dialog Source Source Background Enter the factor to multiply the Background Datasource by Background Datasource Click on one of the Source buttons then select a CAM File or a Detector from the list box to start the strip function Smooth Choosing Smooth Figure 121 lets you smooth the current datasource to decrease or eliminate random data fluctuations You can choose one of six weighted average smoothing algorithms from 3 point to 13 point 169 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis C 9 Point C 11 Point C 7 Point C 13 Point Cancel Help Figure 121 The Smooth Dialog How Smoothing Works As an example of how smoothing works let s consider 3 Point smoothing which weight averages three channels at a time the current channel and one channel to either side The weighted average value is placed in the current channel then the algorithm moves on to the next channel repe
353. ue Sets the dwell time within the selected Range Disc Mode This can be TTL FDisc or ROI TTL picks up the signals to be counted from the ex ternal connector FDisc sees any counts converted by the DSP ROI counts only those events in a limited Region of Interest For the AccuSpec FMS board there is a special mode of operation that emulates PHA acquisition For this detector PHA replaces FDisc as a possible mode and the follow ing controls to support pseudo PHA appear Scan Window The percent of the start end window used to set the discriminator ROI Scan Start Percent of full scale where the scan for PHA data will start Scan End Percent of full scale where the scan for PHA data will end Set ROI The FMS board uses SCA LLD and ULD as percent of full scale instead of ROI Start and End This button picks up the current Left and Right Marker positions and sets those values from them Those settings will then be used for any subsequent ROI mode acquisition Pseudo PHA Pseudo PHA is intended to be used to collect a pseudo spectrum to be used for defined discrimination window to be used during ROI mode of MCS When you select PHA mode and then Start Acquire the values for scan window scan start and scan end will be used as follows e With a fixed dwell time 2 ms e The discrimination ROI is set to the scan window limited by and scaled to the scan start and scan end e That scan window m
354. ue during installation CINETCFG Fully specified pathname of Network Configuration File SET CINETCFG C GENIE2K CTLFILES G2K_VDM NCF CAMFILES Pathname used for storing CAM CNF Certificate CTF Workspace WSP and Nuclide Library NLB files SET CAMFILES C GENIE2K CAMFILES VDM TEMPS Pathname which the VDM will use to manage temporary files SET VDM TEMPS C GENIE2K VDMTEMP EXEFILES Pathname where all Genie 2000 EXE and DLL files are stored SET EXEFILES C GENIE2K EXEFILES GENIE2K Pathname defining the root directory in which Genie 2000 was installed SET GENIE2K C GENIE2K MCASDRIVERS Pathname which the VDM will search for Programmable Device Driver DRD files SET MCAS DRIVERS C GENIE2K DRIVERS ASEQFILES Pathname which the Acquisition and Analysis applications will search for Analysis Sequence ASF files so that the Analyze menu can be populated with a list of predefined sequences the Edit Current Sequence menu will also use this when opening and saving analysis sequence files SET ASEQFILES C GENIE2K CTLFILES MCASDEFINES Pathname used by the VDM for managing MCA Input Def inition MID files and MCA Configuration Files SET MCA DEFINES C GENIE2K MIDFILES 265 Genie 2000 Configuration RTPLFILES Pathname which the Acquisition and Analysis applications will search for Report Template TPL files when display ing the setup dialog for the standard report module SET RTPLFILES C GENIE2K CTLFILES R
355. uences and Executable programs There are 10 special Analysis buttons and 10 special Executable buttons These can be added to any toolbar from the Commands pane Then using the Customize Buttons pane select the appropriate item from alist box and e To change an Analysis Sequence button select the sequence from the drop down Analysis Sequence combo box e To change an Executable button edit the command line in the Executable edit field To browse for a specific program use the Browse button Select OK from the dialog will confirm all changes Cancel will discard all changes The settings only be permanently saved if the Save button is selected in Display Preferences Otherwise the toolbars will return to the last saved state upon the next invocation of the Acquisition and Analysis window Display Menu Status Page Shown Unchecking the Status Page Shown checkbox removes the Status Page from the dis play leaving more room for the spectrum Checking the Status Page Shown checkbox lets you click the Status Pages button to choose which pages will be displayed Figure 85 The Status Pages you choose can be saved as a permanent setting see Display Prefer ences Save on page 113 Status Pages EZ ple Info Calibration Info isplay Info ut Info Di Inp User Info v Nuclide Info Cancel Help Figure 85 Selecting the Status Pages Note that some of the data shown on the Status Pages is the result of
356. umber of channels assigned in the Devices MCA menu Out of Service lets you make this Input temporarily unavailable Memory Groups allows you to define a multi memory group input Saving the Input Definition After completing the definition use the Editor s File Save command to save the definition so that it can be loaded into the MCA Runtime Configuration Database for use See Loading and Unloading Definitions on page 38 To remind you to save a changed definition you ll see an asterisk next to the name of the current definition in the Title Bar 34 Changing the Summary View CAUTION If you change an existing Input Definition saving it will clear the Acquisition Start time You will be asked to retain the ex isting energy calibration information The File Descriptor When a Definition is saved for the first time the Save As file dialog box is automati cally opened In this dialog box Figure 22 you ll see a File Descriptor field which lets you store a 32 character description with your file to make it easier to locate when you want to use it again File Name DSA 2000 MID File Descriptor Add a file description here Directory is CAGENIE2K1MIDFILES Cancel Help Figure 22 The Save As Dialog Changing the Summary View Before going on to see how to edit an existing Input Definition Table one that you ve built previously and saved to disk there s one more menu to look at
357. up this geometry Template Version The template version you selected is shown here default in this case Detector and End Cap For the most accurate efficiency calibration and for cascade summing results the HPGe detector being used in this geometry definition should have been characterized for LabSOCS ISOCS at the factory If that option has been purchased and if the detec tor characterization file has been installed the detector s serial number will appear in the drop down list Selecting 1t will automatically insert its dimensions into the Diam and Length parameters CAUTION If you have LabSOCS or ISOCS installed do not use the ge neric characterizations for Coaxial or Planar detectors for ef ficiency calibrations they are not suitable for that purpose Nor should you use the Example detector it s used only for testing and training For accurate efficiency calibration results you must use the specific characterization file supplied for your particular de tector 210 Editing the Detector and Sample Dimensions The generic characterizations are used only by Cascade Correction users who do not have LabSOCS or ISOCS soft ware and thus do not have their individual detectors charac terized e Coaxial Detectors GC GX GR etc Select the detector named Dia nn _Coaxial where nn is the diameter in mm which most closely matches the germanium crystal diameter of the ac
358. ure 180 245 Software Installation Select Network Adapter Click the Network Adapter that matches your hardware and then HH click OK If you have an installation disk for this component click Have Disk Network Adapter EF Microdyne NE10 100 PCI Adapter B MicroGate SyncLink Intemet Adapter MS Loopback Adapter BY NCR StarLAN 16 4 Token Ring Adapter E Network Peripherals FDDI AT2 BRA i atinerle Dorimbiorsla COOL AT Figure 180 Select Network Adapter Select the appropriate vendor and network adapter card to match the one in your machine If none is present then select the MS Loopback Adapter entry in the Network Adapters list Choose OK to add the selected adapter You will be prompted for your Windows NT 2000 XP installation disks CD ROM in order to copy the required files for the selected network adapter note that on some pre loaded systems the Windows NT 2000 XP distribution is installed on the hard disk partition containing Windows NT 2000 XP 3 It is now time to add the TCP IP protocol Select the Protocols notebook tab on the Network Settings screen and press the Add button to bring up the Select Network Component Protocol dialog Figure 181 Select Network Protocol Click the Network Protocol that you want to install then click OK If LS you have an installation disk for this component click Have Disk Network Protocol Y NetBEUI Protocol Y NWLink IPX SPX Compatible Transport 7 Poi
359. ured sample matrix thickness is less than the calibration matrix thickness LACE Analysis while a positive slope indicates that the measured sample matrix thickness is greater than the calibration matrix thickness Matrix Thickness T Matrix Thickness cm 2 oO Q q 1000 Energy keV Figure 201 Simulating Discrepancies in Matrix Thickness Figure 202 shows how the activity ratio changes when the sample matrix density is different from the calibration matrix density of 2 7 g cm A negative slope indicates that the measured sample matrix density is less than the calibration matrix density while a positive slope indicates that the measured sample matrix density is greater than the calibration matrix density 295 Line Activity Consistency Evaluator 296 Matrix Density F Matrix Density qiem Activity Ratio 1000 Energy keV Figure 202 Simulating Discrepancies in Matrix Density Figure 203 shows how the activity ratio changes when the sample absorber thickness is different from the calibration absorber thickness of 1 cm A negative slope indicates that the measured sample absorber thickness is less than the calibration absorber thick ness while a positive slope indicates that the measured sample absorber thickness is greater than the calibration absorber thickness Absorber Thickness 37 Absorber Thickness cm 2 oO r ES z a o lt q 1000 Energy keV
360. urn to the Efficiency Results screen Figure 67 on page 87 Using the Calibration Select the Finish button which will then load this newly created efficiency calibration into the currently open datasource If the calibration was Stored then you can also use the Calibrate Load or the Calibrate Efficiency By Calibration File command to load the file you just created Performing the Efficiency Calibration The Efficiency Calibration screen Figure 71 will be seen only after you ve com pleted all steps for the method you chose on page 79 Certificate File Nuclide List Calibration File or Entry 89 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis ul Efficiency Calibration Energy keV 88 122 279 392 662 835 898 1115 1173 1332 Efficiency 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 Error m Peak Edits Energy Efficiency Error e Delete Cross over 0 00000 0 00000 b eports T Wheractenced for Leb SWies Auto Use results 1836 gt Geometry Lomposer TT Perform Cascade Correction Figure 71 Efficiency Calibration Peak Edits Peak Edits lets you enter Energy Efficiency and Error data by hand You can use up to 45 calibration data sets for calibration any more than that will be ignored Since Efficiency Calibration always executes the Peak Locate and Peak Area algo rithms you should first choose the a
361. ust the LLD about 1 or 2 higher 7 Repeat Steps 3 through 6 until an optimum setting has been achieved 277 Technical Information Manual Pole Zero At high count rates the pole zero adjustment is extremely critical for maintaining good resolution and low peak shift Figure 194 shows how misadjustment will affect peak shape and resolution With correct P Z spectral peaks will appear symmetrical Undercompensated P Z will produce low energy tailing Overcompensated P Z will produce high energy tailing Figure 194 The Effect of Pole Zero on a Spectral Peak For a precise and optimum setting of the pole zero a scope vertical sensitivity of 50 mV div should be used However most scopes will overload for a 7 V input signal when the vertical sensitivity is set for 50 mV div Overloading the scope input will distort the signals recovery to the baseline Thus the pole zero will be incorrectly adjusted resulting in a loss of resolution at high count rates When performing the manual pole zero set the scope vertical sensitivity to 50 mV div clamping the signal with the clamp box or the equivalent The AMP signal will now be clamped eliminating potential scope overload allowing precise pole zero adjustment Pole Zero Using a Ge Detector and a Co Source Adjust the position of the source so that the count rate is between 2 kcps and 25 kcps While observing the signal at the amplifier s output connector adjust t
362. uto Gain Adjust When the gain of a measurement system changes between the energy calibration acquisition and other acquisitions the energy calibration becomes inaccurate for the other acquisitions This suite of gain adjustment utilities provides the ability to assess the magnitude and importance of gain shifts for all datasources Gain Evaluator and to fix the gain shift for active detectors Auto Gain Adjust and saved files File Gain Adjust The routine collects a spectrum analyzes it for peaks compares the energy at which each peak is observed against the true energy in a certificate file then derives the ac tual energy calibration equation Differences between actual and desired energy cali brations drive the hardware adjustments The Auto Gain Adjust and Gain Evaluator functions primarily correct and assess gain shift errors in the slope term of the initial energy calibration Though some error in the initial equation s other calibration terms zero intercept and quadratic higher order can be accommodated you should ensure that these other terms are reasonably accu rate to obtain the most stable reliable results The AGA Routine 1 Acquires a spectrum for the specified preset live time 2 Performs a peak search using the specified ASF algorithm 3 Matches the found peak energies to the energies in the specified certificate A weighted average gain correction factor and possibly a zero correction is calculated
363. ve and at least four points are required for a third order curve The Order of the polynomial field is enabled for the energy curve only Click on the button to increase decrease the order value Select the Print button to send an output of the currently displayed curve s to the de fault print queue Peak to Total Calibration A Peak to Total efficiency calibration is required before you can use Canberra s patented Cascade Summing Correction feature refer to Using Cascade Correction on page 206 Guidelines for Improving Accuracy The following are provided as guidelines for performing an accurate Peak to Total P T calibration Calibration Sources In order to carry out a P T calibration we recommend a set of low cost point sources with the following nuclides Cd 7Co 3Sn 37Cs Mn and Zn The Model S PTC P T Calibration Source Set available from Canberra is a convenient set of ra dioactive sources suitable for the P T calibration of any detector Note that the peak to total ratios at Cd 88 keV and 3Sn 392 keV gamma ray en ergies could be inaccurate because of X ray contributions to the total counts in these spectra To filter out the X rays either a thin absorber foil may be placed between the source and the detector or the Extrapolation Channel parameter page 76 may be used to cut off the X ray and noise contributions to the total Background Compensation When the ambi
364. working in the Show Efficiency Calibration Curve dialog box so that you can easily change the graph s scalne change curve type change the order of the polynomial or drop peaks If you highlight a peak in the List Peaks box its number will automatically be placed in the Peak text box so that you can easily drop it Print Select the Print button to send an output of the currently displayed curve s to the de fault print queue Gain Evaluator The Gain Evaluator Figure 74 which can be used with both file datasources and de tector datasources does not perform any hardware adjustments Instead it allows you to analyze the quality of the current datasource energy calibration and gain settings to assess the impact on NID analysis and to make corrective data adjustments including file gain adjustments and saving the calculated energy calibration The specified datasource must already contain a spectrum acquired from a source with known true energies When the Evaluator window opens the evaluation results are populated using the datasource NID analysis results for true energies and the current peak search results for found energies The Gain Evaluator and Auto Gain Adjust functions primarily correct and assess gain shift errors in the slope term of the initial energy calibration Though some error in the initial equation s other calibration terms zero intercept and quadratic higher order Calibrate Menu can be accommodated you s
365. y s contents click on File Report then click on Yes If you click on No only the text file will be created and saved The default save path is C GENIE2K REPFILES name RPT where name is the name of the library being printed Exiting the Editor When you are finished with the editor click on the Exit command in the File menu to close it The Master Libraries To help you build tailored libraries Genie 2000 is shipped with a set of four master li braries containing about 800 nuclides and 31 000 energy lines obtained from the NUDAT database maintained by the National Nuclear Data Center of the Brookhaven National Laboratory These master libraries named A_G NLB H_O NLB P_R NLB S_S NLB T_T NLB and U_Z NLB contain nuclides with names starting with letters in each file s name The Master Libraries include these 1OCFR20 Appendix B parameters DAC Effluent Concentrations and Release to Sewers values class has been set to most restrictive non zero D W Y category For practical reasons the NUDAT data has been somewhat reduced by including only e Gamma data e Gamma energies greater than 50 keV e Nuclides with half lives greater than three minutes e Energy lines with branching ratios greater than 0 1 To copy nuclide data from one of these libraries into the current library choose Options Extract open one of these master libraries then select the nuclides of interest to copy from the master library to the current libr
366. y Evaluator X Scale Includes edit boxes for specifying the X axis limits for viewing Clicking Auto allows LACE to calculate limits based on the data points for the displayed nuclide View When checked LACE displays X and or Y grid lines on the graph Save Preferences Saves the user options preferences Ratio X Scale Y Scale and View to the registry which are then reloaded when LACE is later run again These settings will be stored in registry location HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE Canberra Industries Inc LACE Prefer ences Print Graph Prints a hard copy of the graph When you change the graph s Y scale limits so that one or more points fall outside those limits those outlying points will be plotted along the edge of the graph in or der to show their existence The graph shown in Figure 217 shows an outlying point at the top edge Point outlying high Energy keV Figure 217 Changing the Graph s Y Scale Limits 308 LACE Report As mentioned previously the File and Option menus are displayed only when LACE is executed manually i e not automatically by LACE itself The menu options are de scribed below File Menu Select Open to open a CAM file for viewing Close will close the currently opened file Exit will quit the LACE Options Menu Auto Size Selecting this option will cause the graph to grow shrink in proportion to the Viewer window Controls maintain their positions relativ
367. y Shift Y axis The energy shift plotted at each matched true energy is the difference between the true energy and the corresponding matched found energy Error Bars Error bars plotted at each point show the uncertainty in energy shift at each matched true energy Fit to Data Points The solid line represents the fit to the data points If the solid line is sloped gain has shifted If the solid line doesn t pass through the origin zero has shifted A perfect en ergy calibration would have a flat horizontal line passing through the origin Data Text Box The Data Text Box shows the data similar to the Auto Gain Adjust dialog s Data Text Box page 104 These evaluation results are concatenated with any previous results during the current session Key data to focus on includes the reported reliability of the results evaluated percent gain shift and corresponding shift FWHM fraction Review the table of energy matches to assess whether the match results and evaluated gain shift seem logical The shift FWHM fraction s provide an indication of whether NID analysis should be suc cessful given the NID energy tolerance used for the analysis when specified as FWHM Fix File Gain Click the Fix File Gain button which is enabled only for file datasources to execute a a File Gain Adjustment page 106 with the calculated energy calibration as the goal energy calibration This causes a rebinning of the spectrum to make the current e
368. y calibration process air fills all undefined spaces between the sample and the detector In order to correctly calculate the attenuation of the air you ll have to define three environmental ambient parameters To edit these parameters temperature pressure and relative humidity select Edit Environment You ll see the dialog box in Figure 161 Edit Environment Temperature Pressure Celsius Fahrenheit Kelvin mmHg C Atmosphere Value fez Value 760 Relative humidity 30 Cancel Figure 161 The Edit Environment Dialog Note These edits affect only the current geometry You can change the defaults for all future geometries under Default Parameters for New Geometry in the Options menu page 231 218 Editing the Efficiency Parameters Editing the Efficiency Parameters If you need to modify the Convergence Maximum Detector Reference Point Number MDRPN Energies and Error Values used in the LabSOCS ISOCS efficiency cali bration process select the command Efficiency Parameters for this Geometry from the Edit menu which opens the dialog box shown in Figure 162 Note These edits affect only the current geometry You can change the defaults for all future geometries under Setting the Default Parameters for New Ge ometry in the Options menu page 231 Since editing and using these parameters is beyond the scope of this chapter only an overview of parameter use and editing func
369. y is CAGENIESKACTLFILESA Seq Descriptions Spectral Data Report Energy Calibration Report NID Analysis w Report to a file Peak Analysis w Report NID Analusis w Rennrt Cancel Curent Help Figure 118 Loading a Sequence 166 Options Menu OK Selecting OK loads the sequence highlighted in the Seq Descriptions list Current Selecting Current loads the steps from the last sequence file executed in this session or if no sequence has been executed the sequence stored in the current datasource Store Store allows you to save the currently defined analysis sequence as a file These files will appear in both the Analyze menu and the Load screen s sequence descriptions Execute The Execute button executes the currently defined analysis sequence which is the se quence of steps listed in the Current Steps list box Options Menu The Options Menu lets you Change the Operator s Name perform Strip and Smooth and work with the Report Window Change Operator Name Selecting Change Operator Name lets you enter or edit an operator name This name will be stored in all currently opened datasources whenever various phases of analysis and calibration are performed Interactive NID The Interactive Nuclide Identification NID option Figure 119 brings up a modeless dialog allowing you to see a graphical connection between the location of the spec trum cursor and the nuclides in a library 167 Gamma
370. y of these are available for your MCA you ll select either manual device or pro grammable device here For the DSA 2000 these components are already selected so these screens are used for general information 28 Defining an MCA The Settings The following section describes those parameters for the DSA 2000 that can be ac cessed from the MID Editor via the Settings menu Figure 15 Settings MCA Sample Changer ADC MXR tabilizer Amplifier High voltage Power Mgmt VACUUM s DSP Gain DSP Filter Pulser Input Figure 15 The Settings Menu MCA Settings For the DSA 2000 This device has no adjustable controls so there s nothing to do here Stabilizer Settings The Stabilizer maintains the stability of high resolution spectroscopy in applications involving long count times or high count rates Selecting the Stabilizer command displays the Dialog Box shown in Figure 16 Note This window s initial focus is on the Cancel button pressing the keyboard s ENTER key after making changes in this dialog box will cancel the changes Be sure to click on the OK button to accept the changes 29 MCA Input Definition Digital Stabilizer for input DSA 2000 Gain centroid Gain window r Gain spacing Gain ratio 7680ch Ok 8 chs 64 chs 1 000 a m E al 10 2 0 01 Zero centroid ro window r Zero spacing Zero ratio sizch ok 8
371. yes it will tell you each time it finds a duplicate entry Editing the List When the values for all nuclides have been entered select OK to move to the Effi ciency Calibration screen This screen allows you to examine and if necessary edit any of the lines Please refer to Performing the Efficiency Calibration on page 89 for an illustration and explanation of this screen 83 Gamma Acquisition and Analysis By Entry Choosing to calibrate By Entry displays a dialog box Figure 64 which lets you man ually enter energy efficiency and percent error values to be used in generating the ef ficiency calibration Note that you can use up to 20 calibration data sets for calibration any more than that will be ignored w Calibration by Entry Energy keV Channel FWHM Low Tail FWHM Low Tail IV Append to Existing Calibration Figure 64 Calibrate by Entry Add Button To create an entry in the list box type an energy value in the Energy text box then the corresponding Efficiency and Percent Error values in their text boxes When the val ues have been entered select Add You can add these values in any order they will al ways be displayed in ascending energy order Delete Button To remove a line and all its values from the list box highlight the line then select the Delete button Change Button To change any of the values for a line highlight the line edit any of the values then selec

Genie 2000 Operations Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents